JP2017029230A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suppressing inconveniences that a player becomes confused after power restoration.SOLUTION: When power restoration occurs, a game control state before the power interruption occurs is restored on the basis of backed up storage information of storage means. Image data for displaying a performance image as a game progresses is generated and is displayed to image display means. The performance image includes a power restoration image whose prescribed period from restoration of the control state becomes a display object and a reservation storage image whose period that reservation storage of variable display is stored becomes a display object. When the power restoration image and the reservation storage image become display objects, image data superimposing the reservation storage image in front of the power restoration image is generated.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 88

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventional gaming machines, for example, pachinko gaming machines, generally execute a special symbol variation display based on the establishment of a start condition, and when the variation display is a special result, a special game advantageous to the player can be performed. It is.

  In such a gaming machine, the image display device executes the variable display of the three effect symbols in synchronization with the special symbol variable display, and the right to execute the variable display generated by winning the game ball at the start winning opening. A special symbol memory display indicating a certain start winning memory is displayed. In addition, when at least recovering from a power failure that occurred during execution of the special symbol fluctuation display, the power failure recovery screen is displayed and the special symbol memory display is displayed in a special manner in which the actual number of start winning prizes is unknown. (See Patent Document 1).

JP, 2014-212234, A

  However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, the special symbol memory display is displayed in a special mode so that the player can visually recognize the power failure recovery screen, so what is the current situation? However, there was a problem that the player might get confused.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress the inconvenience that the player is confused after the power is restored.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention executes a variable display of symbols based on the passing of the game ball to the starting area, and when the variable display becomes a special result, the gaming machine can execute a special game advantageous to the player. Storage means capable of holding information capable of specifying the control state even when the power is turned off, and the change display that has not yet been executed but passed through the starting area but is not yet executed in the storage means as a reserved storage. Based on the storage information stored in the storage means at the time of recovery from power interruption, the control state restoration means for restoring the game control state to the state before the occurrence of power interruption, and the progress of the game Display control means for performing control to generate image data for displaying the effect image and display it on the image display means, and the effect image includes a power source that is displayed for a predetermined period from the restoration of the control state. Recovery An image and a reserved storage image in which a period during which the reserved storage is stored is to be displayed, and the display control unit is configured to store the reserved memory when the power recovery image and the reserved storage image are to be displayed. Image data in which the power restoration image is superimposed on the front side of the image is generated.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the player is confused after the power is restored.

It is a figure which shows an example of the front view of a gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the perspective view of the game machine of the state which open | released the glass frame. It is a figure which shows an example of the perspective view of the back surface side of a game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed on the display area of a 1st image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the block diagram of the whole gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the jackpot determination table of a jackpot lottery. It is a figure which shows an example of a special symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a jackpot game control table. It is a figure which shows an example of the jackpot big winning opening / closing control table. It is a figure which shows an example of the jackpot big winning opening / closing control table. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state setting table at the time of jackpot game completion. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern determination table of the special symbol for 1st start openings. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern determination table of the special symbol for 2nd starting openings. It is a figure which shows an example of the preliminary determination table of the jackpot lottery for 1st start openings. It is a figure which shows an example of the prior determination table of the jackpot lottery for 2nd start openings. (A) is a diagram illustrating an example of a normal symbol hit determination table, (b) is a diagram illustrating an example of a normal symbol stop symbol determination table, and (c) is a diagram illustrating an example of a normal symbol variation pattern determination table. (D) is a figure which shows an example of the open mode determination table of a 2nd start opening. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the special symbol reservation storage area of the main RAM 101c, (b) is a figure which shows an example of each memory | storage part of a special symbol reservation storage area, (c) is a normal symbol reservation storage area of the main RAM 101c. The figure which shows an example, (d) is a figure which shows an example of each memory | storage part of a normal symbol holding | maintenance storage area. It is a figure which shows the main process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the timer interruption process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the input control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st start port detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 2nd start port detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the gate detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special symbol memory | storage determination process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the jackpot determination process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special symbol stop process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the jackpot game process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the jackpot game end process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the common figure normal electric power control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the auxiliary game process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the data creation process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the output control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the classification of the command transmitted to a production | presentation control board from a main control board. It is a figure which shows the classification of the command transmitted to a production | presentation control board from a main control board. It is a figure which shows the main process in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the timer interruption process in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the first half of the command analysis process in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the second half of the command analysis process in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the special figure reservation memory update process in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the change effect pattern determination process in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation production pattern determination table for production modes 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation production pattern determination table for production modes 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation production pattern determination table for 2nd start openings. It is a figure which shows the notice effect determination process in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows an example of a notice classification determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol notification mode determination table. It is a figure which shows the notice pattern and effect example 1 of a symbol notice effect. It is a figure which shows the notice pattern and effect example 2 of a symbol notice effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the music notice notice mode determination table for lose. It is a figure which shows an example of the music notice mode determination table for jackpots. It is a figure which shows the notice pattern and the example 1 of a music notice effect. It is a figure which shows the notice pattern and effect example 2 of a music notice effect. It is a figure which shows the notice pattern and effect example 3 of a music notice effect. It is a figure which shows the notice pattern and effect example 4 of a music notice effect. It is a figure which shows the notice pattern and effect example 5 of a music notice effect. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the step-up notice aspect determination table for lose, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the step-up notice aspect determination table for jackpots. It is a figure which shows the notice pattern and effect example 1 of a step-up notice effect. It is a figure which shows the notice pattern and effect example 2 of a step-up notice effect. It is a figure which shows the notice pattern and effect example 3 of a step-up notice effect. It is a figure which shows the big hit effect pattern determination process in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows an example of the jackpot production pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the data creation process in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the data output process in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the example 1 of a display of the information displayed on a 1st game information display apparatus, a 2nd game information display apparatus, and a 1st image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example 2 of a display of the information displayed on a 1st game information display apparatus, a 2nd game information display apparatus, and a 1st image display apparatus. (A) is a figure which shows the example 3 of a display of the information displayed on a 1st game information display apparatus, a 2nd game information display apparatus, and a 1st image display apparatus, (b) is a 1st game information display apparatus and a 2nd It is a figure which shows the example 4 of a display of the information displayed on a game information display apparatus and a 1st image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the first half of the example 5 of the display of the information displayed on a 1st game information display apparatus, a 2nd game information display apparatus, and a 1st image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the second half of the display example 5 of the information displayed on a 1st game information display apparatus, a 2nd game information display apparatus, and a 1st image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example 6 of a display of the information displayed on a 1st game information display apparatus, a 2nd game information display apparatus, and a 1st image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the modification of the notification effect determination process in an effect control part. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a music selection table for each time period, (b) is a diagram showing an example of a music preview mode determination table for loss, and (c) is an example of a jackpot music preview mode determination table. FIG. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the step-up notice aspect determination table for lose, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the step-up notice aspect determination table for jackpots. It is a figure which shows the installation example different from the installation example of the 2nd game information display apparatus of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the main process in an image control part. (A) is a figure which shows the command reception interruption process in an image control part, (b) is a figure which shows the V blank interruption process in an image control part. It is a figure which shows the setting process of the animation pattern in an image control part. It is a schematic diagram of the image drawing by a drawing control part (VDP). It is a figure which shows 1/2 of the example of a display before and after power activation in a fluctuation display. It is a figure which shows 2/2 of the example of a display before and after power activation in a fluctuation display. It is a figure which shows 1/3 of the example of a display before and after power recovery in a customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows 2/3 of the example of a display before and after power recovery in a customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows 3/3 of the example of a display before and after power recovery in a customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows 1/5 of the example of a display before and behind power supply restoration in a loss fluctuation display. It is a figure which shows 2/5 of the example of a display before and after the power supply restoration in a loss fluctuation display. It is a figure which shows 3/5 of the example of a display before and after a power supply restoration in a loss fluctuation display. It is a figure which shows 4/5 of the example of a display before and after a power supply restoration in a loss fluctuation display. It is a figure which shows 5/5 of the example of a display before and after a power supply restoration in a loss fluctuation display. It is a figure which shows 1/2 of the example of a display after power recovery in the big hit fluctuation display. It is a figure which shows 2/2 of the example of a display after a power supply restoration in the big hit fluctuation display. It is a figure which shows 1/3 of the example of a display before and after power recovery in a jackpot game. It is a figure which shows 2/3 of the example of a display before and after power recovery in a jackpot game. It is a figure which shows 3/3 of the example of a display before and after power recovery in a jackpot game. It is a figure which shows the display modification 1 after the power supply restoration in the fluctuation | variation display. It is a figure which shows the display modification 2 after the power supply restoration in the fluctuation | variation display. It is a figure which shows the display modification 3 after the power supply restoration in the fluctuation | variation display. It is a figure which shows the display modification 4 after the power supply restoration in a jackpot game.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Composition of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the gaming machine 1 in a state where the glass frame is opened in the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed in the display area of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) in the embodiment of the present invention.

  The gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 supported to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 supported to be rotatable with respect to the game board mounting frame 3, A game board 5 is provided in which a game area 5a in which game balls flow down is formed.

  The outer frame 2 has a decorative plate 2b attached to the lower front surface of a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion opens in the front-rear direction, and is attached to an island facility of a game store (for example, a nail or a stopper). ) Is fixed through.

  The game board mounting frame 3 is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via the first hinge mechanism portion 6 on one end side in the horizontal direction, and is supported rotatably about the first hinge mechanism portion 6. Has been. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated like a door with respect to the outer frame 2, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed forward, so various devices provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 Maintenance can be performed.

  The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism portion 7 on one end side in the horizontal direction, and is supported rotatably about the second hinge mechanism portion 7 as a fulcrum. Yes. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated like a door with respect to the game board mounting frame 3, the game area 5 a of the game board 5 and the front portion of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

  An opening 8 (window) that opens in the front-rear direction is formed in a substantially central portion near the upper portion of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (a glass plate, an acrylic plate, or the like) is attached so as to close the opening from the rear. The game area 5a is visible through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

  Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, an audio output device 9 including a speaker, a frame illumination device 10 having a plurality of lamps (LEDs), and a game ball paid out from a game ball payout device 100 described later. The upper receiving tray 11 for storing a plurality of game balls such as, the lower receiving tray 12 for receiving and storing the game balls that have not flowed into the upper receiving tray 11 and have flowed into a predetermined ball flow path, and the game balls are fired. And a launching operation device 13 capable of operating for the purpose.

  The audio output device 9 is provided at two positions on the upper part of the glass frame 4 with an interval between them, and produces BGM (background music), SE (sound effect), and the like to produce sound (music, voice). It is like that. Also, a plurality of frame illumination devices 10 are provided around the opening 8 and produce an effect by illumination by changing the light irradiation direction and emission color of each lamp (LED).

  The upper tray 11 has a game ball storage portion 11a inclined downward toward the direction side (right direction) of the firing operation device 13, and a ball feed solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward inclination. . When the game balls stored in the storage portion 11a of the upper tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 side by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.

  In addition, an effect button device 16 and a selection button device 18 functioning as input devices for performing determination operations and selection operations related to various effects, which will be described later, are provided side by side on the center front side portion of the upper tray 11. ing.

  The effect button device 16 moves the effect button 17 in the up and down direction, an effect button 17 capable of performing an operation such as a determination operation, an effect button detection switch 17a (see FIG. 5) for detecting an operation on the effect button 17. An effect button drive motor 17b (see FIG. 5) is provided to allow the player to input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1.

  The selection button device 18 includes a cross key 19 (see FIG. 5) that can perform a selection operation and the like, and a cross key detection switch 19a that is connected to the cross key 19 and detects an operation on the cross key 19. (See FIG. 5) is provided, and a player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1.

  In addition, a lending / returning operation unit 20 that can perform a lending operation for game balls and a return operation for a storage medium such as a card that stores the balance is provided on the right side of the upper tray 11. When a lending button (not shown) of the lending / returning operation unit 20 is operated, a game ball is lent by subtracting the remaining amount of a storage medium received by a ball lending machine (not shown) attached to the gaming machine, When a return button (not shown) of the lending return operation unit 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball lending machine (not shown).

  Between the upper tray 11 and the lower tray 12, an overflow ball channel (not shown) for guiding game balls that cannot enter the upper tray 11 to the lower tray 12 is formed. Further, a tray full detection switch 32a for detecting that the game ball is full in the lower tray 12 is provided in the middle of the overflow ball flow path, and the fullness of the lower tray 12 is detected by the tray full detection switch 32a. During this time, the payout of game balls by the game ball payout device 100 described later is stopped.

  The firing operation device 13 includes a base body 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a firing handle 15 rotatably provided on the base body 14, and a touch sensor that detects that a player's hand touches the firing handle 15. 15a (see FIG. 5) and a firing volume 15b (see FIG. 5) including a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 are provided. When it is detected by the touch sensor 15a that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15, the ball feed solenoid 11b is activated to send out the game balls one by one.

  The game board mounting frame 3 includes a game board mounting portion 25 for mounting the game board 5, a game ball launching device 26 for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a, the game board mounting frame 3 and a glass frame. A lock mechanism 27 for locking 4 in the closed state and an open detection switch 31a for detecting the opening of the glass frame 4 are provided.

  The game board mounting portion 25 is formed in a concave chamber shape having a front opening at a substantial center near the upper portion of the game board mounting frame 3 and can store the game board 5 from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided in the back of the concave chamber of the game board mounting portion 25, and various devices and the like provided on the back side of the game board 5 are located behind the game machine 1 through this opening. Come on.

  The game ball launching device 26 includes a launching member 28 for launching a game ball, a launching solenoid 28b (see FIG. 5) for driving the launching member 28, and a launching member 28 toward the lower left end of the game board. A launch rail 29 that rises upward and a stopper 30 that stops the game ball A at a launch position that is the lower end of the launch rail 29 are provided. When the game ball A delivered by the ball feed solenoid 11b is received at the launch position, the game ball A is launched toward the game area 5a by the operation of the launch member 28.

  The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting portion 25 so that the front end portion of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed to the front side of the glass frame 4. Then, when a dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is released and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when it is rotated in the other direction, the glass frame The lock of 4 is released and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

  At a position near the outer edge of the game board 5, a curved inner rail 35, a curved outer rail 36 positioned outside the inner rail 35, and a guide member for guiding the game ball toward the center of the game area 5a 37 is provided. A launch ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36 to guide the game ball fired by the game ball launching device 26 to the upstream portion of the game area 5a. In addition, an out port 39 is formed in the most downstream part of the game area 5a to guide the game balls that have flowed down to the outside of the game area (the collection part of the game board mounting frame 3).

  Near the center of the game area 5a, a so-called center case is provided with a frame-shaped decorative frame 40 that restricts the entry of the game ball into the interior, and an effect space 40a is formed inside the decorative frame 40. Further, a warp device 41 for introducing a game ball flowing down the game area 5 a into the interior of the decoration frame 40 is provided on the side of the decoration frame 40, and the warp device 41 is introduced below the decoration frame 40. A stage portion 42 is provided for rolling the game ball and flowing down below the decorative frame 40.

  Below the game area 5a, a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) general winning holes 43 in which game balls can always win (win) are provided at intervals. When the game balls won (entered) are detected by the general prize opening detection switch 43a (see FIG. 5), a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are awarded from the game ball payout device 100 (see FIG. 3). It is paid out as a ball.

On both sides of the game area 5a (the left game area and the right game area), there are provided general game gates 44 through which game balls can pass, and the game balls that have passed through the general game gates 44 are gate detection switches 44a. If it is detected, the lottery of normal symbols is performed. The normal symbol winning lottery will be described later.
This left game area corresponds to the first game area of the present invention, and this right game area corresponds to the second game area of the present invention.

  A first start opening 45 is provided below the game area 5a and directly below the stage portion 42. The first start opening 45 is a place where a game ball can always win (enter). When the played game balls are detected by the first start port detection switch 45a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 3 balls) are paid out as prize balls from the game ball payout device 100 (see FIG. 3). In addition to the payout of prize balls, a jackpot lottery (special game determination) of a first special symbol (identification information) described later is performed.

  A game ball from a closed state (basic form) in which it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball (entry ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (the fact that a lottery was won for a normal symbol) was established immediately below the first start opening 45. Is provided with a variable starting portion 46 that can be converted into an open state (special mode) that allows or easily wins.

  The variable starter 46 includes a second start port 47 through which a game ball can win (enter), and a second start port detection switch 47a that detects a game ball winning (entry) to the second start port 47. A movable member 48 that converts (variably) the second start port 47 between a closed state and an open state, and a second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b for opening / closing the movable member 48 are provided. When the second start port 47 is closed, it is impossible or difficult to win the game ball. When the second start port 47 is open, the game ball wins ( Is possible or easy.

  When a game ball that has won (entered) the second start port 47 is detected by the second start port detection switch 47a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are supplied to the game ball payout device 100 (see FIG. 3). ) Will be paid out as prize balls. In addition to the payout of prize balls, a big hit lottery of a second special symbol (identification information) described later is performed.

  A closed state above the guiding member 37 and downstream of the right-hand general-purpose gate 44 is that it is impossible to win a game ball (win) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (the winning of a special symbol jackpot lottery). There is provided a variable winning portion 49 that is converted from a (basic mode) to an open state (special mode) in which a game ball can be won (pick-up).

  The variable winning section 49 includes a large winning opening 50 through which a game ball can be won (entered), a large winning opening detection switch 50a for detecting the winning (entering) of the game ball into the large winning opening 50, An open / close member 51 that converts (variates) the big prize opening 50 between a closed state and an open state, and a big prize opening opening / closing solenoid 51b for opening / closing the open / close member 51 are provided. When the grand prize opening 50 is in the closed state, it becomes impossible or difficult to win the game ball. When the big prize opening 50 is in the open state, the game ball is won (winning) ) Is possible or easy.

  Further, when the game balls that have won (entered) the big prize opening 50 are detected by the big prize opening detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15 balls) are obtained from the game ball payout device 100 (see FIG. 3). It is paid out as a prize ball.

  The first start opening 45 can enter a game ball that has passed through the left area of the game area 5a, but cannot enter a game ball that has passed through the right area of the game area 5a. . On the other hand, the second starting port 47 can enter a game ball that has passed through either the left region or the right region of the game area 5a, but the game ball that has passed through the right area of the game region 5a is guided by the guide member 37. Since it is guided to the second start opening 47, it is easier to enter the second start opening 47 than the game ball passing through the left area of the game area 5a. Therefore, in the short-time gaming state to be described later, it is better to fire the game ball (so-called right-handed) toward the right area of the game area 5a. In addition, game balls that have passed through the right area of the game area 5a can enter the grand prize winning opening 50, but game balls that have passed through the left area of the game area 5a cannot enter. Yes. In other words, the first starting port 45, the second starting port 47, and the big winning port 50 can play game balls separately.

  On the back side of the game board 5, there is a collective flow path (not shown) that receives and collects the game balls won in the general winning port 43, the first starting port 45, the second starting port 47, and the big winning port 50. A winning confirmation detection switch 52a for detecting a game ball flowing down the collective flow path is provided at a lower end portion of the collective flow path. This winning confirmation detection switch 52a detects again the game ball detected by the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, and the big winning opening detection switch 50a. It is used to determine whether or not the winning is appropriate.

On the lower left side outside the game area 5a, a first special symbol first indicator 60, a second special symbol first indicator 61, a normal symbol first indicator 62, a first special symbol hold first indicator 63, The second special symbol hold first display 64, the normal symbol hold first display 65, the round number display 66 for displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game state) described later occurs, the jackpot state (special game) Right-handed first display 67 that prompts the player to launch a game ball toward the right area of the gaming area 5a (so-called right-handed) during the short-time gaming state described later, and when power is restored A high-probability gaming state display 68 that displays a high-probability gaming state if it is in a high-probability gaming state, which will be described later, and a time-short gaming state if it is in a short-time gaming state when power is restored. From short-time game status indicator 69 The first game information display unit 59 is provided that.
The first special symbol hold first display 63 and the second special symbol hold first display 64 correspond to the first hold display device of the present invention. The right-handed first display 67 corresponds to the first display device of the present invention.

  The first special symbol first indicator 60 is a variable for displaying (notifying) the result of the big special lottery drawing of the first special symbol performed on the condition that the game ball wins (wins) at the first start opening 45. The second special symbol first indicator 61 displays the result of the big special lottery drawing of the second special symbol performed on the condition that the game ball wins (wins) at the second starting port 47 (notification) ), And the normal symbol first indicator 62 displays (informs) the result of the normal symbol winning lottery performed on the condition that the game ball wins (wins) the normal symbol gate 44. ).

  The first special symbol jackpot lottery means that when a game ball wins (wins) the first starting port 45, a jackpot symbol determining random value is acquired, and the acquired jackpot symbol determining random value and jackpot determining value are obtained. This is equivalent to determining whether or not it is a “big hit”. In addition, when the first special symbol jackpot lottery is performed, the first special symbol first display 60 displays a variation of the first special symbol, and the first special symbol indicating the lottery result after a predetermined time has elapsed is displayed. Is done. That is, the stop display of the first special symbol is a notification of the lottery result.

  The jackpot lottery for the second special symbol means that when a game ball wins (wins) the second starting port 47, a jackpot symbol determination random number value is acquired, and the acquired jackpot symbol determination random number value and the jackpot determination value are obtained. This is equivalent to determining whether or not it is a “big hit”. In addition, when the big special lottery drawing of the second special symbol is performed, the second special symbol first indicator 61 displays the variation of the second special symbol, and the second special symbol indicating the lottery result after a predetermined time has elapsed is displayed. Is done. That is, the stop display of the second special symbol is a notification of the lottery result.

  The first special symbol first indicator 60 and the second special symbol first indicator 61 are each composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs of the corresponding indicator in the variation display of each special symbol have a predetermined interval or order. Flashes. When the special symbol is stopped and displayed, one or a plurality of LEDs are turned on in a mode (a mode indicating the type of special symbol) indicating the result of each jackpot lottery. That is, the type of jackpot, which will be described later, can also be determined by the lighting state of the LEDs of the first special symbol first indicator 60 and the second special symbol first indicator 61.

  In the present embodiment, “big hit” means a state in which the right to execute the big win state (special game state) is acquired in the big special lottery drawing of the first special symbol or the big special lottery drawing of the second special symbol. The “hit state (special game state)” refers to a game state in which a round game in which the big prize opening 50 is opened in a predetermined manner is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times or 15 times).

  In addition, although the maximum number of times and the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening 50 in each round game are determined in advance, a predetermined number of game balls can be placed in the big prize opening 50 even before reaching the maximum number of times and the maximum opening time. When (for example, nine) wins (wins), one round game is finished. In other words, the “hit game (special game state)” is a game state that is advantageous for a player who can easily win a prize ball. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of jackpot states (special game states) having different degrees of advantage for the player are provided, which will be described in detail later.

  The normal symbol winning lottery means that when a game ball passes through the general gate 44, a winning symbol determining random value is obtained, and the acquired winning symbol determining random number value is compared with the winning determining value. This corresponds to determining whether or not there is. When the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the normal symbol variation display is performed on the normal symbol first display 62, and the normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped after a predetermined time. That is, the stop display of the normal symbol is a notification of the lottery result.

  The normal symbol first display 62 is composed of one or a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs blink at a predetermined interval or order in the normal symbol variation display. When the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, one or a plurality of LEDs are lit in a mode indicating the result of the winning lottery (a mode indicating the type of the normal symbol). That is, the hit type described later can be determined by the lighting state of the LED of the normal symbol first display 62.

  In the present embodiment, “winning” means a state in which a right to execute a winning state (auxiliary game) is acquired in a normal symbol winning lottery. The “winning state (auxiliary game)” refers to a gaming state in which the second start port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  In addition, although the maximum opening number and the maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the hit state (auxiliary game) are determined in advance, even before the maximum opening number and the maximum opening time are reached, When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, nine) wins (wins), the winning state (auxiliary game) ends. That is, the “hit state (auxiliary game)” is a game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is easily executed (start condition is easily established). In this embodiment, a plurality of types of hit states (auxiliary games) having different degrees of advantage for the player are provided, which will be described in detail later.

  The first special symbol holding first display 63 is constituted by a plurality of LEDs, and the first special symbol jackpot lottery (first special symbol) stored when a game ball wins (enters) the first start opening 45. This is for displaying the number of rights (first hold) for performing symbol change display, and lights or blinks in a manner indicating the number of first hold. In addition, although the maximum number of the first hold is four, it may be less than or more than four.

  When there is one first hold, the LED on the left side of the first special symbol hold first indicator 63 is lit, and when there are two first holds, the first special symbol hold first indicator 63. The two LEDs turn on. In addition, when there are three first holds, the left LED of the first special symbol hold first display 63 blinks and the right LED is lit, and when there are four first holds, the first special symbol hold first indicator 63 flashes. Two LEDs of the symbol holding first display 63 blink.

  The second special symbol hold first indicator 64 is constituted by a plurality of LEDs, and the second special symbol jackpot lottery (second special symbol) stored when a game ball wins (enters) the second starting port 47. This is for displaying the number of rights (second hold) for performing symbol change display, and lights or blinks in a manner indicating the number of second holds. Note that the maximum number of second suspensions is four, but it may be less or more than four.

  When there is one second hold, the LED on the left side of the second special symbol hold first indicator 64 is lit, and when there are two second holds, the second special symbol hold first indicator 64. The two LEDs turn on. Further, when there are three second holds, the left LED of the second special symbol hold first indicator 64 blinks and the right LED is lit. When there are four second holds, the second special symbol hold first display 64 is turned on. Two LEDs of the symbol holding first display 64 blink.

  In the following description, the term “first hold number” may be expressed as “first hold number” and the term “second hold number” as “second hold number”.

  The normal symbol holding first display 65 is constituted by a plurality of LEDs, and performs a lottery drawing (normal symbol variation display) of a normal symbol stored when a game ball wins (enters) the normal symbol gate 44. This is for displaying the number of rights (general map hold), and lights or blinks in a manner indicating the number of general map hold. In addition, although the maximum number of ordinary map holds is four, it may be less than or more than four.

  In addition, when there is one common symbol hold, the LED on the left side of the normal symbol hold first indicator 65 is lit, and when there are two common symbol hold, two LEDs of the normal symbol hold first indicator 65 Lights up. Further, when there are three common symbol holds, the LED on the left side of the normal symbol hold first display 65 flashes and the right LED lights up. When there are four common symbol holds, the normal symbol hold first The two LEDs on the display 65 flash.

  In the following description, the phrase “the number of ordinary maps reserved” may be expressed as “the number of ordinary maps reserved”.

  In addition, the 1st special symbol 1st indicator 60 and / or the 2nd special symbol 1st indicator 61 can be comprised also by 7 segment LED. For example, if a special symbol jackpot lottery is won, “7” is stopped and “−” is stopped if it is lost. It is recommended to repeat “ It should be noted that since the change display of the last change display is displayed at the time of starting the change display of the special symbol, it is easy to grasp that the change display is started by starting from turning off the LED.

  The round number display 66 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is for displaying the number of rounds when a big hit state (special game state) occurs, and in a predetermined manner indicating the number of rounds at the start of the big hit game Is started, the LED is continuously turned on during the jackpot game, and the LED is turned off at the end of the jackpot game. For example, if the number of rounds is a jackpot game with 8 rounds, only the fourth LED from the left is lit, and if the number of rounds is a jackpot game with 15 rounds, the 4th to 7th LEDs from the left are lit. .

The right-handed first display 67 is composed of one LED, and emits a game ball toward the right area of the game area 5a in the big hit state (special game state) and in the short-time game state (so-called right) The LED is lit during a big hit state (special game state) and a short-time game state.
The right-handed first display 67 starts lighting the LED at the start of the opening effect in the jackpot game, and continues to light the LED during the jackpot game. When the transition is made after the game is over, the LED is turned off when the short game state is over. In addition, if the jackpot is won during the short game state at that time, the LED is continuously turned on. Further, if the game does not shift to the short-time game state after the jackpot game, the LED is turned off at the end of the jackpot game. That is, when the LED of the right-handed first display 67 starts lighting once, the LED is continuously lit until the gaming state to be right-handed (special gaming state, short-time gaming state) is completed.

The high-probability gaming state indicator 68 is composed of one LED and is used to display a high-probability gaming state when the power is restored. When the power is restored, the high-probability gaming state is displayed. If so, the LED lights up (so-called morning lamp).
The high-probability gaming state indicator 68 starts LED lighting if the gaming state when the power is restored is the high-probability gaming state, and continues the LED lighting display during the high-probability gaming state. When the high probability gaming state ends, the LED is turned off.

The short-time gaming state indicator 69 is composed of one LED, and is used to display that the short-time gaming state is present when the power is restored. The LED lights up (so-called morning lamp).
The short-time gaming state indicator 69 starts lighting the LED if the gaming state when the power is restored is the short-time gaming state, and continues to light the LED during the short-time gaming state. When is finished, the LED is turned off.

On the lower left game board 5 inside the game area 5a, a first special symbol second display 80, a second special symbol second display 81, a normal symbol second display 82, a first special symbol hold second 2 indicator 83, second special symbol hold second indicator 84, normal symbol hold second indicator 85, and the right to urge the player to launch a game ball toward the right area of game area 5a (so-called right-handed) A second game information display device 79 including a second hitting display 87 is provided.
The first special symbol hold second display 83 and the second special symbol hold second display 84 correspond to the second hold display device of the present invention. The right-handed second display 87 corresponds to the second display device of the present invention.

The second game information display device 79 has a first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and a second image display device 71 (sub-display), which will be described later, as compared to the first game information display device 59 provided outside the game area 5a. Near the liquid crystal). As described above, the second game information display device 79 is provided closer to the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) than the first game information display device 59. The second game information display device 79 is easier to recognize than the first game information display device 59.
In addition, the upper part of the second game information display device 79 provided in the game area 5a is also a passing path for game balls flowing down the game area 5a. As described above, by providing the second game information display device 79 at a position where the passing path of the game ball is formed, the space is effectively used and the position is easily recognized by the player.

  The installation location of the second game information display device 79 is not limited to this. For example, you may provide in the vicinity of the 1st image display apparatus 70 (main liquid crystal) of the lower left of the usual figure gate 44 provided in the right area of the game area 5a. Even in the case where it is provided in the vicinity of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) on the lower left side of the general gate 44 in this way, the upper part of the second game information display device 79 is used as a path for passing game balls, thereby Thus, the position can be easily recognized by the player.

  The first special symbol second indicator 80 is a variable for displaying (notifying) the result of the big special lottery drawing of the first special symbol performed on the condition that the game ball wins (wins) at the first start opening 45. The second special symbol second indicator 81 displays the result of the big special lottery drawing of the second special symbol which is performed on the condition that the game ball wins (wins) at the second starting port 47 (notification) ), And the normal symbol second indicator 82 displays (notifies the result of the normal symbol winning lottery performed on the condition that the game ball wins (wins) in the ordinary gate 44. ).

  Each of the first special symbol second indicator 80 or the second special symbol second indicator 81 is constituted by one LED, and the LED of the corresponding indicator blinks at a predetermined interval in the variation display of each special symbol. When the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is lit in a mode (a jackpot mode or a lost mode) indicating the result of each jackpot lottery. The first special symbol second display 80 or the second special symbol second display 81 is displayed on the left area of the display unit of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) described later. Since it is the fourth effect symbol following the symbol, the second effect symbol displayed in the center area, and the third effect symbol displayed in the right area, it may be referred to as the fourth symbol.

  Here, the first special symbol second display 80 will be described in detail. The effect control board 130 receives a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started, and will be described later on the basis that the special symbol fluctuation display data is set. In step S1500, display control data is created, and the created display control data is output in step S1600, which will be described later. As a result, the first special symbol second indicator 80 starts to fluctuate (flash), and the first special symbol is displayed. Based on the fact that the effect control board 130 receives the special symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the variable display of the symbols is stopped and the special symbol stop display data is set, in step S1500 described later. Display control data is created, and the created display control data is output in step S1600, which will be described later. Special symbol fluctuation of the second display 80 (flashing) is stopped (turned on or off).

The display mode of the first special symbol second indicator 80 is as follows.
(1) The LED of the first special symbol second indicator 80 starts blinking along with the start of the change of the first special symbol, and the LED of the first special symbol second indicator 80 is changed during the variation of the first special symbol. Continues to flash.
(2) The LED of the first special symbol second indicator 80 is lit when the first special symbol is stopped when winning the jackpot lottery.
(3) The LED of the first special symbol second display unit 80 is turned off when the special symbol is stopped when it is lost (lost) in the big hit lottery.
(4) During the jackpot game, the LED of the first special symbol second display 80 continues to be lit, and when the jackpot game ends, the LED of the first special symbol second display 80 is turned off.

  Note that the timing of the start of change and the timing of change stop of the first special symbol second display 80 are the effect symbol 70a and the first special symbol (so-called so-called “display”) displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) described later. (Symbol 4) is synchronized with the fluctuation start timing and the fluctuation stop timing.

  Whether the first special symbol second indicator 80 and the second special symbol second indicator 81 display a variable display corresponding to the first special symbol or a variable display corresponding to the second special symbol. Since the display timing, display mode, and the like are the same, the description of the second special symbol second display 81 is omitted. Note that the timing of the start of change and the timing of change stop of the second special symbol second display 81 are the effect symbol 70a and the second special symbol (so-called so-called “display”) displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) described later. (Symbol 4) is synchronized with the fluctuation start timing and the fluctuation stop timing.

  The first special symbol second indicator 80 and / or the second special symbol second indicator 81 displays only whether or not the jackpot lottery results as a result of the jackpot lottery when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Like the first special symbol first display 60 or the second special symbol first display 61, it may be constituted by a plurality of LEDs, and the type of special symbol may be displayed as a result of the big hit lottery.

  The normal symbol second display 82 is constituted by one LED, and the LED blinks at a predetermined interval in the normal symbol variation display. When the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is lit in a mode (a winning mode or a lost mode) indicating the result of the winning lottery.

  Specifically, the effect control board 130 has received the normal figure fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the normal symbol fluctuation display is started, and the normal symbol fluctuation display data is set. Based on this, display control data is created in step S1500, which will be described later, and the generated display control data is output in step S1600, which will be described later. As a result, the fluctuation (flashing) of the normal symbol second display 82 starts, and the normal symbol is displayed. Based on the fact that the effect control board 130 receives the normal symbol determination command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the variable display is stopped and the normal symbol stop display data is set, the display control is performed in step S1500 described later. Data is created, and the created display control data is output in step S1600, which will be described later. Pattern variations of the second display 82 (flashing) is stopped (turned on or off).

The display mode of the normal symbol second display 82 is as follows.
(1) The LED of the normal symbol second indicator 82 starts blinking with the start of the change of the normal symbol, and the LED of the normal symbol second indicator 82 continues to blink during the variation of the normal symbol.
(2) When the normal symbol at the time of winning (winning) the winning lottery is stopped, the LED of the normal symbol second display 82 lights up.
(3) When the normal symbol is stopped when the winning lottery is lost (lost), the LED of the normal symbol second display 82 is turned off.
(4) During the winning game, the LED of the normal symbol second display 82 continues to be lit, and when the winning game ends, the LED of the normal symbol second display 82 is turned off.

  The normal symbol second display 82 displays only whether or not the winning symbol as a result of the winning lottery is displayed when the normal symbol is stopped. However, as with the normal symbol first indicator 62, a plurality of LEDs are displayed. The type of normal symbol may be displayed as a result of the jackpot lottery.

  The first special symbol hold second indicator 83 is constituted by a plurality of LEDs similarly to the first special symbol hold first indicator 63 described above, and when the game ball wins (enters) the first start opening 45. In order to display the number of rights (first hold) for performing a jackpot lottery (change display of the first special symbol) of the first special symbol stored in Lights up or flashes. In addition, although the maximum number of the first hold is four, it may be less than or more than four.

  Specifically, based on the fact that the effect control board 130 receives a special symbol memory designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the number of first hold increases or decreases, and the first special symbol hold display data is set. Display control data is created in step S1500, which will be described later, and the created display control data is output in step S1600, which will be described later, so that the first special symbol hold second display 83 is displayed (lighted, blinking, or turned off). Is done.

When there is one first hold, the LED on the left side of the first special symbol hold second indicator 83 is lit, and when there are two first holds, the first special symbol hold second indicator 83. The two LEDs turn on. In addition, when there are three first holds, the left LED of the first special symbol hold second display 83 blinks and the right LED is lit, and when there are four first holds, the first special symbol hold second indicator 83 flashes. Two LEDs of the symbol hold second display 83 blink.
Further, the display (lighting and blinking) timing and the erasing (light-off) timing of the first special symbol hold second display 83 are the first hold icons H11 to H1 displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) described later. It is synchronized with the display timing and the erasing timing of H14, and is synchronized with the numerical value change timing of the first hold number display in the first hold number display area SH1.

  The second special symbol hold second indicator 84 is configured by a plurality of LEDs similarly to the above-described second special symbol hold first indicator 64, and when the game ball wins (enters) the second start port 47 In order to display the number of rights (second hold) for performing the jackpot lottery of the second special symbol (variable display of the second special symbol) stored in Lights up or flashes. Note that the maximum number of second suspensions is four, but it may be less or more than four.

  Specifically, based on the fact that the special control memory designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the second reserved number increases or decreases is received by the effect control board 130 and the second special symbol hold display data is set. The display control data is created in step S1500, which will be described later, and the created display control data is output in step S1600, which will be described later, so that the second special symbol hold second display 84 is displayed (lighted, blinking, or turned off). Is done.

In addition, when there is one second hold, the LED on the left side of the second special symbol hold second indicator 84 is lit, and when there are two second holds, the second special symbol hold second indicator 84. The two LEDs turn on. When there are three second holds, the left LED of the second special symbol hold second indicator 84 blinks and the right LED is lit, and when there are four second holds, the second special symbol hold second indicator 84 flashes. Two LEDs of the symbol holding second display 84 blink.
In addition, the display (lighting and blinking) timing and the erasing (light-off) timing of the second special symbol hold second indicator 84 are the second hold icons H21 to H1 displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) described later. In synchronization with the display timing and the erasing timing of H24, it is synchronized with the numerical value change timing of the second hold number display displayed in the second hold number display area SH2.

  The normal symbol holding second display 85 is constituted by a plurality of LEDs in the same manner as the normal symbol first display described above, and the normal symbol stored when the game ball is won (entered) in the general gate 44. This is for displaying the number of rights (common figure hold) for performing a winning lottery (ordinary symbol variation display), and lights or blinks in a manner indicating the number of common figure hold. In addition, although the maximum number of ordinary map holds is four, it may be less than or more than four.

  More specifically, the effect control board 130 receives a normal symbol storage designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the number of normal figure holds increases or decreases, and the normal symbol hold display data is set, which will be described later. In step S1500, display control data is created, and the created display control data is output in step S1600, which will be described later, so that the normal symbol hold second display 85 is displayed (lighted, blinked, or turned off).

  In addition, when there is one common symbol hold, the LED on the left side of the normal symbol hold second indicator 85 is lit, and when there are two general symbol hold, two LEDs of the normal symbol hold second indicator 85 Lights up. Further, when there are three common symbol holds, the LED on the left side of the normal symbol hold second indicator 85 blinks and the right LED is lit, and when there are four common symbol holds, the normal symbol hold second The two LEDs on the display 85 flash.

  The right-handed second display 87 is composed of one LED similarly to the right-handed first display 67 described above, and is in the right area of the gaming area 5a during the big hit state (special gaming state) and during the short-time gaming state. Is intended to display (right-handed display) prompting the player to launch a game ball toward the right (so-called right-handed), and the LED is lit during the big hit state (special game state) and during the short-time game state. .

  Specifically, the effect control board 130 receives an opening designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the jackpot game (opening) is started, and will be described later based on the right-handed display data being set. In step S1500, display control data is created, and the created display control data is output in step S1600, which will be described later, whereby display (lighting) of the right-handed second display 87 is started and the gaming state is changed. When the effect control board 130 receives a gaming state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 and the gaming state is not a jackpot gaming state or a short-time gaming state, right-handed erasure data is set, and in step S1500 to be described later Display control data is created, and the created display control data is received in step S1600, which will be described later. By output, right-handed display of the second display unit 87 (lighting) is completed (off).

The right-handed second display 87 starts lighting the LED at the start of the opening effect in the jackpot game, and continues to light the LED during the jackpot game. When the transition is made after the game is over, the LED is turned off when the short game state is over. In addition, if the jackpot is won during the short game state at that time, the LED is continuously turned on. Further, if the game does not shift to the short-time game state after the jackpot game, the LED is turned off at the end of the jackpot game. That is, once the LED of the right-handed first display 67 starts to be turned on, the lighting is continued until the gaming state to be right-handed (special gaming state, short-time gaming state) is completed.
Note that the lighting timing of the right-handed second display 87 is synchronized with the display timing of the image G10 “right-handed →→” displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) described later.
Further, the right-handed second display 87 is marked as “right-handed” as shown in FIG. 1, and the right-handed display is recognized by the player more than the right-handed first display 67 with nothing written. It is a mode that is easy to do.

  A first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) composed of a liquid crystal display is provided at the back of the effect space 40a, and a second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display) composed of a liquid crystal display is provided below the effect space 40a. ) And a movable effect member 73 simulating a character's face is provided in the upper portion of the effect space 40a.

  The first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) display various effects as the game progresses. Examples of the effect display include a customer waiting demonstration effect that is performed when the special symbol variation display is not performed, and a variation display of the effect symbol 70a that is performed when the special symbol variation display is performed. It is also possible to replace the effect design with the identification information.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the display unit of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is formed with three columns of variable display areas such as a left area, a central area, and a right area. By scrolling the effect symbol 70a (first effect symbol, second effect symbol, and third effect symbol) displayed in the area in the vertical direction (from top to bottom in the present embodiment), the effect symbol 70a is displayed in a variable manner. .

  The effect symbol 70a is composed of symbols indicating numbers from “1” to “8”, for example, and is executed by the first special symbol first display 60 and the second special symbol first indicator 61. Corresponding to the symbol display, the effect symbol 70a is displayed in a variable manner. That is, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started in response to the start of the variation display of the special symbol, and the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is stopped in response to the stop of the variation display of the special symbol. In addition to the symbols indicating numerals, symbols indicating alphabets such as “A” to “F” may be provided as the effect symbols 70a.

  Specifically, when the special symbol fluctuation display is started, the special control fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received by the effect control board 130 and determined based on the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command. A variation effect pattern designation command is set, and is output by the image control unit 140 in a data output process in step S1600, which will be described later, whereby a variation display of the effect symbol 70a is performed.

  In the stop display of the effect symbol 70a, the effect symbol 70a is stopped for a predetermined time in a predetermined mode (losing mode, jackpot mode, etc.) indicating the result of the jackpot lottery. The big hit mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same design symbols such as “777” or a regular design combination such as “357”, and the loss mode is any other mode. is there. The variation display mode of the effect symbol 70a is not limited to this, and may be one that scrolls left and right, or one that rotates (autorotates) on the spot.

  Specifically, when the special symbol variation display is stopped, the effect control board 130 receives the special symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the stop designation command is set, and the data of step S1600 described later In the output process, the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed by being transmitted to the image control unit 140.

  Further, during the dynamic display of the effect symbol 70a, various effect images such as background images and characters, movies, and the like are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device in accordance with the result of the jackpot lottery. By displaying on 71 (sub liquid crystal), the player's sense of expectation for the occurrence of a big hit (special game state) is enhanced.

As shown in FIG. 4, the display unit of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) has a number of first special symbol reservations (U1) corresponding to the current number of first reservations. First hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4 for displaying the hold icons H11 to H14, and the number of second hold icons H21 to H21 corresponding to the number of second special symbol holds (U2) that is the current number of second holds. Second variation icon display area 70C1 to 70C4 for displaying H24, and the variation icon display for displaying the variation icon TH corresponding to (related to) the variation display of the special symbol (production symbol 70a) being executed Region 70D is formed.
The first hold icon and the second hold icon correspond to the first aspect of the present invention.

  The first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4 are partitioned in the form of a first display unit 70B1, a second display unit 70B2, a third display unit 70B3, and a fourth display unit 70B4 from the side close to the variable icon display region 70D. The number of first hold icons H11 to H14 corresponding to the first special symbol hold number (U1) is displayed on each display unit 70B1 to 70B4. That is, the number of the first holding icons H11 to H14 is also increased or decreased in correspondence with the increase or decrease of the first special symbol holding number (U1).

  A first hold icon H11 is displayed on the first display unit 70B1 to indicate the first hold on which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed first, and the first special symbol is displayed second on the second display unit 70B2. The first hold icon H12 indicating the first hold on which the variable display is executed is displayed, and the first display showing the first hold on which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed third is displayed on the third display unit 70B3. The hold icon H13 is displayed, and the first hold icon H14 indicating the first hold on which the first special symbol variable display is executed fourth is displayed on the fourth display unit 70B4.

  Specifically, when the game ball wins the first start opening 45, the effect control board 130 receives the first start opening winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, and the first start opening winning designation command is received. The hold icon display designation command determined based on this is set, and is output by the image control unit 140 in the data output process of step S1600 described later, whereby the first hold icons H11 to H14 are newly displayed. In addition, the effect control board 130 receives the special figure variation pattern transmitted at the start of the first special symbol variation, and the hold icon change designation command is set. In the data output processing in step S1600 described later, the image control unit 140 By outputting, the display of the first hold icons H11 to H14 is updated and displayed.

  The second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4 are partitioned in the form of the first display part 70C1, the second display part 70C2, the third display part 70C3, and the fourth display part 70C4 from the side close to the variable icon display area 70D. The number of second hold icons H21 to H22 corresponding to the second special symbol hold number (U2) is displayed on each display unit 70C1 to 70C4. That is, the number of the second hold icons H21 to H24 is also increased or decreased in accordance with the increase or decrease of the second special symbol hold number (U2).

  The first display unit 70C1 displays a second hold icon H21 indicating the second hold on which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed first. The second display unit 70C2 displays the second special symbol second. The second hold icon H22 indicating the second hold on which the variable display is executed is displayed, and the second display indicating the second hold on which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed third is displayed on the third display unit 70C3. The hold icon H23 is displayed, and the fourth display portion 70C4 displays a second hold icon H24 indicating the second hold in which the second special symbol variable display is executed fourth.

  Specifically, the production control board 130 receives the second start opening winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the game ball wins the second starting opening 47, and the second start opening winning designation command is received. The hold icon display designation command determined based on this is set, and is output by the image control unit 140 in the data output process in step S1600 described later, whereby the second hold icons H21 to H24 are newly displayed. In addition, the effect control board 130 receives the special figure variation pattern transmitted at the start of the variation of the second special symbol, the hold icon change designation command is set, and in the data output processing of step S1600 described later, the image control unit 140 By outputting, the display of the second hold icons H21 to H24 is updated and displayed.

  The variation icon display area 70D corresponds to the start of the variation display of the special symbol (the effect symbol 70a). The first suspension icon H11 or the second suspension displayed on the first display unit 70B1 of the first suspension icon display region. When the second hold icon H21 displayed on the first display portion 70C1 of the icon display area moves (shifts), the variation icon TH is displayed, and at the end of the variation display of the special symbol (production symbol 70a). The variation icon TH disappears (erases). Note that the variation icon TH may be erased during the variation display of the special symbol (the effect symbol 70a).

  Specifically, the effect control board 130 receives the special figure variation pattern transmitted at the start of the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the hold icon change designation command is set, and the data output in step S1600 described later In the processing, the fluctuation icon TH is displayed by being output by the image control unit 140.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol variation display area DZ1 for variably displaying the first special symbol (first specific identification information) on the display unit of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). And a second special symbol variation display area DZ2 for variably displaying the second special symbol (second specific identification information), and a first special symbol for displaying the first special symbol retention number (U1) in a numerical manner. A reserved number display area SH1 and a second reserved number display area SH2 for simply displaying the second special symbol reserved number (U2) with arithmetic numbers are formed. The first special symbol and the second special symbol may be referred to as a fourth symbol, similar to the first special symbol second indicator 80 and the second special symbol second indicator 81. That is, there are two fourth symbols: the first special symbol second indicator 80, the second special symbol second indicator 81, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol.

  In the first special symbol variation display area DZ1, the first special symbol variation display is started in response to the start of the first special symbol variation display, and the first special symbol variation display area DZ1 is stopped in response to the first special symbol variation display stop. The variable display of symbols is stopped.

  Specifically, when the special symbol variation display is started, the special control variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received by the effect control board 130, and the special symbol variation display designation command is set. In the data output process of step S1600, the first special symbol variation display is performed by being output by the image control unit 140, and is transmitted from the main control board 110 when the special symbol variation display is stopped. The effect control board 130 receives the special symbol confirmation command, the stop designation command is set, and is transmitted to the image control unit 140 in the data output process of step S1600 described later, whereby the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. Is called. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the execution state of the variable display of the first special symbol is determined by the player according to the variable state of the first special symbol. Is notified (suggested).

  In the second special symbol variation display area DZ2, the second special symbol variation display is started in response to the start of the variation display of the second special symbol, and the second special symbol variation display region DZ2 is in response to the stop of the variation display of the second special symbol. The variable display of symbols is stopped.

  Specifically, when the special symbol variation display is started, the special control variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received by the effect control board 130, and the special symbol variation display designation command is set. In the data output process of step S1600, the second special symbol variation display is performed by being output by the image control unit 140, and is transmitted from the main control board 110 when the special symbol variation display is stopped. The effect control board 130 receives the special symbol confirmation command, the stop designation command is set, and is transmitted to the image control unit 140 in the data output process of step S1600 described later, whereby the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. Is called. That is, the variation display of the second special symbol is performed corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, and the execution state of the variation display of the second special symbol depends on the variation state of the second special symbol. Is notified (suggested).

The first special symbol (first specific identification information) and the second special symbol (second specific identification information) are composed of, for example, a “O” symbol indicating a jackpot mode, an “X” symbol indicating a loss mode, and the like. During display, “○” symbol and “×” symbol are displayed in order, and when special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are stopped and displayed in a big hit mode, “○” symbol is stopped and displayed. When the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped and displayed in a lost manner, it is stopped and displayed as a “x” symbol. In addition, during the jackpot game, the jackpot game is terminated, and the stop display is continued with the symbol “O” until the next special symbol change is started.
In FIGS. 68 to 73 to be described later, when the special symbols (first special symbol (first specific identification information), second special symbol (second specific identification information)) are variably displayed, “- "" To indicate that it is fluctuating.

  The first reserved number display area SH1 displays a numerical value from “0” to “4” indicating the first special symbol reserved number (U1). The first special symbol reserved number (U1) ) The numerical value displayed changes according to the increase or decrease.

The second reserved number display area SH2 displays a numerical value from “0” to “4” indicating the second special symbol reserved number (U2). The second special symbol reserved number (U2) ) The numerical value displayed changes according to the increase or decrease.
The hold number display displayed in the hold number display area (the first hold number display area SH1 and the second hold number display area SH2) corresponds to the second aspect of the present invention.

  Specifically, the effect control board 130 receives a special symbol storage designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the first hold number or the second hold number increases or decreases, and the special symbol hold number display designation command is set. In the data output process in step S1600, which will be described later, the hold displayed in the hold number display area (the first hold number display area SH1 and the second hold number display area SH2) by being output by the image control unit 140. The number (first hold number, second hold number) display is updated.

  In the present embodiment, a hold icon (first hold icons H11 to H14, second hold icons H21 to H24), the change icon TH, and the number of holds are displayed on the display unit of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). The first hold number display, the second hold number display) and the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are displayed, but are displayed on the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). You may do it.

  The movable effect member 73 can perform a light emission effect by emitting light by a panel illumination device 74 having a plurality of lamps (LEDs, etc.), and a panel drive device 75 configured by a solenoid, a motor, or the like. It is possible to perform a movement effect by moving up and down.

  Specifically, during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a executed by the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), light is emitted with a predetermined emission color, or downward from the standby position (initial position) positioned above. The light emission effect and the movement effect are performed by moving to the effect position. In addition, you may comprise so that a light emission effect and a movement effect may be performed by operation of the effect button 17. FIG.

  On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, there is a main control device 110A having a main control board 110 for comprehensively controlling the progress of the game, and a game ball according to a payout control command from the main control board 110. A payout control device 120A having a payout control board 120 for controlling the payout device 100; an effect control device 130A having an effect control board 130 for controlling the effect according to the effect control command from the main control board 110; A power supply device 180A incorporating a power supply board 180 for supplying power supply voltage to various control devices, and a game information output terminal plate 90 for outputting game information (game signal) to the outside of the gaming machine are provided.

(Control configuration of gaming machine 1)
Next, the control configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1 in the embodiment of the present invention.

  The main control board 110 comprehensively controls the progress (basic operation) of the game. The main control board 110 includes a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores a game control program and the like, and a main RAM 110c that serves as a work area during the arithmetic processing, and an input for main control. Port and output port. The main CPU 110a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads the program stored in the main ROM 110b, performs arithmetic processing related to the game while utilizing the main RAM 110c, and controls the controlled device or the result of the arithmetic processing. A predetermined command based on this is transmitted to the payout control board 120, the effect control board 130, and the like.

  Here, the communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured to be able to communicate commands (data) in both directions, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is the main control board. A command (data) can be communicated in only one direction from 110 to the effect control board 130.

  The input port of the main control board 110 includes a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a gate detection switch 44a, a first starting opening detection switch 45a, a second starting opening detection switch 47a, a large winning opening detection switch 50a, and a winning confirmation detection switch 52a. The magnetic detection switch 53a, the radio wave detection switch 54a, the payout control board 120, and the like are connected. Detection signals and the like from various detection switches are input to the main control board 110 through the input port, and control processing according to the detection signals is performed.

  The output port of the main control board 110 includes a second start opening / closing solenoid 48b, a prize winning opening / closing solenoid 51b, a first special symbol first display 60, a second special symbol first display 61, and a normal symbol first display. 62, first special symbol hold first indicator 63, second special symbol hold first indicator 64, normal symbol hold first indicator 65, round number indicator 66, right-handed first indicator 67, high probability A game status display 68, a time-saving game status display 69, and a game information output terminal board 90 are connected. Via the output port, drive control signals for controlling various solenoids, display control signals for controlling various displays, game information notified from the game information output terminal board to the outside of the gaming machine (such as a hall computer), etc. Is output.

  The payout control board 120 controls the payout of the game ball and the launch of the game ball based on the reception of the payout control command from the main control board 110. The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the game ball payout device 100 to control the payout of the game ball, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the game ball launching device 26 to control the release of the game ball.

  The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs calculation processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores a payout program, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during the calculation processing, an input port and an output port for payout control, and the like. The payout CPU 121a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator (not shown), reads out a payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, and performs arithmetic processing related to payout of the game ball while utilizing the payout RAM 121c, so that the game ball payout device 100 Or a predetermined command based on the result of the arithmetic processing is transmitted to the main control board 110, the effect control board 130, or the like.

  To the input port of the payout control unit 121, an open detection switch 31a, a tray full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 100a provided in the game ball payout device 100, and the like are connected.

  When an opening detection signal indicating that the glass frame 4 is opened is input from the opening detection switch 31a, the payout control unit 121 transmits a frame opening error designation command to the effect control board 130, and the opening detection signal When the input stops, a frame opening error release designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130. In the effect control board 130, when the frame opening error designation command is received, the opening error notification is performed, and when the frame opening error release designation command is received, the opening error notification is terminated.

  A payout motor 100 b provided in the game ball payout device 100 is connected to an output port of the payout control unit 121. When the payout control unit 121 receives a payout command from the main control board 110, the payout motor 100b is driven to perform a control for paying out a predetermined number of game balls, and a payout ball detection switch 100a discharges a predetermined number of game balls. When it is detected, the control for paying out the game ball is ended.

  The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit, an input port, an output port, and the like (not shown). The touch sensor 15a and the firing volume 15b are connected to the input port of the firing control unit 122, and the ball feed solenoid 11b and the firing solenoid 28b are connected to the output port of the firing control unit 122.

  When the firing control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15 by a touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, the firing control unit 122 permits energization to the firing solenoid 28b and detects from the firing volume 15b. When it is detected that the turning angle of the launching handle 15 has been changed by the signal, the launching solenoid 28b is driven so that the launching intensity is in accordance with the turning angle of the launching handle 15, and the game ball is launched. Yes.

  The launching solenoid 28b is composed of a rotary solenoid, and the launching member 28 is directly connected to the rotating shaft, and the launching member 28 rotates to launch the game ball A by rotating the rotating shaft. . Since the operation of the firing solenoid 28b is set to about 99.9 (times / minute) from the frequency based on the output period of the crystal oscillator provided in the firing control unit 122, the game ball is fired for 1 minute. The number is about 99.9 (pieces / minute). That is, the game ball is fired about every 0.6 seconds.

  The effect control board 130 receives a command from the main control board 110 and controls an effect related to the game. The effect control board 130 includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b that stores an effect control program, an effect control unit 130m that includes a sub RAM 130c that serves as a work area during the arithmetic processing, and a first image display device 70 (main Liquid crystal) and second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), image control unit 140 for controlling sound output device 9 (speaker), frame lighting device 10 and panel lighting device 74. A lamp control unit 160, a drive control unit 170 that controls the effect button drive motor 17b and the panel drive device 75, and an input port and an output port for effect control are provided.

  The sub CPU 130a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the game program stored in the sub ROM 130b, performs the processing related to the presentation while using the sub RAM 130c as a work area, and receives the command received from the main control board 110. Various control units (image control unit 140, sound control unit 150, lamp control unit 160, drive control unit 170) execute various effects in response to input signals from the button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a. Control to output (output data and commands).

  An effect button detection switch 17a, a cross key detection switch 19a, and the like are connected to the input port of the effect control board 130. On the effect control board 130, an effect button detection signal indicating that the effect button 17 has been operated is input from the effect button detection switch 17a, or a cross key detection indicating that the cross key 19 has been operated from the cross key detection switch 19a. When a signal (up button detection signal, left button detection signal, down button detection signal, right button detection signal) is input, processing for executing an effect corresponding to the detection signal is performed.

  The output port of the production control board 130 includes a first special symbol second indicator 80, a second special symbol second indicator 81, a normal symbol second indicator 82, a first special symbol hold second indicator 83, a second Two special symbol hold second indicators 84, a normal symbol hold second indicator 85, and a right-handed second indicator 87 are connected. Display control signals for controlling various displays are output via the output port.

  The image control unit 140 receives the command from the effect control unit 130m and performs control to display a predetermined image on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). The image control unit 140 includes a display control CPU 140a that performs arithmetic processing, a display control ROM 140b that stores a display control program, a display control RAM 140c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and a drawing that includes a VDP (Video Display Processor) as an image processor. A control unit 141, a CGROM 142 storing image data and the like, a VRAM 143 having a frame buffer and the like for temporarily storing drawing data generated from the image data, and an output port are provided.

  The display control CPU 140a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads the display control program stored in the display control ROM 140b, and utilizes the display control RAM 140c to make the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device. Control for displaying an image on 71 (sub liquid crystal) is performed.

  The display control ROM 140b includes a mask ROM, a display control program for displaying an image, a display list generation program for generating a display list, an animation pattern for displaying an animation of a production pattern, and animation scene information. Etc. are stored.

  This animation pattern is referred to when displaying an animation that constitutes the specific content of the effect by the image, and the animation pattern is associated with the animation scene information, the display order of each animation scene, and the like. The animation scene information includes weight frame (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), drawing parameters (sprite display position, display magnification, transmittance, etc.), drawing method. In addition, various information such as a duty ratio, which is a luminance parameter of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is included.

  A drawing control unit (VDP) 141 is connected to the CGROM 142 in which image data is stored, and generates drawing data that is a source of a video signal (RGB signal, etc.) based on a command and image data from the display control CPU 140a. To do. The image data includes images (frames) to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), for example, an effect symbol image, a landscape image that constitutes the background of the effect symbol, and a character This is material data representing individual images such as images and serif images. On the other hand, the drawing data is synthetic data representing an image of the entire frame formed by combining (superimposing) individual images.

  The CGROM 142 includes a flash memory, an EEPROM, an EPROM, a mask ROM, and the like. The CGROM 142 compresses and stores image data (sprites, movies, etc.) composed of a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 × 32 pixels). ing. The pixel information is composed of color number information for specifying a color number for each pixel and an α value indicating the transparency of the image. The CGROM 142 is read out in units of image data by a drawing control unit (VDP) 141, and image processing is performed in units of image data of this frame.

  Further, the CGROM 142 stores palette data in which color number information for specifying a color number and display color information for actually displaying colors are associated with each other without being compressed. Note that the CGROM 142 may have a configuration in which only a part of the image data is compressed without being compressed. As a movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

  The VRAM 143 is configured by an SRAM that can write or read image data at high speed. The VRAM 143 includes a display list storage area for temporarily storing the display list output from the display control CPU 140a, and a frame buffer corresponding to the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). It has an area etc.

  The frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying an image, and further includes a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are alternately switched to a “drawing frame buffer” and a “display frame buffer” each time drawing is started.

  For this reason, the drawing control unit (VDP) 141 draws drawing data stored in the CGROM 142 in the “frame buffer for drawing” in the frame buffer area of the VRAM 143 based on an instruction (display list) from the display control CPU 140a. Drawing data is read from the “display frame buffer” in the buffer area, a video signal (LVDS signal, RGB signal, etc.) is generated based on the read drawing data, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second It outputs to the image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) and displays various images.

  The drawing control unit (VDP) 141 is supplied with an operation clock from a crystal oscillator, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 are divided by dividing the operation clock. A synchronization signal (horizontal synchronization signal / vertical synchronization signal) for synchronizing with (sub liquid crystal) is generated and output to the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal).

  Further, a general-purpose board 72 that converts image data into a predetermined image format and outputs it between the image controller 140 and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). Is connected. The general-purpose substrate 72 has a bridge function for converting into an image format corresponding to the performance of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) that display image data. Absorbs the difference in resolution between connecting a 19 inch liquid crystal display device of SXGA (1280 dots × 1080 dots) and a 17 inch liquid crystal display device of XGA (1024 dots × 768 dots) .

  The sound control unit 150 is connected to the audio output device 9, and based on various effect data (including commands) transmitted from the effect control unit 130m, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image. In accordance with the display on the display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display), control is performed to output audio data, music data, etc. from the audio output device 9.

  The lamp control unit 160 is connected to the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74, and is based on various production data (including commands) transmitted from the production control unit 130m (sub CPU 130a). A light emission effect is performed by performing lighting control such as turning on, turning off, or blinking the LEDs of the device 10 and the panel lighting device 74.

  The drive control unit 170 is connected to the effect button drive motor 17b and the board drive device 75, and the effect button drive is performed based on various effect data (including commands) transmitted from the effect control unit 130m (sub CPU 130a). An operation effect is performed by performing drive control of a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid of the motor 17b and the panel drive device 75.

  The power supply board 180 supplies a power supply voltage to the gaming machine 1 (the main control board 110, the payout control board 120, the effect control board 130, and various electronic components). The power supply board 180 detects whether or not a power supply interruption (power failure) has occurred, and outputs a power supply interruption detection signal 182 to the main control board 110 based on the occurrence of the power supply interruption (power failure). A backup power supply circuit 183 is provided for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 when the power is cut off (power failure).

  The power-off detection circuit 182 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1 and outputs a power-off detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage becomes a predetermined value or less. More specifically, the main CPU 110a whose power-off detection signal is at a high level is in an operable state, and when the power-off detection signal is at a low level, the main CPU 110a is in an operation-stopped state.

  The backup power supply circuit 183 includes a capacitor that stores electricity when the gaming machine is energized. When a power interruption (power failure) occurs, the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is supplied to the main RAM 110c or the payout control of the main control board 110. Supply to the payout RAM 121c of the substrate 120. As a result, the stored contents of the main RAM 110c and the payout RAM 121c are retained for a predetermined period even when the power is turned off (power failure), and the control state of the game after the power failure (power failure) is restored. It can be restored to the previous state. Note that backup power may be supplied to the effect control board 130.

(Description of gaming state)
Next, the gaming state when the game progresses will be described. In the present embodiment, there are “low probability gaming state” and “high probability gaming state” as the states related to the special symbol jackpot lottery, and “non-short-time gaming state” as the state relating to the movable member 48 of the second starting port 47. And “short-time gaming state”. The states related to the jackpot lottery (low-probability gaming state, high-probability gaming state) and the states relating to the movable member 48 (non-short-time gaming state, short-time gaming state) can be associated with each other or can be made independent. . That means
(1) In the case of “low probability gaming state” and “short-time gaming state” (first specific gaming state),
(2) In the case of “low probability gaming state” and “non-temporary gaming state” (normal gaming state),
(3) In the case of “high probability gaming state” and “time saving gaming state” (second specific gaming state),
(4) It is possible to provide a “high probability gaming state” and a “non-temporary gaming state” (third specific gaming state).
Note that the gaming state when the game is started, that is, the initial gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is a “low probability gaming state” and is set to a “non-short-time gaming state”. Is referred to as a “normal gaming state”.

  In the present embodiment, the “low probability gaming state” means that the winning probability of jackpot in the jackpot lottery of special symbols performed on the condition that a game ball has entered the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47 For example, it means a gaming state set as low as 1/299. On the other hand, the “high probability gaming state” refers to a gaming state in which the jackpot winning probability is improved as compared to the low probability gaming state, and the jackpot winning probability is set to be, for example, 1 / 59.8. . Therefore, in the “high probability gaming state”, it is easier to win a jackpot than in the “low probability gaming state”. Note that the low probability gaming state is changed to the high probability gaming state after the jackpot game described later is finished.

  In this embodiment, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the high probability gaming state is called “probability jackpot”, and the jackpot that triggers the transition to the low probability gaming state is called “ordinary jackpot”.

  In the present embodiment, “non-short-time gaming state” means the average variation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal gate 44. Is a game state that is set longer than the “short-time game state” and that the opening time of the second start port 47 when winning in the win is easily set. For example, when a game ball passes through the general symbol gate 44, a normal symbol winning lottery is performed, and the normal symbol variation display is performed on the normal symbol first display 62, but the normal symbol variation display is started. From, for example, the display is stopped after 30 seconds. If the lottery result is a win, the second start port 47 is controlled to be opened for 0.2 seconds, for example, after the normal symbol stop display.

  On the other hand, the “short-time gaming state” means that the average variation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the ordinary gate 44 is used. A gaming state that is set shorter than the “non-short-time gaming state” and is set to be longer than the “non-short-time gaming state”, for example, the opening time of the second start port 47 when winning in the win is 2.5 seconds, for example. Say. Further, in the “non-short-time gaming state”, the probability of winning in the normal symbol winning lottery is set to be low, for example, 1/128, and in the “short-time gaming state”, the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is, for example, 127. / 128 is set high. Therefore, in the “short-time gaming state”, when the game ball passes through the normal gate 44 than in the “non-short-time gaming state”, the second start port 47 is more easily controlled to the open mode. Thus, in the “short-time gaming state”, the player can advantageously advance the game without consuming the game ball.

  In the embodiment, the “short time gaming state” is set so that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second start opening 47, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery are more advantageous than the “non-short time gaming state”. Has been. However, the “short-time gaming state” may be set so that only one of the normal symbol variation time, the opening time of the second start opening 47, and the normal symbol lottery winning probability is advantageous. Further, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the probability of winning in the normal symbol winning lottery may be, for example, 0/128.

  Next, details of various tables stored in the main ROM 110b will be described with reference to FIGS.

(Special design jackpot lottery determination table)
FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a jackpot determination table. Specifically, FIG. 6A is a jackpot determination table for a first special symbol triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first start opening 45, and FIG. 6B shows the second start. It is a jackpot determination table for the second special symbol triggered by the game ball entering the mouth 47. In the tables of FIG. 6A and FIG. 6B, the jackpot probabilities are the same.

  As shown in FIGS. 6 (a) and 6 (b), the jackpot determination table includes a probability game state, a jackpot determination acquired when a game ball enters the first start port 45 or the second start port 47. The jackpot determination value for determining the random number for use and the determination result of the jackpot lottery are associated with each other.

  The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol or the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 6 (a) and FIG. 6 (b), and acquires the current probability gaming state and the acquired jackpot Based on the determination random number value, it is determined whether it is “big hit” or “lost”.

  For example, according to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 6A, it is determined that two jackpot determination random numbers “7” and “8” are jackpots in the low probability gaming state. Is done. On the other hand, in the high-probability gaming state, ten jackpot determination random numbers from “7” to “16” are determined to be jackpots. If the random number is other than the above, it is determined as “lost”.

  Therefore, since the random number range of the jackpot determination random number value is 0 to 598, the probability of being determined to be a jackpot in the low probability gaming state is 1/299, and it is determined to be a jackpot in the high probability gaming state. Probability increases by a factor of 5 to 1 / 58.9. In addition, the probability determined to be a big hit is not limited to five times, and may be set to an arbitrary value such as three times or ten times.

(Special symbol judgment table)
FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a special symbol determination table for determining a special symbol stop symbol corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot lottery. Specifically, FIG. 7 (a) is a special symbol determination table for jackpot that is referred to in order to determine the stop symbol of the special symbol at the time of winning the jackpot, and FIG. It is a symbol determination table for losing that is sometimes referred to in order to determine a stop symbol of a special symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 7A, in the special symbol determination table for jackpots, when the game ball enters the first start port 45 or the second start port 47 and the type of the start port that the game ball has won. The jackpot symbol determination value for determining the jackpot symbol determination random value to be acquired, the determination result (special symbol type), the special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data), and the information indicating the special symbol type The effect designating command transmitted to the control board 130 is associated.

  As shown in FIG. 7B, in the special symbol determination table for losing, when the game ball enters the first start port 45 or the second start port 47 and the type of the start port where the game ball has won, The jackpot symbol determination value for determining the jackpot symbol determination random value to be acquired, the determination result (special symbol type), the special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data), and the information indicating the special symbol type The effect designating command transmitted to the control board 130 is associated. It should be noted that a plurality of special symbols and special symbol determination values may be associated with each other so that a plurality of special symbols can be determined even in the case of a loss.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 7, and determines the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data) based on the type of the starting opening where the game ball has won and the random number value for jackpot symbol determination. Will be determined.
Then, at the time of starting the change of the special symbol, an effect designating command as information indicating the type of the special symbol is determined based on the determined special symbol type (special symbol stop symbol data). Here, the effect designating command is composed of 2-byte data, and 1-byte MODE data for identifying the control command classification and 1-byte DATA indicating the contents of the control command to be executed. It consists of data. The same applies to a variation pattern designation command described later.

  Here, as will be described later, the type of jackpot game (see FIG. 8) and the game state after the jackpot game end (see FIG. 11) are determined by the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data). It can be said that the type of special symbol determines the type of jackpot game and the gaming state after the jackpot game ends.

(Big hit game control table)
FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a jackpot game control table for determining the progress of the jackpot state (special game state) when the jackpot lottery is determined as the determination result of the jackpot lottery. In the jackpot game control table, the special symbol type (special symbol stop symbol data), the opening time of the jackpot state (special game state), the opening designation command to be transmitted to the effect control board 130 at the start of the opening, and the big prize opening 50 Are associated with the winning opening / closing control table for determining the opening / closing mode, the ending time in the big hit state (special game state), and the ending designation command transmitted to the effect control board 130 at the start of the ending.

  The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot game control table shown in FIG. 8, and determines the opening time, the big opening / closing control table, and the ending time based on the special figure stop symbol data. Since the number of rounds in the jackpot state (special game state) is determined by determining the type of the big prize opening / closing table, FIG. 8 shows the number of rounds in the jackpot state (special game state), etc. Is supplementarily described.

(Big prize opening / closing control table for jackpot games)
FIG. 9 and FIG. 10 are diagrams showing a big prize opening / closing control table that is referred to when a big win is won. The special prize opening / closing control table includes a table number (TBL.No), a round number indicating the number of rounds of the big hit game (special game state), and a special electric power indicating the number of times the special prize opening 50 is opened during one round. The operation number (K), the opening time of the special winning opening 50, and the closing time (interval time) for closing the special winning opening 50 between rounds are associated with each other.

  The main CPU 110a specifies the opening / closing mode (opening / closing pattern) of the special winning opening 50 with reference to the special winning opening / closing control table shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, and based on the first winning opening / closing control table (TBL.No01). The first jackpot game is executed, the second jackpot game is executed based on the second big prize opening / closing control table (TBL.No02), and the second big prize opening / closing control table (TBL.No03) is used. The third big hit game is executed, the fourth big win game is executed based on the fourth big prize opening / closing control table (TBL.No04), and the fifth big win is made based on the fifth big prize opening / closing control table (TBL.No05). A game is executed, a sixth jackpot game is executed based on the sixth grand prize opening / closing control table (TBL.No06), and a seventh big prize opening / closing control table (TBL.No.06) is executed. Performing a seventh bonus game based on o07).

  According to the first big prize opening / closing control table (TBL.No = 01), the opening / closing member 51 is operated to move the big prize opening 50 on the right side of the game area 5a to one round from the first round to the fourth round. The first jackpot game is executed, which is released to 29.5 seconds per round, and from 5 to 8 rounds is released to 0.18 seconds per round.

  However, if a specified number (9) of game balls wins the big winning opening 50 before the opening time elapses, one round of game is completed. When the eight-round game ends, the first jackpot game ends. From the 5th round to the 8th round, since the opening time of the big winning opening 50 is extremely short and it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, the first big hit game can be said to be a promising big hit game of 4 rounds.

  According to the second winning prize opening / closing control table (TBL.No = 02), the opening / closing member 51 is operated to change the winning prize opening 50 on the right side of the game area 5a from the first round to the fourth round and from the sixth round. Up to 8 rounds are opened up to 29.5 seconds per round, and 5 rounds are opened and closed multiple times per round (K = 5). Repeat the closing for 32 seconds, and finally release for 25.0 seconds).

  However, when a prescribed number (9) of game balls wins the big winning opening 50 before the maximum number of times of opening (K), the game of one round is finished. And when the game of 8 rounds is complete | finished, the 2nd big hit game will be complete | finished. It should be noted that since the opening time of the big winning opening 50 is long from 1 round to 8 rounds and it is easy to obtain a winning ball, the second big hit game can be said to be a promising big hit game of 8 rounds.

  Note that, in the first jackpot game and the second jackpot game, the open / close mode of the big prize opening 50 is the same until the middle of the fifth round, so it is not possible to grasp which jackpot game is up to the middle. Therefore, in the first jackpot game, a round game in which a prize ball can be obtained during the closing time of 5 to 8 rounds, and in the second jackpot game until the fourth closing time of the big winning opening 50 of 5 rounds. For example, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) executes the promotion effect as to whether or not the number of the images increases. Specifically, in the first jackpot game, after executing the promotion failure effect that makes it appear that the increase in the round game in which the prize ball can be acquired in the final stage of the promotion effect has failed, the jackpot game is terminated. In the second jackpot game, after performing the promotion success effect that makes it seem that the round game that can win the prize ball in the final stage of the promotion effect was successful, the fifth round opening of the 50 round winning prize opening 50 is performed. The jackpot game is advanced after the 6th round in which a prize ball can be obtained. By doing so, the player's expectation for the promotion effect is enhanced.

  According to the third big prize opening / closing control table (TBL.No = 03), the opening / closing member 51 is operated to change the big prize opening 50 on the right side of the game area 5a from one round to 15 rounds per round. Open up to 29.5 seconds and run the third jackpot game. However, if a specified number (9) of game balls wins the big winning opening 50 before the opening time elapses, one round of game is completed. When the 15-round game ends, the third big hit game ends. It should be noted that the third big hit game is substantially a 15-round promising big hit game because the open time of the big winning opening 50 is long from 1 round to 15 rounds and it is easy to obtain a winning ball.

  According to the fourth prize opening opening / closing control table (TBL.No = 04), the opening / closing member 51 is operated, and the prize winning opening 50 on the right side of the game area 5a is changed from one round to eight rounds per round. A fourth jackpot game is executed which is released until 0.18 seconds. However, if a specified number (9) of game balls wins the big winning opening 50 before the opening time elapses, one round of game is completed. And when the game of 8 rounds is complete | finished, the 4th big hit game will be complete | finished. From the 1st round to the 8th round, since the opening time of the big prize opening 50 is extremely short and it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, the fourth big hit game can be said to be a sudden probability change big hit game of 0 rounds.

  According to the fifth prize winning opening / closing control table (TBL.No = 05), the opening / closing member 51 is operated to move the prize winning opening 50 on the right side of the game area 5a from one round to eight rounds. Open up to 29.5 seconds per game and execute the fifth jackpot game. However, if a specified number (9) of game balls wins the big winning opening 50 before the opening time elapses, one round of game is completed. And when the game of 8 rounds is complete | finished, a 5th big hit game will be complete | finished. It should be noted that since the opening time of the big winning opening 50 is long from the first round to the eighth round and it is easy to obtain a winning ball, the fifth big hit game can be said to be a normal big hit game of substantially eight rounds.

  According to the sixth grand prize opening opening / closing control table (TBL.No = 06), the opening / closing member 51 is operated so that the grand prize winning opening 50 on the right side of the game area 5a is one round from the first round to the fourth round. A sixth jackpot game is executed in which the game is released up to 29.5 seconds per game and from 5 to 15 rounds up to 0.18 seconds per game round.

  However, if a specified number (9) of game balls wins the big winning opening 50 before the opening time elapses, one round of game is completed. And when the game of 15 rounds is complete | finished, a 6th big hit game will be complete | finished. From the 5th round to the 15th round, since the opening time of the big prize opening 50 is extremely short and it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, the sixth big hit game can be said to be a promising big hit game of four rounds.

  According to the seventh grand prize opening / closing control table (TBL.No = 07), the opening / closing member 51 is operated, and the grand prize winning opening 50 on the right side of the game area 5a is changed from the first round to the fourth round and from the sixth round. Open up to 29.5 seconds per round up to 15 rounds, and open and close multiple times (K = 12) per round in 5 rounds (the grand prize opening 50 is open for 0.18 seconds and 2 Repeat the closing for 548 seconds, and finally release for 25.0 seconds).

  However, when a prescribed number (9) of game balls wins the big winning opening 50 before the maximum number of times of opening (K), the game of one round is finished. Then, when the 15-round game ends, the seventh big hit game ends. It should be noted that the seventh big hit game is substantially a 15-round probable big hit game because the open time of the big winning opening 50 is long from 1 round to 15 rounds and it is easy to obtain a winning ball.

  Note that in the sixth jackpot game and the seventh jackpot game, the open / close mode of the big winning opening 50 is the same until the middle of the fifth round, so it is impossible to grasp which jackpot game is until the middle.

  Therefore, in the sixth jackpot game, for example, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) executes a promotion effect as to whether or not the number of rounds in which a prize ball can be acquired increases from 5 to 15 rounds. In the seventh jackpot game, for example, the first image shows a promotion effect as to whether or not the number of rounds in which a prize ball can be acquired increases between the first opening of the fifth round winning opening 50 and the eleventh closing. It is executed on the display device 70 (main liquid crystal).

  In the sixth jackpot game, after executing the promotion failure effect described above in the final stage of the promotion effect, the jackpot game is terminated, and in the seventh jackpot game, the promotion success effect described above is executed in the final phase of the promotion effect. After that, the 12th opening of the 5-round grand opening 50 is performed, and the jackpot game is advanced after the 6th round in which the winning ball can be obtained. By doing so, the player's expectation for the promotion effect is enhanced.

(Game state setting table)
FIG. 11 is a game state setting table for determining the game state after the end of the jackpot game (special game state). As shown in FIG. 11, the type of start opening where the game ball has won, the special symbol stop symbol data, the short-time game state, the short-time game count (J), the stochastic game status, and the high-probability game count (X). Are associated with each other.

  The main CPU 110a refers to the game state setting table shown in FIG. 11, and at the end of the jackpot, based on the type of the start port and the stop symbol data of the special symbol, the short-time game state, the short-time game number (J), the probability game state, and the high The probability game number (X) is determined. Note that when the low probability game state is determined as the probability game state, the high probability game count (X) is not determined.

  As a feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 11 in this embodiment, the number of short-time games (J) and the number of high-probability games (X) are shown in the case of special symbols 10 to 13 and special symbols 20 to 22. The point is set not to infinity but to 10,000 times. However, in the high-probability gaming state, the probability of winning the jackpot lottery before 10,000 jackpot lotteries are performed is extremely high, so the short-time gaming state and the high-probability gaming state may continue until the next jackpot lottery is won. I can say that.

(Variation pattern determination table)
12 and 13 are diagrams showing a variation pattern determination table that is referred to when performing variation display of special symbols. FIG. 12 is a variation pattern determination table which is referred to when a special symbol variation display is performed by entering a game ball into the first start opening 45, and FIG. It is a variation pattern determination table referred to when performing variation display of special symbols by entering a ball.

  In the variation pattern determination table of FIG. 12 and FIG. 13, the winning ball lottery determination result, the special symbol type (special symbol stop symbol data), and the game ball enters the first start port 45 or the second start port 47 The random number for reach determination acquired at the time, and the first special symbol hold number (U1) that is the current number of first hold or the second special symbol hold number (U2) that is the current second hold number , A special figure variation pattern determination random number acquired when a game ball enters the first start port 45 or the second start port 47, a special symbol variation pattern (number), The variation time of the special symbol is associated with the variation pattern designation command indicating the variation pattern (number).

  Therefore, it can be said that the “special symbol variation pattern” can specify at least the jackpot lottery determination result and the special symbol variation time. In addition, when the determination result of the big hit lottery is lost, the reach determination random number is referred to, but in the case of the big win, a reach is generated except in special cases, so the reach determination random number is not referred to. Yes. In addition, the random number range for reach determination and the random number value for special figure variation pattern determination are set to 100 (0 to 99).

  In addition, in the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 and FIG. 13, when the number of reserved balls (U1 or U2) of the special symbol increases, the variation pattern 1 (normally so that the average variation time of the special symbol is shortened) Variation pattern 2 (shortening variation: variation time 3 seconds) is more easily determined than variation: variation time 12 seconds. In the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 12, when the number of reserved balls (U1 or U2) of the special symbol increases, the variation pattern 4 (normal variation: variation time 10 seconds) is more than the variation pattern 3 (normal reach: variation time 20 seconds). ) Is easily determined.

  Although the maximum number of reserved balls (U1 or U2) for a special symbol may be “4”, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined after subtracting 1 from the number of reserved balls for the special symbol. Therefore, “4” is not set as the number of reserved balls.

  The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 and FIG. 13, and determines the jackpot lottery determination result, the special symbol type (special symbol stop symbol data), the reach determination random number value, and the special symbol hold. Based on the number of spheres (U1 or U2) and the random number for determining the special symbol variation pattern, the variation pattern of the special symbol and the variation time of the special symbol are determined. Based on the determined special symbol variation pattern, a special symbol variation pattern designation command is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  Here, the special symbol variation pattern designation command is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the command classification and 1-byte DATA data indicating the content (function) of the command. In the present embodiment, when the MODE data is “E6H”, a special symbol variation pattern designation command of the first special symbol first display 60 corresponding to the winning of a game ball at the first starting port 45 is shown. When the data is “E7H”, a special symbol variation pattern designation command of the second special symbol first display 61 corresponding to the winning of the game ball at the second start port 47 is indicated.

  In addition, in the effect control board 130, as will be described later, the effect content related to the change display of the effect symbol 70a is determined based on the change pattern (variation pattern designation command) of the special symbol. In the rightmost column of the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 and FIG. 13, the effect content (variation effect pattern) such as the effect symbol 70 a is described as a reference.

  Here, as the production contents, here, “normal fluctuation” and “shortening fluctuation” mean that the plurality of production symbols 70a fluctuate at high speed and stop without reaching, Normal fluctuations and shortening fluctuations are different in that the shortening fluctuations are completed in a shorter fluctuation time than the normal fluctuations.

  In addition, “reach” is a variation mode that gives a player a sense of expectation of jackpot, such that a part of the combination of effect symbols 70a that informs the jackpot is temporarily stopped and other effect symbols 70a fluctuate. Means. For example, when a combination of a three-digit effect symbol 70a of “777” is set as a combination of effect symbols 70a for notifying the jackpot (a jackpot result mode), two effect symbols 70a are “ 7 "means that the temporary stop is performed, and the remaining effect symbol 70a is changing in the central region.

  Note that the “temporary stop” means that the effect design 70a is slightly shaken or the effect design 70a is deformed to a small extent, so that it appears to the player as if the effect design 70a is stopped (completely stopped). Not).

  In addition, “normal reach” means a reach with low expectation of jackpot where two effect symbols 70a temporarily stop in the left region and right region, and the remaining one effect symbol 70a fluctuates in the central region. In the present embodiment, although not big hit by “normal reach”, the big hit may be made by “normal reach”.

  “SP reach” means a super reach with a higher degree of expectation of jackpot than a normal reach. For example, it refers to a mode in which the effect symbol 70a in the central area that is not temporarily stopped changes specially or a special character is displayed.

“SPSP reach” means a special reach that is performed after super reach and has a higher expectation of jackpot than super reach.
In addition, the “full rotation reach” means a mode in which the combination of a plurality of effect symbols 70a for notifying the jackpot is all in a low speed state, and in the present embodiment, only when winning in the jackpot lottery. Means reach to be performed.

  The variation pattern determination table for special symbols shown in FIG. 12 and FIG. 13 is referred to regardless of the gaming state, but a variation pattern determination table having a different variation pattern selection mode for each of a plurality of gaming states is provided. You may make it change the variation pattern determination table referred according to the game state at that time.

(Pre-judgment table for jackpot lottery)
FIG. 14 and FIG. 15 are diagrams showing a prior determination table for determining in advance the determination result of the special symbol jackpot lottery. FIG. 14 is a pre-judgment table that is referred to when special symbols are changed and displayed by entering a game ball into the first start opening 45. FIG. 15 shows the game ball entering the second start opening 47. It is a prior determination table referred when performing the variable display of a special symbol by a sphere.

  In the pre-judgment tables of FIG. 14 and FIG. 15, the winning ball lottery judgment result, the special symbol type (special symbol stop symbol data), and the game ball has entered the first start port 45 or the second start port 47 The random number value for reach determination acquired at times, the random number value for special figure fluctuation pattern determination acquired when a game ball enters the first start port 45 or the second start port 47, and the planned change pattern (number) ) Corresponding to the start opening winning designation command.

Here, it is possible to determine in advance whether it is “big hit” or “losing” based on the random number for jackpot determination acquired when the game ball enters the first start port 45 or the second start port 47, and for determining the big hit symbol The type of special game and the presence / absence of the transition to the high probability game state can be determined in advance based on the random value.
Furthermore, because the reach determination random number value and the special figure variation pattern determination random number value can determine the contents of the presentation (whether the occurrence of reach, the type of reach), etc. in advance, the start prize information (start opening prize designation command DATA) can determine information on the type of jackpot and the contents of the effect (scheduled variation pattern).

  The main CPU 110a refers to the pre-determination tables shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, and based on the jackpot determination random number value, the jackpot symbol determination random value, the reach determination random number value, and the special figure variation pattern determination random value. "Starting winning information" is determined. Then, based on the determined start winning information, a start opening winning designation command for determining the result of the jackpot lottery in advance is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  This start opening prize designation command is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the command classification and 1-byte DATA data indicating the content (function) of the command. In the present embodiment, when the MODE data is “E8H”, a start port winning designation command corresponding to the winning of the game ball is shown at the first start port 45, and when the MODE data is “E9H”, the second start is performed. A start opening winning designation command corresponding to the winning of a game ball in the opening 47 is shown.

  14 and FIG. 15 is similar to the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 and FIG. However, the prior determination table shown in FIGS. 14 and 15 is used when a game ball enters the first start opening 45 or the second start opening 47, whereas the special symbol variation pattern shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 is used. The decision table is different in that it is used at the start of special symbol variation. In addition, it is also different whether or not “the number of reserved balls” is referred to.

  For this reason, in the pre-determination tables shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, it is possible to determine the type of jackpot or variation pattern, but the determination result of the jackpot lottery is “losing” and the reach determination random value is “0”. In the case of ˜89 ”, the planned variation pattern is the variation pattern 1 to 4, but it is impossible to determine whether the planned variation pattern is“ normal variation ”,“ shortening variation ”, or“ normal reach ”.

  The special symbol prior determination tables shown in FIGS. 14 and 15 are referred to regardless of the gaming state at that time. However, a preliminary determination table having a different variation pattern selection mode for each of the plurality of gaming states is provided. The prior determination table to be referred to may be changed according to the gaming state at that time.

  FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating a table relating to the normal symbol and the movable member 48 of the second start port 47. Specifically, FIG. 16A is a diagram showing a normal symbol hit determination table used for the normal symbol hitting lottery, and FIG. 16B is a normal symbol corresponding to the normal symbol hitting lottery result. FIG. 16C is a diagram showing a normal symbol variation pattern determination table for determining a regular symbol variation time, and FIG. 16D is a diagram showing a symbol stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the open mode determination table of the 2nd starting port for determining the open mode of the movable member 48 in the winning state (auxiliary game) which generate | occur | produces when winning a winning design lottery.

(Normal hit judgment table for symbols)
As shown in FIG. 16 (a), the hit determination table includes presence / absence of a short-time gaming state, a hit determination random number value acquired when a game ball passes through the general gate 44, and a determination result of the win lottery. It is associated. The main CPU 110a refers to the winning determination table shown in FIG. 16A, and determines whether it is “winning” or “lost” based on the current short-time gaming state and the acquired random number for winning determination.

  For example, according to the hit determination table shown in FIG. 16 (a), when it is in the non-short game state, it is determined that one hit determination random number value of “127” is a win, and when it is in the short time game state, “1”. ”To“ 127 ”, 127 hit determination random number values are determined to be hits. Therefore, the probability of being determined to be winning in the non-short game state is 1/128, and the probability of being determined to be winning in the time-saving gaming state is 127/128.

(Normal symbol stop symbol determination table)
In the stop symbol determination table shown in FIG. 16 (b), the presence / absence of the short-time gaming state, the lottery result of the winning lottery, the random number for winning symbol acquired when the game ball passes through the general gate 44, An ordinary symbol type (ordinary symbol stop symbol data) is associated with an ordinary symbol designation command transmitted to the effect control board 130 as information indicating the ordinary symbol type.

The main CPU 110a refers to the stop symbol determination table shown in FIG. 16B, and displays the normal symbol first display based on the current short-time gaming state, the lottery result of the winning lottery, and the acquired random number for winning symbol. Normal symbol and universal symbol stop symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the device 62 are determined.
Then, at the start of normal symbol variation, based on the determined normal symbol (normal symbol stop symbol data) type, a general symbol designation command as information indicating the normal symbol type is determined and transmitted to the effect control board 130. .

(Normal pattern variation pattern determination table)
In the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 16C, the presence / absence of a short-time gaming state, the lottery result of the winning lottery, and the variation for determining the usual diagram variation pattern acquired when the game ball passes the ordinary diagram gate 44 The numerical value, the normal symbol variation time, and the normal symbol variation pattern designation command transmitted to the effect control board 130 as information indicating the regular symbol variation time are associated with each other.

The main CPU 110a refers to the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 16C, and based on the current short time gaming state, the lottery result of the winning lottery, and the random variation value for determining the regular variation pattern, the variation time of the normal symbol Will be determined.
Then, at the start of normal symbol variation, based on the determined variation time, a normal symbol variation pattern designation command as information indicating the variation time of the ordinary symbol is determined and transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  As a feature of the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 16 (c), the variation time of the short-time gaming state (3 seconds or 5 seconds) is shorter than the variation time of the non-short-time gaming state (30 seconds or 40 seconds). It is configured.

(Second starting port opening mode determination table)
In the release mode determination table shown in FIG. 16D, the normal symbol (general symbol stop symbol data), the maximum number of opening times (S) of the second start port 47 (movable member 48), and the second start port 47 ( The first opening time and closing time of the movable member 48), the interval time between the first closing time and the second opening time, and the second opening time and closing time are associated with each other.

  The main CPU 110a refers to the release mode determination table shown in FIG. 16 (d), and based on the usual figure stop symbol data, the maximum number of times the second start port 47 (movable member 48) is opened, the first opening time and the closing time. Determine the time, the second opening time and the closing time.

  In the release mode determination table shown in FIG. 16 (d), the release mode based on the usual figure stop symbol data = 02 (ordinary symbol 2) is more game than the release mode based on the usual figure stop symbol data = 01 (normal symbol 1). It is an open mode that is advantageous to the user, and the open mode based on the general map stop symbol data = 03 (ordinary symbol 3) is more open to the player than the open mode based on the general map stop symbol data = 02 (normal symbol 2). This is an advantageous opening mode.

  Note that, as shown in the stop symbol determination table of FIG. 16B, the normal symbol stop symbol data = 3 (ordinary symbol 3) that is most advantageous to the player is determined when winning in the short-time gaming state. . As a result, in the short-time gaming state, the second start port 47 (movable member 48) is operated so as to be more advantageous to the player than in the non-short-time gaming state.

(Various storage areas)
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing various storage areas set in the main RAM 110c. Specifically, FIG. 17A is a diagram showing a special symbol holding storage area in which various types of information are stored when a game ball enters the first start opening 45 and / or the second start opening 47. FIG. 17B is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit in the special symbol storage area, and FIG. 17C shows various information stored when the game ball passes through the general gate 44. FIG. 17D is a diagram showing a configuration of each storage unit of the normal symbol hold storage area.

  As shown in FIG. 17A, the special symbol reservation storage area is divided into a first special symbol reservation storage area, a second special symbol reservation storage area, and a special symbol storage area, and the first special symbol reservation storage area. The storage unit and the second special symbol holding storage area are divided from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit, respectively, and the special symbol related storage area is configured by the 0th storage unit.

  As shown in FIG. 17B, each storage unit has a jackpot determination random number storage area for storing a jackpot determination random number value, and a jackpot symbol determination random number storage area for storing a jackpot symbol determination random value. And a reach determination random number storage area for storing a reach determination random number value and a special figure variation pattern determination random number storage region for storing a special figure variation pattern determination random value.

  Then, when a game ball enters the first start opening 45, the special symbol determination information (big hit) is stored in the storage unit with the smallest number among the storage units in which no random number is stored in the first special symbol storage area. A random number for determination, a random number for jackpot symbol determination, a random number for reach determination, and a random number for special figure fluctuation pattern determination) are stored. In addition, when a game ball enters the second start port 47, the special figure determination information (in the second special symbol holding storage area, the storage unit with the smallest number among the storage units in which no random number is stored) A jackpot determination random number, a jackpot symbol determination random number, a reach determination random number, and a special figure variation pattern determination random number) are stored.

  The 0th storage part of the special symbol storage area is stored in the first storage part of the storage area of the first special symbol reservation storage area or the second special symbol reservation storage area that satisfies the start condition of the variable symbol display. By shifting the stored special figure determination information, the special figure determination information related to the fluctuation display of the current special symbol is stored.

  As shown in FIG. 17 (c), the normal symbol holding storage area is divided from the 0th storage unit to the fourth storage unit, and as shown in FIG. A random number storage area for hit determination for storing numerical values, a random number storage area for determination of hit symbols for storing random numbers for determination of hit patterns, and a normal pattern change for storing random numbers for determining normal pattern variation patterns It is divided into a random number storage area for pattern determination.

  Then, when a game ball passes through the general gate 44, the storage unit with the smallest number among the storage units in which the random numbers are not stored among the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the normal symbol holding storage area. Common figure determination information (random number for winning determination, random number for determining winning pattern, random number for determining normal pattern variation pattern) is stored. The 0th storage unit shifts the common symbol determination information stored in the first storage unit when the start condition of the normal symbol variation display is satisfied, so that the normal symbol determination related to the current normal symbol variation display is performed. Information will be stored.

  Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 will be described using a flowchart.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing main processing of the main control board 110.

  When a power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 180, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 110a, and the main CPU 110a performs the following main processing.

  First, in step S1, the main CPU 110a sets permission to access the main RAM 110c.

  In step S2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 55 is turned on (whether or not the RAM clear switch 55 is pressed). If the RAM clear switch 55 is turned on (S2: If yes, the process proceeds to step S8, and if the RAM clear switch 55 is not ON (S2: No), the process proceeds to step S3.

  In step S3, the main CPU 110a creates a checksum of the main RAM 110c when the power is turned on.

  In step S4, the main CPU 110a compares the created checksum of the main RAM 110c when the power is turned on with the checksum of the main RAM 110c when the power is turned off. Here, the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S5 when the compared checksums match (S4: Yes), and proceeds to step S5 when the compared checksums do not match (S4: No). The process proceeds to S11.

  In step S5, the main CPU 110a loads the backup data stored in the backed up main RAM 110c, and performs a setting process (power recovery process) of the main RAM 110c for setting the backup data in the work area of the main RAM 110c. Thereby, the control state of the game is restored (returned) to the state before the occurrence of power interruption (power failure).

  In step S6, the main CPU 110a performs initial setting of devices around the CPU. Specifically, the output setting to the effect control board 130, the setting of the CTC (Counter Timer Circuit) to be used, the interrupt timer (4 milliseconds) of the CTC to be used, etc. are set.

  In step S7, the main CPU 110a sends a power recovery designation command (identifiable) indicating that the game control state has been restored and the current game state (game state before the occurrence of a power failure) to the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. To the effect control board 130. As a result, a power restoration screen (image) indicating that the power has been restored is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71 by the effect control board 130, or a power restoration notification sound indicating that the power is restored from the audio output device 9. A process for outputting or performing an initial operation for restoring the movable effect member 73 to the origin (standby position) is performed. Note that without including information indicating the current gaming state in the power recovery designation command, a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state may be transmitted before or after transmitting the power restoration designation command.

  In step S <b> 8, the main CPU 110 a sets a first special symbol memory designation command corresponding to the first special symbol hold count (first hold count) in the effect transmission data storage area, and transmits it to the effect control board 130. Thereby, the first special symbol hold number is notified to the effect control board 130, and the first hold number corresponding to the first special symbol hold number U1 is displayed on the first image display device 70, or the first hold number is displayed. A process for updating the number in the display area SH1 or updating the display content of the first special symbol hold second display 83 is performed.

  In step S <b> 9, the main CPU 110 a sets a special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the second special symbol hold count (second hold count) in the effect transmission data storage area, and transmits it to the effect control board 130. Thereby, the second special symbol hold number is notified to the effect control board 130, and the number of second hold icons corresponding to the second special symbol hold number U2 is displayed on the first image display device 70, or the second hold number is displayed. A process for updating the number in the display area SH2 or updating the display content of the second special symbol hold second display 84 is performed.

  In step S <b> 10, the main CPU 110 a sets a normal symbol storage designation command corresponding to the number of normal symbols held in the effect transmission data storage area, and transmits it to the effect control board 130. Thereby, the number of normal symbol reservations is notified to the effect control board 130, and the process for updating the display content of the normal symbol reservation second display is performed.

  In step S11, the main CPU 110a sets a (clearable) RAM clear designation command indicating that the control state of the game is initialized in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and transmits it to the effect control board 130. To do. Thereby, an initialization screen (RAM clear preparation image and base image) indicating that the control state of the game is initialized (RAM clear is performed) is displayed on the first image display device 70 by the effect control board 130. Then, a process for outputting a RAM clear preparation sound indicating that the game control state is initialized (RAM clear is performed) from the sound output device 9 is performed.

  In step S12, the main CPU 110a stands by until the RAM clear switch 55 is turned on again (pressing operation). When the RAM clear switch 55 is turned on again (pressing operation), the process proceeds to step S13.

  In step S13, the main CPU 110a clears the use area of the main RAM 110c, and performs a setting process (initialization process) of the main RAM 110c that sets an initial value in a work area of the main RAM 110c that requires an initial value at the time of initialization. As a result, the control state of the game is initialized to the shipping (default) state.

  In step S14, the main CPU 110a performs initial setting of devices around the CPU. Specifically, the output setting to the effect control board 130, the setting of the CTC (Counter Timer Circuit) to be used, the interrupt timer (4 milliseconds) of the CTC to be used, etc. are set.

  In step S15, the main CPU 110a sets an (identifiable) power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized (RAM cleared) in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and effects control. Transmit to the substrate 130. Thus, the effect control board 130 displays a power-on screen (image) indicating that the image display devices 70 and 71 are powered on, and a RAM indicating that the main RAM 110c is initialized from the audio output device 9. Processing for outputting a clear notification sound or performing an initial operation for restoring the movable effect member 73 to the origin (standby position) is performed.

  In step S16, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and transmits it to the effect control board 130. Thereby, an effect screen (background image, effect symbol image) or the like corresponding to the current game state is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71 by the effect control board 130, or the current game state is responded from the audio output device 9. Processing for outputting BGM is performed.

  In this case, a gaming state designation command corresponding to the low probability gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state, which is the initial gaming state, is transmitted, but other gaming states can be obtained by setting the initial gaming state to another gaming state. A designated command may be transmitted. Further, like the power restoration designation command, the game control state command is transmitted so that the control state of the game is initialized (RAM clear) and the power-on designation command (identifiable) indicating the current gaming state is transmitted. May not be transmitted.

  In step S20, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the reach determination random number value and the jackpot symbol determination random number value for determining the variation mode (variation time) of the special symbol.

  In step S30, the main CPU 110a updates the jackpot determining initial value random number, the jackpot symbol determining initial value random number, the hit determining initial value random number, and the winning symbol determining initial value random number.

  In step S40, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a power failure has occurred. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a power-off detection signal is input from the power-off detection circuit of the power supply board 180. If the power-off detection signal is not input (S40: No), the process proceeds to step S20. If the power-off detection signal is input (S40: Yes), the process proceeds to step S41.

  In step S41, the main CPU 110a sets an interrupt prohibition for prohibiting the timer interrupt, performs a process of clearing the output port in step S42, calculates a checksum of the main RAM 110c in step S43, and stores it in a predetermined storage area. In step S44, a process for turning on the backup flag to be referred to when recovering from the power interruption is performed. In step S45, a process for prohibiting the RAM access is performed, and the process waits until the power supply voltage is completely cut off. .

(Timer interrupt processing of main control board)
The timer interrupt process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in the main control board 110. A clock pulse is generated every predetermined period (4 milliseconds) by the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 110, thereby executing a timer interrupt process described below.

  First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register of the main CPU 110a to the stack area.

  In step S110, the main CPU 110a updates the special symbol time counter, updates the special game timer counter such as the opening time of the special electric accessory, updates the normal symbol time counter, and updates the opening / closing time of the movable member 48. Time control processing for updating various timer counters such as processing is performed. Specifically, a process of subtracting 1 from the special symbol time counter, the special game timer counter, the normal symbol time counter, the start / open timer counter, and the start / close timer counter is performed.

  In step S120, the main CPU 110a determines the jackpot determination random number value, the jackpot symbol determination random number value, the special figure variation pattern determination random value, the hit determination random number value, the hit symbol random number value, the common symbol variation pattern determination random number value. A specific random number update process such as is performed.

  Specifically, each random number value and random number counter are updated by adding +1. When the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter has made one round), the random number counter is returned to 0 and the corresponding initial value random number value is set as a new cyclic initial value. To update the random number.

  In step S130, the main CPU 110a updates the jackpot determination initial value random number value, the jackpot symbol determination initial value random value, the hit symbol determination initial value random value, and the hit symbol determination initial value random number value in the same manner as in step S30. Perform initial random number update processing.

  In step S200, the main CPU 110a performs input control processing. In this process, the main CPU 110a performs a variety of general winning opening detection switch 43a, large winning opening detection switch 50a, first starting opening detection switch 45a, second starting opening detection switch 47a, gate detection switch 44a, and winning confirmation detection switch 52a. It is determined whether or not there is an input to the switch. If there is an input, an input control process for setting predetermined data is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S300, the main CPU 110a performs a special figure special electric control process for performing a jackpot lottery, a special symbol display control, an opening / closing control of the special winning opening 50 (opening / closing member 51), a game state control, and the like. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S <b> 400, the main CPU 110 a performs a general power control process for performing winning lottery, normal symbol display control, opening / closing control of the second start port 47 (movable member 48), and the like. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S500, the main CPU 110a performs a payout control process. In this payout control process, the main CPU 110a refers to each prize ball counter, generates payout number designation commands corresponding to various winning ports, and transmits the generated payout number designation commands to the payout control board 120.

  In step S600, the main CPU 110a performs a magnetic / radio wave abnormality determination process. In this magnetic / radio wave abnormality determination process, the main CPU 110a detects the occurrence of a magnetic error or radio wave error based on the input signals from the magnetic detection switch 53a and the radio wave detection switch 54a. A designation command and a radio wave abnormality error designation command are transmitted to the effect control board 130. When the production control board 130 receives a magnetic abnormality error designation command or a radio wave abnormality error designation command, it performs a radio wave error notification or a magnetic error notification to notify that an abnormality has occurred.

  In step S700, the main CPU 110a outputs the external information data (game information) output from the game information output terminal board 90, the drive control data output to the second start opening / closing solenoid 48b, the special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, the special symbol first. Indicators 60 and 61, Normal symbol first indicator 62, Special symbol hold first indicator 63 and 64, Normal symbol hold first indicator 65, Round number indicator 66, Right-handed first indicator 67, High probability Data creation processing such as various display control data to be output to the game state display 68 and the short time game state display 69 is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S800, the main CPU 110a performs output control processing. In this processing, port output processing for outputting signals such as external information data and drive control data created in S700 is performed. Further, display output processing for outputting a signal such as display control data created in S700 is performed. Further, command output processing for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c to another board is also performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.
Note that the types of commands transmitted to the effect control board 130 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a.

(Input control processing of main control board)
The input control process of the main control board 110 will be described using FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing input control processing in the main control board 110.

  In step S210, the main CPU 110a performs a general winning opening detection switch input process. In this general winning opening detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection switch 43a. If there is no input of a detection signal from the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the process proceeds to the next step as it is.

  When a detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection switch 43a, a predetermined data is added to the winning ball counter for the general winning opening and updated, and a winning counter indicating the number of game balls that have entered the winning opening. After updating by adding “1” to (D) (D ← D + 1), the process proceeds to the next step.

  In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening detection switch input process. In this special winning opening detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the special winning opening detection switch 50a. If no detection signal is input from the big prize opening detection switch 50a, the process proceeds to the next step.

  When a detection signal from the big prize opening detection switch 50a is inputted, a predetermined data is added to the prize ball counter for the big prize opening and updated, and the number of game balls entered into the prize opening is indicated. The counter (D) is updated by adding “1” (D ← D + 1), and 1 is added to the number of entries in the big winning opening (C) for counting the number of game balls won in the big winning opening 50 After updating (C ← C + 1), the process proceeds to the next step.

  In step S230, the main CPU 110a performs a first start port detection switch input process. In this first start port detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the first start port 45, and a predetermined value is determined. Set the data. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S240, the main CPU 110a performs a second start port detection switch input process. In this second start port detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the second start port detection switch 47a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the second start port 47, Set the data. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S250, the main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing. In this gate detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed the normal gate 44, and predetermined data is set. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S260, the main CPU 110a performs a winning confirmation detection switch input process. In this winning confirmation detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the winning confirmation detection switch 52a is input, and 1 is subtracted from the winning counter (D) and updated (D ← D-1). It is determined whether or not the value of the pitch counter (D) is within a predetermined determination value range (lower limit value <D <upper limit value), and if it is out of the determination value range, an abnormal winning occurs. As a result, an abnormal winning error designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area. If it is within the determination value range, the winning confirmation detection switch input process is terminated.

  As a result, an abnormal winning error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the abnormal winning error designation command performs an abnormal winning error notification to indicate that an abnormal winning error has occurred. Inform.

(Input processing for the first start port detection switch on the main control board)
The first start port detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a first start port detection switch input process in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a has been input. When the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a is input (S230-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S230-2, and the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a is not input. In the case (S230-1: No), the current first start port detection switch input process is terminated.

  In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding predetermined data to the start opening prize ball counter used for the prize ball and updating it.

  In step S230-3, the main CPU 110a adds “1” to the pitch counter (D) indicating the number of game balls that have entered the winning opening and updates (D ← D + 1).

  In step S230-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the data set in the first special symbol hold count (U1) storage area is less than 4. If the data set in the first special symbol hold count (U1) storage area is less than 4, the process proceeds to step S230-5, and is set in the first special symbol hold count (U1) storage area. If the data is not less than 4, the current first start port detection switch input process is terminated.

  In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding “1” to the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area and updating (U1 ← U1 + 1).

  In step S230-6, the main CPU 110a obtains a jackpot determination random number value, searches for a free storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the first special symbol storage area, and stores the free storage. The random number for jackpot determination acquired in the section is stored.

  In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a acquires a jackpot symbol determination random number value, and searches for a vacant storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the first special symbol hold storage area. The acquired jackpot symbol determination random value is stored in the storage unit.

  In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a acquires a random number value for reach determination and a random number value for special pattern fluctuation pattern determination, and stores storage units that are vacant in order from the first storage unit in the first special symbol storage area. The search is performed, and the reach determination random number value and the special figure variation pattern determination random value are stored in an empty storage unit.

  Thus, the jackpot determination random number value, the jackpot symbol determination random value, the reach determination random number value, and the special symbol variation pattern determination random number value are stored in the predetermined storage unit of the first special symbol holding storage area. become.

  In step S230-9, the main CPU 110a performs a first preliminary determination process. In the first pre-determination process, with reference to the jackpot lottery pre-determination table shown in FIG. 14, the jackpot determination random number value, the jackpot symbol determination random number value, the reach determination random number value, and the special figure variation pattern determination acquired this time Based on the random number value, first start winning information for indicating the determination information of the first start port in advance is determined.

  In step S230-10, the main CPU 110a sets a first start opening prize designation command based on the first start prize information determined in the first preliminary determination process in step S230-9 in the effect transmission data storage area. .

  Thereby, the first start winning information can be transmitted to the effect control board 130 as the first start opening prize designation command, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the first start opening prize designation command receives the first start prize. Analyzing the mouth winning designation command, and starting a special symbol corresponding to the first start mouth winning designation command from the start of the variable display, a predetermined notice effect over one or more variable displays executed before that Pre-reading effects such as a continuous notice for executing and a hold change notice for changing the display mode of the hold icon can be executed.

  In step S230-11, the main CPU 110a refers to the value stored in the first special symbol hold count (U1) and corresponds to the first special symbol hold count (U1) updated in step S230-4. A first special symbol memory designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area.

  In step S230-12, the main CPU 110a displays first special symbol hold display data for displaying the first hold number on the first special symbol hold first display 63 (LED lighting or blinking) in a predetermined processing area. The first start port detection switch input process is completed. Thus, when the first special symbol hold display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S700, and the created data is output in step S800. The first hold number is displayed on the symbol hold first display 63.

(Second control port detection switch input process on the main control board)
The second start port detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the second start port detection switch input process in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S240-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal from the second start port detection switch 47a has been input. When the detection signal from the second start port detection switch 47a is input (S240-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S240-2, and the detection signal from the second start port detection switch 47a is not input. In the case (S240-1: No), the current second start port detection switch input process is terminated.

  In step S240-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding predetermined data to the starting opening prize ball counter used for a prize ball and updating it.

  In step S240-3, the main CPU 110a adds “1” to the pitch counter (D) indicating the number of game balls that have entered the winning opening and updates (D ← D + 1).

  In step S240-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not an auxiliary game (winning state) is in progress. If the auxiliary game (winning state) is in progress (S240-4: Yes), the process proceeds to step S240-9. If the auxiliary game (winning state) is not in progress (S240-5: No), step S240- The processing is moved to 5.

  In step S240-5, the main CPU 110a adds “1” to the unauthorized entry counter (E) for monitoring unauthorized entry to the second start port 47 and updates (E ← E + 1).

  In step S240-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the value of the illegal entry counter is greater than the specified number (10). If it is larger than the specified number (S240-6: Yes), the process proceeds to step S240-7, and if it is smaller than the specified number (S240-6: No), the process proceeds to step S240-10.

  In step S240-7, the main CPU 110a sets an illegal entry error designation command in the effect transmission data storage area, assuming that an illegal entry has occurred.

  As a result, an illegal entry error designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and the sub CPU 130a of the production control board 130 that has received the unauthorized entry error designation command performs an illegal entry error notification and performs an illegal entry error. Informs that this has occurred.

  In step S240-8, the main CPU 110a clears the value of the illegal pitching counter (E) to zero.

  In step S240-9, the main CPU 110a adds “1” to the second start-entrance ball counter (L) and updates (L ← L + 1).

  In step S240-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the data set in the second special symbol hold count (U2) storage area is less than 4. If the data set in the second special symbol hold count (U2) storage area is less than 4 (S240-10: Yes), the process proceeds to step S240-11, and the second special symbol hold count ( U2) If the data set in the storage area is not less than 4 (S240-10: No), the current second start port detection switch input process is terminated.

  In step S240-11, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding “1” to the second special symbol hold count (U2) storage area and updating (U2 ← U2 + 1).

  In step S240-12, the main CPU 110a acquires a jackpot determination random number value, searches for an empty storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the second special symbol holding storage area, and stores an empty storage. The random number for jackpot determination acquired in the section is stored.

  In step S240-13, the main CPU 110a acquires a jackpot symbol determination random number value, and searches for a vacant storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the second special symbol hold storage area. The acquired jackpot symbol determination random value is stored in the storage unit.

  In step S240-14, the main CPU 110a acquires a random number value for reach determination and a random number value for special pattern fluctuation pattern determination, and stores storage units that are vacant in order from the first storage unit in the second special symbol storage area. The search is performed, and the reach determination random number value and the special figure variation pattern determination random value are stored in an empty storage unit.

  Thus, the jackpot determination random number value, the jackpot symbol determination random number value, the reach determination random number value, and the special symbol variation pattern determination random number value are stored in the predetermined storage unit of the second special symbol holding storage area. become.

  In step S240-15, the main CPU 110a performs a second preliminary determination process. In the second pre-determination process, with reference to the jackpot lottery pre-determination table shown in FIG. 15, the jackpot determination random number value, the jackpot symbol determination random number value, the reach determination random number value, and the special figure variation pattern determination acquired this time Based on the random number value, second start winning information for indicating in advance the determination information of the second start port is determined.

  In step S240-16, the main CPU 110a sets a second start opening prize designation command based on the second start prize information determined in the second preliminary determination process in step S240-14 in the effect transmission data storage area. .

  Thus, the second start winning information can be transmitted to the effect control board 130 as the second start opening prize specifying command, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the second start opening prize specifying command receives the second start winning prize command. Analyzing the mouth winning designation command, and executing a predetermined notice effect over one or a plurality of fluctuation displays before the start of the special symbol variation display corresponding to the second start mouth winning designation command. It is possible to execute a pre-reading effect such as a continuous notice or a hold change notice that changes the display mode of the hold icon.

  In step S240-17, the main CPU 110a refers to the value stored in the second special symbol hold count (U2), and corresponds to the second special symbol hold count (U2) updated in step S240-9. A second special symbol memory designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area.

  In step S240-18, the main CPU 110a displays second special symbol hold display data for displaying the second hold number on the second special symbol hold first display 64 (LED lighting or blinking) in a predetermined processing area. After setting, the second start port detection switch input process is terminated. As a result, when the second special symbol hold display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S700, and the created data is output in step S800. The second hold number is displayed on the symbol hold first display 64.

(Gate detection switch input processing on the main control board)
The gate detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a gate detection switch input process in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S250-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a has been input. When the detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a is input (S250-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S250-2, and when the detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a is not input (S250-1: No) terminates the current gate detection switch input process.

  In step S250-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the data set in the normal symbol holding number (G) storage area is less than four. When the data set in the normal symbol hold count (G) storage area is less than 4 (S250-2: Yes), the process proceeds to step S250-3, and the normal symbol hold count (G) storage area If the data set in is not less than 4 (S250-2: No), the current gate detection switch input process is terminated.

  In step S250-3, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating by adding “1” to the normal symbol holding number (G) (G ← G + 1).

  In step S250-4, the main CPU 110a obtains a random number for winning determination, searches for a free storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the normal symbol holding storage area, and stores it in the free storage unit. The acquired random number for hit determination is stored.

  In step S250-5, the main CPU 110a acquires a random symbol value for winning symbol determination, and searches for a vacant storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the normal symbol hold storage area. The random number value for determining the winning symbol is stored.

  In step S250-6, the main CPU 110a acquires a random number value for determining a normal pattern variation pattern, searches for a free storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the normal symbol holding storage area, and is free. The random number value for determining the normal variation pattern obtained is stored in the storage unit.

  As described above, the random number value for winning determination, the random number value for winning symbol, and the random number value for determining normal pattern variation pattern are stored in the predetermined storage unit of the normal symbol holding storage area.

  In step S250-7, the main CPU 110a refers to the value stored in the normal symbol hold count (G) storage area, and designates the normal symbol storage designation corresponding to the normal symbol hold count (G) updated in step S250-3. Set the command in the transmission data storage area for presentation.

  In step S250-8, the main CPU 110a sets normal symbol hold display data for displaying the number of normal symbols on hold on the normal symbol hold first display 62 (LED lighting or blinking) in a predetermined processing area, The current gate detection switch input process is terminated. As a result, when the normal symbol hold display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S700, and the created data is output in step S800. The number of pending drawings is displayed on the display 62.

(Special figure special electric control processing of main control board)
With reference to FIG. 24, the special figure special power control process of the main control board 110 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a special figure special electric control process in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S301, the CPU 110a loads the special figure special electricity processing data value, refers to the branch destination address from the special figure special electric treatment data loaded in step S302, and if the special figure special electric treatment data = 0, the special symbol. The process moves to the memory determination process (step S310). If the special symbol special power process data = 1, the process moves to the special symbol variation process (step S320). The process moves to step S330), and if special figure special power processing data = 3, the process moves to jackpot game processing (step S340), and if special figure special power processing data = 4, the big bonus game end process (step S350) is processed. Move.

  This “special drawing special electricity processing data” is set as necessary in each subroutine of the special figure special electricity control processing as will be described later, so that the subroutine necessary for the game is appropriately processed. .

  In the special symbol memory determination process in step S310, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot determination process, a special symbol determination process for determining a special symbol to be stopped, a special symbol variation pattern determination process for determining a variation time of the special symbol, and the like. . This special symbol memory determination process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  In the special symbol variation process of step S320, the main CPU 110a performs a process of determining whether or not the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed. When the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the special symbol stop of step S330. Process to be transferred to the process. This special symbol variation process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  In the special symbol stop process in step S330, the main CPU 110a performs a process corresponding to the special symbol (hit symbol, lost game) that is stopped and displayed, and the number of time-short games (J), the time-short game flag, and the number of high-probability games. (X) A high probability game flag setting process is performed. This special symbol stop process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  In the jackpot game process of step S340, the main CPU 110a performs a process of controlling the jackpot game. The jackpot game process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  In the jackpot game ending process in step S350, the main CPU 110a determines the probability game state of either the high probability game state or the low probability game state, and changes the game state of either the short-time game state or the non-time-short game state. Perform the decision process. The jackpot game end process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

(Special symbol memory judgment processing of the main control board)
The special symbol memory determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing special symbol memory determination processing in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a special symbol is being variably displayed. If the special symbol variation display is in progress (special symbol time counter ≠ 0), the special symbol storage determination process is terminated, and the special symbol variation display is not in progress (special symbol time counter = 0). In (S310-1: No), the process proceeds to step S310-2.

  In step S310-2, if the special symbol is not changing (S310-1: No), the main CPU 110a stores the value of the second special symbol hold number (U2) storage area storing the second hold number. Is determined to be 1 or more. When it is determined that the value of the second special symbol hold count (U2) storage area is 1 or more (S310-2: Yes), the process proceeds to step S310-3, and the second special symbol hold count (U2) If the value of the storage area is not 1 or more (S310-2: No), the process proceeds to step S310-4.

  In step S310-3, the main CPU 110a subtracts “1” from the value stored in the second special symbol hold count (U2) storage area and updates (U2 ← U2-1).

  In step S310-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the value of the first special symbol hold number (U1) storage area storing the first hold number is 1 or more. When it is determined that the first special symbol hold count (U1) storage area is 1 or more (S310-4: Yes), the process proceeds to step S310-5, and the first special symbol hold count (U1) storage area If the value is not 1 or more (S310-4: No), the process proceeds to step S319-1.

  In step S310-5, the main CPU 110a updates (U1 ← U1-1) by subtracting “1” from the value stored in the first special symbol hold count (U1) storage area.

  In step S310-6, the main CPU 110a performs a shift process on the data stored in the special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the special symbol reserved number storage area subtracted in steps S310-2 to S310-5. Specifically, each data stored in the fourth storage unit from the first storage unit in the first special symbol random number storage area or the second special symbol storage area is shifted to the previous storage unit. Here, the data stored in the first storage unit is shifted to the determination storage area (the 0th storage unit). At this time, the data stored in the first storage unit is written in the determination storage area (0th storage unit), and the data already written in the determination storage area (0th storage unit) is stored in the special symbol hold storage. It will be erased from the area. As a result, the jackpot determination random number value, the jackpot symbol determination random value, the reach determination random value, and the special figure variation pattern determination random value used in the previous game are deleted.

  In this embodiment, in steps S310-2 to S310-6, the second special symbol reserved storage area is shifted (digested) with priority over the first special symbol reserved storage area. In this order, the first special symbol reserved storage area or the second special symbol reserved storage area may be shifted, or the first special symbol reserved storage area may be shifted with priority over the second special symbol reserved storage area. May be.

  In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a confirms the current gaming state (at the start of variation), and sets a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the effect transmission data storage area. Thereby, a game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  In step S310-8, the main CPU 110a writes the data (the jackpot determination random number value, the jackpot symbol determination random number value) written in the determination storage area (the 0th storage unit) of the special symbol reservation storage area in the above step S310-6. The jackpot determination process is executed based on the above. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S310-9, the main CPU 110a sets an effect symbol designation command corresponding to the special symbol stop symbol data determined in step S310-8 in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the effect designating command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  In step S311, the main CPU 110a performs special figure variation pattern determination processing. The variation pattern determination process refers to the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 or FIG. Based on the random number value for use, the special figure fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation mode of the special symbol is determined.

  In step S312, the main CPU 110a sets a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern determined in step S311 in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, a special figure variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  In step S313, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol variation time (counter value) corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern determined in step S312 in the special symbol time counter. The special symbol time counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in S110.

  In step S314, the main CPU 110a stores the special symbol variation display data for causing the first special symbol first display 60 or the second special symbol first display 61 to perform special symbol variation display (LED blinking). It is set in a predetermined processing area of the RAM 110c. As a result, when special symbol variation display data is set in a predetermined processing area, LED lighting / extinguishing data is created in step S700, and the created data is output in step S800. Variation display of the first special symbol first display 60 or the second special symbol first display 61 is started.

  In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets “00H” to the customer waiting state determination flag. As a result, the customer waiting state, which is a state in which the special symbol variation display and the jackpot game are not being executed, is cancelled.

  In step S316, the main CPU 110a issues a special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the first special symbol hold count (U1) or the second special symbol hold count (U2) subtracted in step S310-3 or step S310-5. Set in the production transmission data storage area. Thereby, the special symbol memory designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  In step S317, the main CPU 110a displays the first special symbol hold display corresponding to the first special symbol hold number (U1) or the second special symbol hold number (U2) subtracted in step S310-3 or step S310-5. Data or second special symbol hold display data is set in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c. Thereby, the display control data is created in step S700, and the created data is output in step S800, so that the first special symbol hold first display 63 or the second special symbol hold first display 64 displays. The special symbol hold number (first hold number, second hold number) will be displayed.

  In step S318, the main CPU 110a sets “1” in the special symbol special electricity processing data, prepares for shifting to the special symbol variation processing shown in FIG. 28, and ends the special symbol memory determination processing of this time.

  In step S319-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the customer waiting state determination flag is “01H”. When the customer waiting state determination flag “01H” is not set in the customer waiting state determination flag storage area (S319-1: Yes), the main CPU 110a moves the process to step S319-2 to wait for the customer waiting state determination flag. When the customer waiting state determination flag “01H” is set in the storage area (S319-1: No), the current special symbol storage determination process is terminated.

  In step S319-2, the main CPU 110a sets "01H" indicating the customer waiting state in the customer waiting state determination flag. In step S319-3, the main CPU 110a issues a customer waiting state designation command indicating the start of the customer waiting state. The effect transmission data storage area is set, and the current special symbol memory determination process is terminated. Thereby, the customer waiting state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

(Main control board jackpot determination process)
The jackpot determination process for the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a jackpot determination process in the main control board 110.

  In step S311-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the jackpot determination process is performed based on the game ball entering the first start port 45. When it is determined that the main CPU 110a is the first start port (S311-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S311-2, and when the main CPU 110a determines that it is not the first start port (is the second start port). In (S311-1: No), the processing is moved to step S311-3.

  In step S311-2, the main CPU 110a selects a jackpot determination table for the first special symbol. On the other hand, in step S311-3, the main CPU 110a selects a jackpot determination table for the second special symbol.

  Next, in step S311-4, the main CPU 110a collates the jackpot determination random number value stored in the 0th storage unit of the current probability gaming state and special symbol in the storage area with the selected jackpot determination table. Then, it is determined whether it is “big hit” or “losing”.

  In step S311-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the jackpot is won. When the main CPU 110a determines that the jackpot is won (S311-5: Yes), the process proceeds to step S311-6, and when the main CPU 110a determines that the jackpot is not won (S311-5: No). Then, the process proceeds to step S311-7.

  In step S311-6, the main CPU 110a selects a special symbol determination table for winning a jackpot. On the other hand, in step S311-7, the main CPU 110a selects a special symbol determination table for loss.

  In step S311-8, the main CPU 110a determines the type of the start port for which the jackpot lottery (determination) has been performed, the jackpot symbol determination random number value stored in the 0th storage unit of the special symbol storage area, A special symbol type (special symbol stop symbol data) is determined by collating with the selected table.

  As will be described later, the determined special symbol is used to determine whether or not it is a big win in the special symbol stop process of FIG. 29, and determines the operation mode of the big prize opening in the big hit game process of FIG. It is also used to determine the gaming state after the jackpot end in the jackpot game end process of FIG.

  In step S311-9, the main CPU 110a sets the special figure stop symbol data determined in step S311-8 in the special figure stop symbol data storage area, and ends the current jackpot determination process.

(Special map variation pattern determination process for the main control board)
With reference to FIG. 27, the special figure variation pattern determination process of the main control board 110 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the special figure variation pattern determination process in the main control board 110.

  In step S312-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special figure variation pattern determination process is performed based on a game ball entering the first start port 45. When it is determined that the main CPU 110a is the first starting port (S312-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S312-2, and when it is determined that the main CPU 110a is not the first starting port (is the second starting port). In (S312-1: No), the processing is moved to step S312-3.

  In step S312-2, the main CPU 110a selects a variation pattern determination table for the first special symbol. On the other hand, in step S312-3, the main CPU 110a selects a variation pattern determination table for the second special symbol.

  Next, in step S312-4, the main CPU 110a determines the jackpot lottery determination result, the special symbol type (special symbol stop symbol data), and the reach determination stored in the 0th storage unit in the special symbol storage area. The special pattern variation pattern is determined by comparing the random number value for use and the random number value for special pattern variation pattern determination, the current number of reserved balls, and the selected variation pattern determination table.

  In step S312-5, the main CPU 110a sets the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined in step S312-4 in the special symbol time counter, and ends the current special symbol variation pattern determination process. The special symbol time counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in S110.

(Special design variation processing of main control board)
The special symbol variation process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing in the main control board 110.

  In step S320-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the variation time set in step S312-5 has passed (special symbol time counter = 0). As a result, when it is determined that the variation time has not elapsed, the special symbol variation process is terminated.

  In step S320-2, if the main CPU 110a determines that the set fluctuation time has elapsed, the first special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) determined in step S311-8 is set to the first. The special symbol first display 60 or the second special symbol first indicator 61 is stopped and displayed. Specifically, the special symbol stop display data is set in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c. Thereby, the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol first display 60 or the second special symbol first indicator 61, and the determination result of the big hit lottery is given to the player. You will be notified.

  In step S320-3, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol confirmation command indicating that the special symbol has been stopped and a jackpot determination result in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the special symbol confirmation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  In step S320-4, when the main CPU 110a performs the process for stopping and displaying the special symbol as described above, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol stop time (0.5 seconds = 125 counter) in the special symbol time counter. . The special symbol time counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in S110.

  In step S320-5, the main CPU 110a sets “2” in the special symbol special electric processing data, prepares for shifting to the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 29, and ends the special symbol variation processing of this time.

(Special design stop processing for main control board)
The special symbol stop process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process in the main control board 110.

  In step S330-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol stop time set in step S320-4 has elapsed (special symbol time counter = 0). As a result, if it is determined that the stop time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S330-2. If it is determined that the stop time has not elapsed, the special symbol stop process of this time is terminated.

  In step S330-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the time saving game flag is set (ON) in the time saving game flag storage area. When the short-time game flag is set (S330-2: Yes), the main CPU 110a moves the process to step S330-3, and when the short-time game flag is not set (S330-2: No). Then, the process proceeds to step S330-8.

  In step S330-3, the main CPU 110a subtracts and updates (J ← J-1) by subtracting "1" from the time-saving game count (J) stored in the time-saving game count (J) storage area, and step S330- 4, it is determined whether or not the new number of short-time games (J) is “0”. If the main CPU 110a determines that the number of short-time games (J) is “0” (S330-4: Yes), the process moves to step S330-5, and the number of short-time games (J) is not “0”. Is determined (S330-4: No), the process proceeds to step S330-8.

  In step S330-5, the main CPU 110a clears (turns off) the time-short game flag set in the time-short game flag storage area. As a result, the short-time gaming state ends and the non-short-time gaming state shifts.

  In step S330-6, the main CPU 110a sets short-time gaming state erasure data for erasing the display (LED lighting) on the short-time gaming state indicator 69 (LED off) in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c. Thereby, when the short-time gaming state erasure data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S700, and the created data is output in step S800, so that the short-time gaming state indicator is displayed. The display of 69 is erased.

  In step S330-7, the main CPU 110a sets right-handed erase data for erasing (LED off) the display on the right-handed first display 67 (LED on) in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, when right-handed erasure data is set in a predetermined processing area, display control data is created in step S700, and the created data is output in step S800. The display of 67 is deleted.

  In step S330-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the high probability game flag is set in the high probability game flag storage area. When the high probability game flag is set in the high probability game flag storage area (S330-8: Yes), the main CPU 110a moves the process to step S330-9, and stores the high probability game in the high probability game flag storage area. If the flag is not set (S330-8: No), the process proceeds to step S330-13.

  In step S330-9, the main CPU 110a subtracts and updates (X ← X-1) by subtracting “1” from the high probability game count (X) stored in the high probability game count (X) storage area. In S330-10, it is determined whether or not the new high probability game count (X) is “0”. When the main CPU 110a determines that the high probability game count (X) is “0” (S330-10: Yes), the process proceeds to step S330-11, and the high probability game count (X) is “0”. If not (S330-10: No), the process proceeds to step S330-13.

  In step S330-11, the main CPU 110a clears (OFF) the high probability game flag set in the high probability game flag storage area. As a result, the high-probability gaming state ends, and a transition to the low-probability gaming state occurs.

  In step S330-12, the main CPU 110a sets high-probability gaming state erasure data for erasing (LED off) the display (LED lighting) of the high-probability gaming state indicator 68 in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c. . As a result, when high probability gaming state erasure data is set in a predetermined processing area, display control data is created in step S700, and the created data is output in step S800. The display on the display 68 will be erased.

  In step S330-13, the main CPU 110a confirms the current gaming state and sets a gaming state designation command in the effect transmission data storage area. Thereby, the gaming state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  In step S330-14, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol that has been stopped is a special bonus symbol. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special figure stop symbol data stored in the special figure stop symbol data storage area is a jackpot special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data = 10 to 16, 20 to 23). . If the main CPU 110a determines that it is a special jackpot symbol (S330-14: Yes), it moves the process to step S330-15, and if it is determined that it is not a special jackpot symbol (S330-14: No). Moves the process to step S330-26.

  In step S330-15, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the time-saving game flag is set (ON) in the time-saving game flag storage area. When the short-time game flag is set (S330-15: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S330-16, and when the short-time game flag is not set (S330-15: No). Then, the process proceeds to step S330-17.

  In step S330-16, the main CPU 110a sets the above-mentioned short-time gaming state erasure data in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c. Thereby, when the short-time gaming state erasure data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S700, and the created data is output in step S800, so that the short-time gaming state indicator is displayed. The display of 69 is erased.

  In step S330-17, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the high probability game flag is set in the high probability game flag storage area. When the high probability game flag is set in the high probability game flag storage area (S330-17: Yes), the main CPU 110a moves the process to step S330-18, and stores the high probability game in the high probability game flag storage area. If the flag is not set (S330-17: No), the process proceeds to step S330-19.

  In step S330-18, the main CPU 110a sets the above-described high-probability gaming state erasure data in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, when high probability gaming state erasure data is set in a predetermined processing area, display control data is created in step S700, and the created data is output in step S800. The display on the display 68 is erased.

  In step S330-19, the main CPU 110a sets 3 in the special figure special electricity processing data, and prepares for shifting to the jackpot game processing shown in FIG.

  In step S330-20, the main CPU 110a resets the gaming state and the number of time reductions. Specifically, the data stored in the high probability game flag storage area, the high probability game count (X) storage area, the time-short game flag storage area, and the time-short game count (J) storage area is cleared.

  In step S330-21, the main CPU 110a sets a special prize opening / closing control table. Specifically, with reference to the jackpot game control table shown in FIG. 8, the big winning opening opening / closing control table (TBL.No) corresponding to the special figure stop symbol data is set (set).

  In step S330-22, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time in the special game timer counter based on the jackpot game control table and the special symbol stop symbol data. The special game timer counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S330-23, the main CPU 110a determines the type of special game (the first jackpot game to the tenth jackpot game) based on the jackpot opening / closing control table set in step S330-17, and the jackpot game An opening designation command corresponding to the type of (special game state) is set in the transmission data storage area for effects. As a result, a special game opening designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  In step S330-24, the main CPU 110a sets round number display data for displaying the number of rounds of the jackpot game on the round number display 66 (LED lighting) in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, when the round number display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is generated in step S700, and the generated data is output in step S800, whereby the round number display 66 is displayed. The number of rounds will be displayed.

  In step S330-25, the main CPU 110a sets right-handed display data for right-handed display (LED lighting) on the right-handed first display 67 in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c, and this special symbol. Terminate the stop process. Thus, when right-handed display data is set in a predetermined processing area, display control data is created in step S700, and the created data is output in step S800, whereby the right-handed first display device is displayed. A right-handed display is performed at 67.

  On the other hand, in step S330-26, the main CPU 110a sets “0” in the special symbol special processing data, prepares to move the processing to the special symbol storage determination processing shown in FIG. 25, and ends the special symbol stop processing this time. To do.

(Big hit game processing of main control board)
The jackpot game process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a jackpot game process in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S340-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is currently opening. Specifically, it is determined whether or not “0” is stored in the round game number (R) storage area. If it is determined that it is currently opening (S340-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-2. If it is determined that it is not currently opening (S340-1: No), step S340-6 is performed. Move processing to.

  In step S340-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening time set in step S330-14 has elapsed. If it is determined that the opening time has elapsed (S340-2: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-3, and if it is determined that the opening time has not elapsed, the current jackpot game process is terminated. .

  In step S340-3, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot game start process. Specifically, “1” is added to the round game number (R) stored in the round game number (R) storage area to update (R ← R + 1). Here, since no round game has been performed yet, “1” is stored in the round game count (R) storage area.

  In step S340-4, the main CPU 110a performs a special prize opening process. Specifically, first, “1” is added to the number of times of opening (K) stored in the number of times of opening (K) storage area to update (K ← K + 1). Here, since the special winning opening 50 has not been opened yet, “1” is stored in the number-of-openings (K) storage area. Further, in order to open the opening / closing member 51 of the special winning opening 50, the big winning opening / closing solenoid energization start data for energizing the special winning opening / closing solenoid 51b is set. Thereby, the opening / closing member 51 is converted from the closed state to the opened state, and the special winning opening 50 is opened. In addition, with reference to the big winning opening opening determination table set in step S330-21, the opening time of the special winning opening 50 is specially determined based on the current number of round games (R) and the number of opening (K). Set to the game timer counter.

  In step S340-5, the main CPU 110a sets a round designation command corresponding to the round game number (R) stored in the round game number (R) storage area in the effect transmission data storage area. Thus, the round designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Here, since it is the first round of the jackpot game, the opening first round designation command is set. When this process ends, the current jackpot game process ends.

  In step S340-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special winning opening 50 is currently open. Specifically, it is determined whether or not energization data for energizing the special prize opening / closing solenoid 51b is set. If it is determined that the special winning opening 50 is open (S340-6: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-7, and if it is determined that the special winning opening 50 is not open (S340-6: No). ) Moves the process to step S340-9.

  In step S340-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the condition for ending the opening of the special winning opening is satisfied. Specifically, the value of the winning prize entrance pitch counter (C) has reached the specified number (9) or the opening time has elapsed in the current number of opening (K) (special game timer counter = 0) Is applicable. When it is determined that the opening end condition is satisfied (S340-7: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-8, and when it is determined that the opening end condition is not satisfied (S340-7: No). This jackpot game processing is terminated.

  In step S340-8, the main CPU 110a performs an interval (big prize closing closing) process. Specifically, the special winning opening / closing solenoid energization stop data for converting the open / close member 51 of the special winning opening 50 into the closed state is set. Thereby, the opening / closing member 51 is converted from the open state to the closed state, and the special winning opening 50 is closed. Also, referring to the big winning opening opening determination table set in step S330-21, the closing time of the big winning opening 50 is specially determined based on the current number of round games (R) and the number of open times (K). Set to the game timer counter. Also, an interval designation command indicating that it is between rounds is set in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the interval designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130. When this process ends, the current jackpot game process ends.

  In step S340-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is currently in the interval (large winning opening closed). Specifically, it is determined whether or not energization data for energizing the special prize opening / closing solenoid 51b is set. When it is determined that it is during the interval (closed to the big prize opening) (S340-9: Yes), the process is moved to step S340-10, and when it is determined that the interval is not being closed (closed to the big prize opening) (S340-9). : No), the process proceeds to step S340-19.

  In step S340-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the closing time of the special winning opening 50 has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special game timer counter is not “0”. If it is determined that the closing time has ended (S340-10: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-11. If it is determined that the closing time has not ended (S340-10: No), this time The jackpot game process is terminated.

  In step S340-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current round has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning prize entry counter (C) has reached a specified number (9) or the number of times of opening (K) has reached the maximum number of times of opening. If it is determined that the current round has ended (S340-11: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-13, and if it is determined that the current round has not ended (S340-12: No), Then, the process proceeds to step S340-12.

  In step S340-12, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening opening process. Specifically, “1” is added to the number of times of opening (K) stored in the number of times of opening (K) storage area to update (K ← K + 1). Further, in order to open the opening / closing member 51 of the special winning opening 50, the big winning opening / closing solenoid energization start data for energizing the special winning opening / closing solenoid 51b is set. Thereby, the opening / closing member 51 is converted from the closed state to the opened state, and the special winning opening 50 is opened. In addition, with reference to the big winning opening opening determination table set in step S330-21, the opening time of the special winning opening 50 is specially determined based on the current number of round games (R) and the number of opening (K). Set to the game timer counter. When this process ends, the current jackpot game process ends.

  In step S340-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the final round has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the round game number (R) stored in the round game number (R) storage area has reached the maximum round game number of the current jackpot game. If it is determined that the final round is completed (S340-13: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-17. If it is determined that the final round is not completed (S340-13: No), step S340 is performed. The process is moved to -14.

  In step S340-14, the main CPU 110a performs a round data setting process. Specifically, “0” is set in the number-of-releases (K) storage area and the number of balls received in the big prize opening (C) storage area, and the number of round games (R) stored in the round game number (R) storage area. Is updated by adding “1” (R ← R + 1).

  In step S340-15, the main CPU 110a performs a big prize opening process. Specifically, first, “1” is added to the number of times of opening (K) stored in the number of times of opening (K) storage area to update (K ← K + 1). Further, in order to open the opening / closing member 51 of the special winning opening 50, the big winning opening / closing solenoid energization start data for energizing the special winning opening / closing solenoid 51b is set. Thereby, the opening / closing member 51 is converted from the closed state to the opened state, and the special winning opening 50 is opened. In addition, with reference to the big winning opening opening determination table set in step S330-21, the opening time of the special winning opening 50 is specially determined based on the current number of round games (R) and the number of opening (K). Set to the game timer counter.

  In step S340-16, the main CPU 110a sets a round designation command corresponding to the round game number (R) stored in the round game number (R) storage area in the effect transmission data storage area. Accordingly, the round designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130. When this process ends, the current jackpot game process ends.

  In step S340-17, the main CPU 110a performs an ending transition process. Specifically, “0” is set in the number of times released (K) storage area, the number of balls received in the big prize opening (C) and the number of round games (R), and the values in the respective storage areas are cleared. Also, based on the jackpot game control table and the special figure stop symbol data, the ending time is set in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S340-18, the main CPU 110a sets an ending designation command corresponding to the special figure stop symbol data in the effect transmission data storage area. Thus, the ending designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130. When this process ends, the current jackpot game process ends.

  In step S340-19, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is currently ending. If it is ending (S340-19: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-20, and if it is not ending (S340-19: No), the current jackpot game process is terminated.

  In step S340-20, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ending time has elapsed. If it is determined that the ending time has elapsed (S340-20: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-21. If it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (S340-20: No), this time The jackpot game process is terminated.

  In step S340-21, the main CPU 110a sets 4 in the special figure special electricity processing data, prepares to move to the big hit game end process shown in FIG. 31, and ends the current big hit game process.

(Main control board jackpot game end processing)
The jackpot game ending process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the jackpot game end process in the main control board 110.

  In step S350-1, the main CPU 110a refers to the special figure stop symbol data and the gaming state setting table set in the special figure stop symbol data storage area.

  In step S350-2, the main CPU 110a performs a high probability game flag setting process. Specifically, referring to the gaming state setting table shown in FIG. 11, if the special figure stop symbol data is to set a high probability game flag, set the high probability flag in the high probability flag storage area, When the special figure stop symbol data does not set the high probability game flag, the high probability game flag is not set in the high probability flag storage area or the high probability game flag storage area is cleared. For example, if the special figure stop symbol data is “10”, the high probability flag is set in the high probability game flag storage area, and if the special figure stop symbol data is “14”, the high probability game flag is not set.

  In step S350-3, the main CPU 110a performs high probability game number setting processing. Specifically, with reference to the gaming state setting table shown in FIG. 11, when the special figure stop symbol data sets the high probability gaming number, the remaining variation number (X) storage area of the high probability gaming state A predetermined number of times is set in. For example, if the special figure stop symbol data is “10”, 10000 is set in the remaining fluctuation count (X) storage area of the high probability game state, and if the special figure stop symbol data is “14”, the high probability game Nothing is set or 0 is set in the remaining change count (X) state storage area.

  In step S350-4, the main CPU 110a performs a time-saving game flag setting process. Specifically, referring to the gaming state setting table shown in FIG. 11, if the special figure stop symbol data sets the short time game flag, the short time game flag is set in the short time game flag storage area, and the special time stop flag data is set. When the figure stop symbol data does not set the short time game flag, the short time game flag is not set in the short time game flag storage area or the short time game flag storage area is cleared. In the embodiment of the present invention, the short-time game flag is set for any special figure stop symbol data.

  In step S350-5, the main CPU 110a performs time-saving game number setting processing. Specifically, referring to the gaming state setting table shown in FIG. 11, when the special figure stop symbol data sets the number of short-time games, a predetermined number of times are stored in the remaining variation number (J) storage area of the short-time gaming state. Set the number of times. For example, if the special figure stop symbol data is “10”, 10000 is set in the remaining change count (J) storage area of the short-time gaming state, and if the special figure stop symbol data is “14”, the short-time gaming state 100 is set in the remaining fluctuation count (J) storage area.

  In step S350-6, the main CPU 110a confirms the gaming state with reference to the high probability gaming flag storage area and the short-time gaming flag storage area, and sends a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state to the effect transmission data storage area. Set to. Thereby, a game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  In step S350-7, the main CPU 110a sets round number erasure data for erasing (LED off) on the round number display 66 (LED on) in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, when round number deletion data is set in a predetermined processing area, display control data is created in step S700, and the created data is output in step S800. The display is cleared.

  In step S350-8, the main CPU 110a sets “0” in the special symbol special electric processing data, prepares to move the processing to the special symbol memory determination processing shown in FIG. 25, and ends the current jackpot game end processing.

(Main figure normal power control processing of main control board)
The ordinary power transmission control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a general power control process in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S401, the CPU 110a loads general-purpose normal power processing data, refers to the branch address from the general-purpose normal power processing data loaded in step S402, and is normal if the general-purpose normal power processing data = 0. The process moves to the symbol variation process (step S410), and if the ordinary figure normal power process data = 1, the process moves to the auxiliary game process (step S420).

  This “Putsu-Fuji Electric Power Processing Data” will be set as necessary in each sub-routine control processing subroutine as will be described later, so that the sub-routines necessary for the game will be processed appropriately. become.

  In the normal symbol variation process of step S410, the main CPU 110a performs a hit determination process, a normal symbol determination process for determining a normal symbol to be stopped and displayed, a normal symbol variation pattern determination process for determining a variation time of the normal symbol, and the like. This normal symbol variation process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  In the auxiliary game process of step S420, the main CPU 110a performs a process of controlling the auxiliary game (winning game). This auxiliary game process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

(Normal design variation processing of the main control board)
The normal symbol variation process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S410-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the normal symbol variation display is in progress. When the normal symbol variation display is in progress (normal symbol time counter ≠ 0) (step S410-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S410-14, and when the normal symbol variation display is not in progress (step S410-1). : No), the process proceeds to step S410-2.

  In step S410-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the value of the normal symbol hold count (G) storage area storing the general symbol hold count is 1 or more. When it is determined that the value of the normal symbol hold count (G) storage area is 1 or more (S410-2: Yes), the process proceeds to step S410-3, and the value of the normal symbol hold count (G) storage area Is determined to be not 1 or more (S410-2: No), the current normal symbol variation process is terminated.

  In step S410-3, the main CPU 110a updates (G ← G + 1) by subtracting “1” from the value stored in the normal symbol hold count (G) storage area.

  In step S410-4, the main CPU 110a performs a shift process on the data stored in the normal symbol holding storage area corresponding to the normal symbol holding number (G) storage area subtracted in step S410-2. Specifically, each data stored in the fourth storage unit from the first storage unit in the normal symbol storage area is shifted to the previous storage unit. Here, the data stored in the first storage unit is shifted to the determination storage area (the 0th storage unit). At this time, the data stored in the first storage unit is written in the determination storage area (the 0th storage unit), and the data already written in the determination storage area (the 0th storage unit) is normally stored in the symbol storage. It will be erased from the area. Thereby, the random number value for hit determination, the random number value for hit symbol determination, and the random number value for normal pattern variation pattern determination used in the previous game are deleted.

  In step S410-5, the main CPU 110a performs a hit determination process. Specifically, the current short-time gaming state and the random number for winning determination stored in the 0th storage part of the normal symbol holding storage area are collated with the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. Judgment whether or not to win (normal symbol winning lottery).

  In step S410-6, the main CPU 110a performs a normal symbol determination process. Specifically, whether or not the current state is the short-time gaming state, the result of the hit determination in step S410-5, and the random number value for stopping the normal diagram stored in the 0th storage unit of the normal symbol holding storage area Is compared with the normal symbol stop symbol determination table shown in FIG. 16B to determine the normal symbol type (normal symbol stop symbol data) and set it in the normal symbol stop symbol storage area.

  In step S410-7, the main CPU 110a sets a general symbol designation command corresponding to the general symbol stop symbol data determined in step S410-6 in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the common figure designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  In step S410-8, the main CPU 110a performs a common map variation pattern determination process. Specifically, whether or not the current state is the short-time gaming state, the result of the hit determination in step S410-5, and the normal figure variation pattern random number value stored in the 0th storage unit of the normal symbol hold storage area Is compared with the normal symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10C to determine the normal symbol variation time (variation pattern).

  In step S410-9, the main CPU 110a sets a normal pattern variation pattern designation command corresponding to the variation time (variation pattern) of the normal symbol determined in step S410-8 in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the normal pattern change pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  In step S410-10, the main CPU 110a sets the fluctuation time of the normal symbol determined in step S410-9 in the normal symbol time counter. The normal symbol time counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S410-11, the main CPU 110a sets normal symbol fluctuation display data for causing the normal symbol first display 62 to perform normal symbol fluctuation display (LED blinking) in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c. Thus, when the normal symbol variation display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is generated in step S700, and the generated data is output in step S800, whereby the normal symbol first display is performed. The change display of the device 62 is started.

  In step S410-12, the main CPU 110a sets a normal symbol storage designation command corresponding to the normal symbol hold count (G) in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the normal symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  In step S410-13, the main CPU 110a sets the above-described normal symbol hold display data in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current normal symbol variation process. As a result, when the normal symbol hold display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S700, and the created data is output in step S800. The number of pending drawings is displayed on the display 62.

  In step S410-14, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol time counter set in step S410-11 is "0". When it is determined that the normal symbol variation time has elapsed (S410-14: Yes), the process proceeds to step S410-15, and when it is determined that the normal symbol variation time has not elapsed (S410-14: In No), the current normal symbol variation process is terminated.

  In step S410-15, the main CPU 110a sets normal symbol stop display data for stopping the normal symbol determined in step S410-6 on the normal symbol first display 62 in a predetermined processing area. As a result, when the normal symbol stop display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is generated in step S700, and the generated data is output in step S800, whereby the normal symbol first display is performed. The normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the device 62, and the determination result of the lottery is notified to the player.

  In step S410-16, the main CPU 110a sets a normal symbol determination command indicating a normal symbol stop display in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the normal symbol confirmation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  In step S410-17, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stop symbol data of the normal symbol is a hit stop symbol. If it is a winning stop symbol (S410-17: Yes), the process proceeds to step S410-18, and if it is not a winning stop symbol (S410-17: No), the current normal symbol variation process is terminated.

  In step S410-18, the main CPU 110a sets “1” in the ordinary power transmission processing data, and prepares to shift the processing to the auxiliary game processing shown in FIG.

  In step S410-19, the main CPU 110a performs an auxiliary game start process. In the auxiliary game start process, first, the main CPU 110a sets an opening mode determination table for the second start port of the main RAM 110c, and sets “1” to the number of times of opening (S) stored in the number of times of opening (S) storage area. Add and update (S ← S + 1). Here, since the second start port 47 has not been opened yet, “1” is stored in the number-of-openings (S) storage area. Then, in order to open the movable member 48 of the second starting port 47, energization data for energizing the second starting port opening / closing solenoid 48b is set. Thereby, the movable member 48 is converted from the closed state to the open state, and the second start port 47 is opened. Also, referring to the opening mode determination table of the second starting port, the opening time of the second starting port 47 is set in the auxiliary game timer counter based on the current number of times of opening (S), and the normal symbol variation process this time Exit. The auxiliary game timer counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in step S110.

(Auxiliary game processing of main control board)
The auxiliary game process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing auxiliary game processing in the main control board 110.

  In step S420-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second start port is currently open. Specifically, it is determined whether or not energization data for energizing the second start opening / closing solenoid 48b is set. When it is determined that the second start port 47 is open (S420-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S420-2, and when it is determined that the second start port 47 is not open (S420-1). : No), the process proceeds to step S420-7.

  In step S420-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not an opening end condition for the second start port is satisfied. Specifically, the value of the second start entrance ball counter (L) has reached the specified number (10) or the opening time at the current opening number (S) has elapsed (auxiliary game timer counter = 0) ) Is applicable. When it is determined that the opening end condition is satisfied (S420-2: Yes), the process proceeds to step S420-3, and when it is determined that the opening end condition is not satisfied (S420-2: No). Then, the current auxiliary game process is terminated.

  In step S420-3, the main CPU 110a performs a second start port closing process. Specifically, the second start port opening / closing solenoid energization stop data for converting the movable member 48 of the second start port 47 to the closed state is set. Thereby, the movable member 48 is converted from the open state to the closed state, and the second start port 47 is closed. In addition, referring to the second starting port opening mode determination table set in step S410-19, the closing time of the second starting port 47 is set to the auxiliary game timer counter based on the current number of times of opening (S). set. When this process ends, the current auxiliary game process ends.

  In step S420-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not an auxiliary game end condition is satisfied. The auxiliary game end condition is that the number of times the second start opening 47 is opened with a normal operation number (D) set in advance, or the value of the second start opening entrance counter (L) is a specified number (10 ). When the main CPU 110a determines that the auxiliary game end condition is satisfied (S420-4: Yes), the process proceeds to step S420-5, and when the main CPU 110a determines that the auxiliary game end condition is not satisfied (S420). -4: No) ends the auxiliary game process.

  In step S420-5, the main CPU 110a performs auxiliary game end processing. Specifically, “0” is set in the number of times of opening the second start opening (S) storage area and the second start opening ball counter (L) storage area, and the values in the respective storage areas are cleared.

  In step S420-6, the main CPU 110a sets 0 in the normal-use normal power processing data, and prepares to shift the processing to the normal symbol variation processing shown in FIG. When this process ends, the current auxiliary game process ends.

  In step S420-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the closing time of the second start port has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the auxiliary game timer counter is not “0”. If it is determined that the closing time of the second start port has ended (S420-7: Yes), the process proceeds to step S420-8, and it is determined that the closing time of the second start port has not ended ( In S420-7: No), the current auxiliary game process is terminated.

  In step S420-8, the main CPU 110a performs a second start port opening process. Specifically, second start port opening / closing solenoid energization start data for energizing the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b to set the movable member 48 of the second start port 47 is set. Thereby, the movable member 48 is converted from the closed state to the open state, and the second start port 47 is opened. Also, with reference to the second starting port opening mode determination table set in step S410-17, the opening time of the second starting port 47 is set in the auxiliary game timer counter based on the current number of opening times (S). To do.

(Main control board data creation process)
The data creation process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing data creation processing in the main control board 110.

  In step S700-1, the main CPU 110a opens or closes the big prize opening / closing solenoid 51b based on the big prize opening / closing solenoid energization start data or the big prize opening / closing solenoid energization stop data set in the big hit game process. Drive control data corresponding to the drive signal for driving is created.

  In step S700-2, the main CPU 110a opens the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b based on the second start port opening / closing solenoid energization start data or the second start port opening / closing solenoid energization stop data set in the auxiliary game process. Drive control data corresponding to the drive signal for driving in the closed state is created.

  In step S700-3, the main CPU 110a executes the first special symbol first display 60 or the first symbol based on the special symbol variation display data or the special symbol stop display data set in the special symbol memory determination process or the special symbol variation process. (2) Special symbol first display display control data corresponding to a special symbol display signal for turning on, blinking, or extinguishing the LED of the special symbol first display 61 is created.

  In step S700-4, the main CPU 110a turns on, blinks, or turns off the LED of the normal symbol first display 62 based on the normal symbol variation display data or the normal symbol stop display data set in the normal symbol variation process. The display control data for the normal symbol first display corresponding to the normal symbol display signal is generated.

  In step S700-5, the main CPU 110a displays the special symbol hold display data (first special symbol hold display data) set in the first start port detection signal input process, the second start port detection signal input process, or the special symbol memory determination process. , Second special symbol hold display data), a special symbol hold display signal for turning on, blinking or turning off the LED of the first special symbol hold first display 63 or the second special symbol hold first display 64 The display control data for the special symbol hold first display corresponding to is created.

  In step S700-6, the main CPU 110a turns on, blinks, or turns off the LED of the normal symbol hold first display 65 based on the normal symbol hold display data set in the winning gate detection signal input process or the normal symbol change process. Display control data for the normal symbol hold first display corresponding to the normal symbol hold display signal to be generated.

  In step S700-7, the main CPU 110a turns on or off the LED of the round number display 66 based on the round number display data or the round number erasure data set in the special symbol stop process or the jackpot game end process. Display control data for the round number display corresponding to the round number display signal is created.

  In step S700-8, the main CPU 110a makes a right-handed display for turning on or off the LED of the right-handed first display 67 based on the right-handed display data or the right-handed erasure data set in the special symbol stop process. Display control data for the right-handed first display corresponding to the signal is created.

  In step S700-9, if the gaming state at the time of power restoration is the high probability gaming state, the main CPU 110a creates display control data for the high probability gaming state indicator for lighting the LED of the high probability gaming state indicator 68. To do.

  In step S700-10, the main CPU 110a creates display control data for the short-time game state indicator for lighting the LED of the short-time game state indicator 69 if the game state at the time of power recovery is the short-time game state.

  In step S700-11, the main CPU 110a generates external signal output data for outputting external information data (game information), information related to abnormality, RAM clear execution information (security signal), and the like to the outside of the gaming machine. Perform signal output data creation processing.

  Next, output control processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing output control processing in the main control board 110.

  In Step S800-1, the main CPU 110a outputs the various drive control data created in Steps S700-1 to S700-2 in order to drive the special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b and the second start opening / closing solenoid 48b. Perform port output processing. Furthermore, external signal output data such as external information data (game information) created in step S700-11, information related to abnormality, and RAM clear execution information (security signal) are output to the game information output terminal board 108.

  In step S800-2, the main CPU 110a displays the first special symbol first indicator 60, the second special symbol first indicator 61, the normal symbol first indicator 62, the first special symbol hold first indicator 63, the first 2 special symbol hold first display 64, normal symbol hold first display 65, round number display 66, right-handed first display 67, high probability game state display 68, time-short game state display 69 LED In order to light up, turn off, or blink, display output processing for outputting various display control data created in steps S700-3 to S700-10 is performed.

  In step S800-3, the main CPU 110a transmits the command set in the payout transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the payout control board 120, and the command set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Command output processing to be transmitted to the effect control board 130 is performed.

(Command explanation)
The types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to which the description is partially omitted in the flowchart of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. 37 and 38 are diagrams showing types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. FIG.

  The “designation designating command” indicates the type of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed, “MODE” is set as “E0H”, and DATA information is set according to the type of the special symbol. Since the special symbol type determines the jackpot type and the high probability gaming state as a result, it can be said that the effect symbol designation command indicates the jackpot type and the gaming state.

  In the effect symbol designation command, when various special symbols are determined and the variation display of the special symbol is started, an effect symbol designation command corresponding to the determined special symbol is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Specifically, the effect designating command corresponding to the special symbol determined when the special symbol variable display is started in step S311-10 is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereafter, the effect designating command set in the effect transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is immediately transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  The “first special symbol memory designation command” indicates the number of reserved memories stored in the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area, “MODE” is set to “E1H”, and the number of reserved memories DATA information is set according to the above.

  This first special symbol memory designation command is effect-controlled by the first special symbol memory designation command corresponding to the number of reserved memories when the number of reserved memories stored in the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is switched. It is transmitted to the substrate 130. Specifically, when the value stored in the first special symbol holding number (U1) storage area increases or decreases in step S230-11 or step S310-7, the number corresponding to the holding memory number after increase / decrease is increased. One special symbol memory designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereafter, the first special symbol memory designation command set in the production transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is immediately transmitted to the production control board 130.

  The “second special symbol memory designation command” indicates the number of reserved memories stored in the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area, “MODE” is set to “E2H”, and the number of reserved memories DATA information is set according to the above.

  This second special symbol memory designation command is directed by the second special symbol memory designation command corresponding to the number of reserved memories when the number of reserved memories stored in the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area is switched. It is transmitted to the substrate 130. Specifically, when the value stored in the second special symbol holding number (U2) storage area in step S240-17 or step S310-7 increases or decreases, the number corresponding to the holding number after increase or decrease corresponds. Two special symbol storage designation commands are set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereafter, the second special symbol memory designation command set in the production transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is immediately transmitted to the production control board 130.

  In the present embodiment, the “first special symbol memory designation command” and the “second special symbol memory designation command” are collectively referred to as “special symbol memory designation command”.

  “Special symbol confirmation command” indicates that the special symbol has been stopped and the result of jackpot determination, “MODE” is set to “E3H”, and DATA information is set according to the result of jackpot determination Has been.

  This special symbol confirmation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol first display 60 or the second special symbol first display 61 in step S320-3, the special symbol confirmation command is used for the effect of the main RAM 110c. Set in the transmission data storage area. Thereafter, the special symbol confirmation command set in the production transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is immediately transmitted to the production control board 130.

The “normal symbol confirmation command” indicates that the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, “MODE” is set to “E3H”, and “DATA” is set to “04H”.
The normal symbol confirmation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol first display 62 in step S410-16, the normal symbol confirmation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereafter, the normal symbol confirmation command set in the effect transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is immediately transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  The “first special figure variation pattern designation command” indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol in the first special symbol first display 60, “MODE” is set to “E6H”, DATA information is set according to the fluctuation pattern.

  This first special symbol variation pattern designation command is a first special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined when the special symbol variation display of the first special symbol first display 60 is started. A designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Specifically, in step S312, the first special figure variation pattern designation command corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereafter, the first special figure variation pattern designation command set in the production transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is immediately transmitted to the production control board 130.

  The “second special figure variation pattern designation command” indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol in the second special symbol first display 61, and “MODE” is set to “E7H”. DATA information is set according to the fluctuation pattern.

  This second special figure variation pattern designation command designates a second special figure variation pattern designation corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined when the special symbol variation display of the second special symbol first display 61 is started. The command is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Specifically, in step S312, the second special figure fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation pattern is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereafter, the second special figure variation pattern designation command set in the production transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is immediately transmitted to the production control board 130.

  In the present embodiment, the “first special figure fluctuation pattern designation command” and the “second special figure fluctuation pattern designation command” are collectively referred to as a “special figure fluctuation pattern designation command”.

  The “start opening prize designation command” is information indicating the result of determining the result of the jackpot lottery in advance, and “MODE” is set to “E8H” if it is based on winning a game ball to the first starting opening 45. If it is based on the winning of a game ball to the second starting port 47, “MODE” is set as “E9H”, and DATA information is set according to various winning information.

  This start opening winning designation command is the effect that the start opening winning designation command corresponding to the determined start winning information (preliminary determination result) when the game ball wins the first start opening 45 or the second start opening 47 is effect control. It is transmitted to the substrate 130.

  Specifically, in step S230-10 or S240-16, the start opening prize designation command corresponding to the decided prize information is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereafter, the start opening prize designation command set in the production transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is immediately transmitted to the production control board 130.

  The “round designation command” indicates the number of jackpot rounds according to various jackpot types, “MODE” is set as “EAH”, and DATA information is set according to the number of jackpot rounds. .

  As for the round designation command, when the big hit round is started, a round designation command corresponding to the started round number is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Specifically, when the opening / closing member 51 of the special winning opening 50 is opened in step S340-5 or step S340-16, a round designation command corresponding to the number of rounds to be opened is transmitted for production in the main RAM 110c. Set in the data storage area. Thereafter, the winning prize opening opening designation command set in the production transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is immediately transmitted to the production control board 130.

  The “interval designation command” indicates the closing period (interval) of the big winning opening 50 between rounds, “MODE” is set as “EAH”, and “DATA” is set as “10H”. ing.

  This interval designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the closing period (interval) of the big prize opening 50 between rounds starts. Specifically, in step S340-8, the interval designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereafter, the interval designation command set in the production transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is immediately transmitted to the production control board 130.

  The “opening designation command” indicates that various jackpot games (special game state) start, “MODE” is set as “EBH”, and DATA information is set according to the type of jackpot Yes.

  As for the opening designation command, when various jackpots start, an opening designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  Specifically, at the start of the jackpot game process in step S330-23, an opening designation command corresponding to the jackpot type is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereafter, the opening designation command set in the production transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is immediately transmitted to the production control board 130.

  The “ending designation command” indicates that various jackpots have ended, “MODE” is set as “ECH”, and DATA information is set according to the jackpot type.

  As for this ending designation command, when various jackpots are finished, the ending designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  Specifically, at the start of the jackpot game end process in step S340-18, an ending designation command corresponding to the jackpot type is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereafter, the ending designation command set in the production transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is immediately transmitted to the production control board 130.

  The “common symbol designation command” indicates the type of the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol first display 62, and “MODE” is set to “EDH”, and the DATA of the DATA according to the normal symbol type is set. Information is set.

  As for the normal symbol designation command, when various normal symbols are determined and the variation display of the normal symbol is started, the universal symbol designation command corresponding to the determined normal symbol is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  Specifically, when the normal symbol variation display is started in step S410-7, a general symbol designation command corresponding to the determined normal symbol is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereafter, in step S <b> 800-3, the universal designating command set in the production transmission data storage area is immediately transmitted to the production control board 130.

  The “ordinary pattern variation pattern designation command” indicates the variation time of the ordinary symbol in the ordinary symbol first display 62, “MODE” is set to “EEH”, and is adjusted to the variation time of various ordinary symbols. DATA information is set.

  When the normal symbol variation display command of the normal symbol first display 62 is started, the normal symbol variation pattern designation command is the normal diagram variation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variation time of the ordinary symbol. 130. Specifically, when the normal symbol variation display is started in step S410-9, the ordinary variation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variation time of the normal symbol is transmitted in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Set to After that, the regular pattern change pattern designation command set in the production transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is immediately transmitted to the production control board 130.

  The “ordinary symbol storage designation command” indicates the number of reserved memories stored in the normal symbol hold count (G) storage area, “MODE” is set to “EFH”, and DATA is set in accordance with the hold memory count. Information is set.

  The normal symbol memory designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the reserved symbol number stored in the normal symbol reserve number (G) storage area is switched. . Specifically, when the value stored in the normal symbol holding number (G) storage area in step S14, step S250-7 or step S410-5 increases or decreases, the number of holding storage after the increase or decrease corresponds. The normal symbol storage designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereafter, the normal symbol memory designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is immediately transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  The “gaming state designation command” indicates the gaming state whether or not it is a high probability gaming state and whether or not it is a short-time gaming state, and “MODE” is set to “F1H”, and the low probability gaming state And if it is a non-short game state, “DATA” is set to “00H”, and if it is a low-probability game state and a short-time game state, “DATA” is set to “01H”, a high-probability game state and a non-short-time game state If so, “DATA” is set to “02H”, and “DATA” is set to “03H” in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state.

  This gaming state designation command is produced by the gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming state at the time of initialization processing, at the start of special symbol variation, at the end of special symbol variation, at the start of jackpot game and at the end of jackpot It is transmitted to the control board 130.

  Specifically, when the initialization process is performed in step S16, when the special symbol variation display is started in step S310-7, the high probability game flag and the number of high probability games are counted in step S330-13. When there is a possibility that the short-time game flag and the short-time game number (J) have been changed, the high-probability game flag, the high-probability game number, the short-time game flag, and the short-time game number (J) are set in step S350-6. When this occurs, a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereafter, the gaming state designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is immediately transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  The “RAM clear designation command”, “power-on designation command”, and “power recovery designation command” indicate whether or not the power-on to the gaming machine 1 is to initialize the main RAM 110c. “MODE” is set to “F2H”, and when the main RAM 110c is initialized, “DATA” is set to “00H” and “01H”, and when the main RAM 110c is not initialized, “DATA” is set. It is set to “02H” to “05H” according to the gaming state when the power interruption occurs.

  The RAM clear designation command, the power-on designation command, and the power restoration designation command are the RAM clear designation command, the power-on designation command, or the power restoration designation corresponding to whether or not the main RAM 110c is initialized when the gaming machine 1 is powered on. The command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  Specifically, the RAM clear designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the RAM clear switch 55 is turned on when the power is turned on (step S11). The power-on designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the RAM clear switch 55 is turned on again and the information stored in the main RAM 101c is cleared (step S15). The power restoration designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the RAM clear switch 55 is not turned on when the power is turned on (step S7).

  The “error designation command” indicates an error that has occurred in the gaming machine 1, “MODE” is set as “F3H”, and “DATA” information is set according to the type of error.

  This error designation command is used when a game ball is won in the second start opening 47, when detected by the magnetic detection switch 53a or the radio wave detection switch 54a, when detected by the winning confirmation detection switch 52a, when the glass frame 4 is opened, When the lower tray 12 is full, when a payout abnormality occurs, an error designation command corresponding to the type of error is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  Specifically, when the magnetic / radio wave abnormality is determined in step S600, when the abnormal winning is determined in S260, or when the illegal entry is determined in S240-7, the payout control board 120 uses the glass frame 4 When the opening of the tray 12 is full, the shortage of game balls to be paid out is detected, an error designation command corresponding to the type of error is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereafter, in step S800-3, the error designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area is immediately transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  The “error release designation command” indicates that the error that has occurred in the gaming machine 1 has been resolved, “MODE” is set to “F4H”, and “DATA” information is set in accordance with the type of error that has been resolved. Is set.

  As for this error release designation command, an error designation command corresponding to the type of error is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the glass frame 4 is closed, when the tray 12 is fully filled, or when the payout abnormality is resolved.

  Specifically, when the payout control board 120 detects the closing of the glass frame 4, the fullness of the lower tray 12, and the shortage of game balls for payout are detected, the error cancellation corresponding to the type of error that has been canceled The designation command is set in the transmission data storage area for presentation in the main RAM 110c. Thereafter, in step S800-3, the error designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area is immediately transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  In the present embodiment, there are four types of power recovery specification commands for low-accuracy short-time non-operation, low-accuracy short-time operation, high-accuracy short-time non-operation and high-accuracy short-time operation. Power recovery specification command for jackpot that indicates that the gaming state at the time of occurrence is a jackpot game (for example, power recovery specification for left-handed jackpot corresponding to a jackpot game that launches a game ball aiming at the left area of the game area A command or a right-handed jackpot power recovery designation command corresponding to a jackpot game that launches a game ball aiming at the right area of the game area may be provided. In this way, left-handed display or right-handed display can be performed according to the type of jackpot game that is resumed after power is restored.

(Main process of production control unit 130m)
Processing executed by the sub CPU 130a in the effect control unit 130m will be described. First, the main process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing main processing in the effect control unit 130m.

  When a power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 180, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 130a, and the sub CPU 130a performs the following main processing.

  In step S1000, the sub CPU 130a sets an interrupt prohibition for prohibiting the timer interrupt, and performs an initialization process in step S1001. In this processing, the sub CPU 130a reads a main processing program from the sub ROM 130b in response to power-on, initializes a flag and the like stored in the sub RAM 130c, and performs processing such as initial setting.

  In step S1002, the sub CPU 130a sets an interrupt permission for permitting a timer interrupt, and in step S1003, performs a sub-random number update process. In this process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of updating various random numbers stored in the sub RAM 130c. Thereafter, the process of step S1003 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of the production control unit 130m)
The timer interrupt process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process in the effect control unit 130m. A clock pulse is generated every predetermined period (4 milliseconds) by the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the effect control unit 130m, thereby executing a timer interrupt process described below.

  In step S1100, the sub CPU 120a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 130a to the stack area.

  In step S1200, the sub CPU 130a performs command analysis processing. In this process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process corresponding to the type of command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c. A specific description of the command analysis processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42.

  When the effect control unit 130m receives a command transmitted from the main control board 110, a command reception interrupt process of the effect control unit 130m (not shown) occurs and stores the received command in the reception buffer. Thereafter, the received command is processed in step S1200.

  In step S1300, the sub CPU 130a performs timer update processing for updating various timer counters used in the effect control unit 130m.

  In step S1400, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the signals of the effect button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a are input, and when the signals of the effect button detection switch 17a and the like are input, the image control unit 140. An effect input control process for transmitting an effect button signal or the like is performed.

  In step S1500, the sub CPU 130a performs special symbol second display 80, 81, normal symbol second display 82, special symbol hold second indicator 83, 84, normal symbol hold second display 85, and right-handed. Data creation processing of various display control data to be output to the second display 87 is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1600, the sub CPU 130a performs data output processing. In this process, a display output process for outputting a signal such as the display control data created in S700 is performed. Also, command output processing for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c to another board is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1700, the sub CPU 130a restores the information saved in step S1100 to the register of the sub CPU 130a.

(Command analysis process of effect control unit 130m)
The command analysis processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described using FIG. 41 and FIG. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing command analysis processing (1) in the effect control unit 130m. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing command analysis processing (2) in the effect control unit 130m. Note that the command analysis process (2) of FIG. 42 is performed subsequent to the command analysis process (1) of FIG.

  First, in step S1201, the sub CPU 130a checks whether there is a command in the reception buffer, and checks whether the command has been received. In this process, if there is a command in the reception buffer, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1202. On the other hand, in this process, if there is no command in the reception buffer, the sub CPU 130a ends the current command analysis process.

  In step S1202, the sub CPU 130a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a customer waiting state designation command. In this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is a customer waiting state designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1203. On the other hand, in this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is not a customer waiting state designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1204.

  In step S1203, the sub CPU 130a performs a customer waiting effect process. Specifically, a customer waiting demo image is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) or the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) 30 seconds (or 60 seconds may be received) after receiving the customer waiting state designation command. Or displaying a power-saving image. When this process ends, the current command analysis process ends.

  In step S1204, the sub CPU 130a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special symbol storage designation command. In this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is a special symbol storage designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1205. On the other hand, in this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is not a special symbol storage designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1206.

  In step S1205, the sub CPU 130a analyzes the special figure pending memory number from the special symbol memory designation command, and sets the analyzed special figure pending memory number in the special figure pending memory number counter of the sub RAM 130c. I do. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the current command analysis process ends.

  In step S1206, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a start slot winning designation command. In this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is a start slot winning designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1207. On the other hand, in this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is not the start opening winning designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1208.

  In step S <b> 1207, the sub CPU 130 a sets the display mode of the icons (holding icons, the variation icons) displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) based on the content of the start opening winning designation command as a special mode. Whether or not and the type of special mode are determined.

  Specifically, the variation display result and variation pattern of the special symbol corresponding to the command is specified from the start opening winning designation command, and the display mode of the icon is changed from the normal mode to the special mode or according to the expected degree of big win. A change scenario for changing from a special mode to another special mode is determined. For example, the hold icon is displayed in white in the normal (default) display mode, blue in the special display mode 1, green in the special display mode 2, and red in the special display mode 3, and the expected degree of jackpot The normal display mode (white) <special display mode 1 (blue) <special display mode 2 (green) <special display mode 3 (red) may be increased in this order. Then, an icon display designation command for displaying an icon corresponding to the determined change scenario on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. When this process ends, the current command analysis process ends.

  Note that the icon display designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140 in the data output process in step S1600. Then, the image control unit 140 displays an icon (pending icon, the variation icon) based on the icon display designation command.

  In step S1208, the sub CPU 130a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an effect designating command. In this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is an effect designating command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1209. On the other hand, in this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is not an effect designating command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1210.

  In step S1209, the sub CPU 130a performs stop symbol data determination processing for determining the effect symbol 70a to be stopped and displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) based on the contents of the received effect symbol designation command.

  In this stop symbol data determination process, the presentation symbol designation command is analyzed to determine stop symbol data (hit symbol data, lost symbol data) for identifying the presence / absence of jackpot and the type of jackpot, and the determined stop symbol Data is set in the stop symbol storage area of the sub RAM 130c. When this process ends, the current command analysis process ends.

  In step S1210, the sub CPU 130a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a variation pattern designation command. In this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is a variation pattern designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1211. On the other hand, in this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is not a variation pattern designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1213.

  In step S1211, the sub CPU 130a performs a variation effect pattern determination process. Specifically, in this process, the sub CPU 130a refers to the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 45 to 47 and changes the effect mode (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern designation command and the effect random number value. decide. A specific description of the variation effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, the sub CPU 130a sets the determined effect pattern in the symbol effect pattern storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and determines the determined effect pattern in the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170. In order to transmit, the effect pattern data indicating the effect pattern stored in the effect pattern storage area is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c.

  In step S1212, the sub CPU 130a controls the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), the audio output device 9, and the like based on the variation effect pattern determined in step S1211. The notice effect determining process for determining the notice effect to be performed is performed, and the current command analysis process is terminated. A specific description of the notice effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1213, the sub CPU 130a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special symbol confirmation command. In this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is a special symbol determination command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1214. On the other hand, in this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is not a symbol determination command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1216.

  In step S1214, the sub CPU 130a displays the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) in order to stop and display the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). A stop designation command for stopping display is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and the special symbol stop display data (the first special symbol second display 80 or the second special symbol second display 81 for stopping display) An effect symbol variation stop process is performed in which 1 special symbol stop display data and second special symbol stop display data) are set in a predetermined processing area of the sub-RAM 130c. Thus, when the first special symbol stop display data or the second special symbol stop display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S1500, and the created data is output in step S1600. Thus, the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol second indicator 80 or the second special symbol second indicator 81.

  The stop designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140 in the data output process in step S1600. Then, the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol variation display area (first special symbol variation display area DZ1, second special symbol variation display area DZ2) is created by the image control unit 140. Stop display (this stop) is displayed.

  In step S1215, the sub CPU 130a performs an effect mode setting process for setting an effect mode for changing the effect mode in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), and the like. . Here, the first effect mode (normal mode) or the second effect mode (MV mode) is set when a mode change condition such as the number of variable displays reaching a predetermined number or winning a mode change lottery is established. Is set. When this process ends, the current production control unit command analysis process ends. The first effect mode and the second effect mode are set in the normal gaming state, but may be set in other gaming states.

  In step S1216, the sub CPU 130a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a normal symbol storage designation command. In this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is a normal symbol storage designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1217. On the other hand, in this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is not a normal symbol storage designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1218.

  In step S1217, the sub-CPU 130a analyzes the normal symbol reserved memory number from the normal symbol memory designation command, and displays the analyzed normal symbol reserved memory number on the normal symbol reserved second display 85. Is stored in a predetermined processing area. Thus, when the normal symbol hold display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S1500, and the created data is output in step S1600. The normal symbol holding number is displayed on the display unit 85.

  In step S1218, the sub CPU 130a confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a common map variation pattern designation command. In this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is a normal variation pattern designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1219. On the other hand, in this process, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1220 if the command stored in the reception buffer is not the usual pattern change pattern designation command.

  In step S1219, the sub CPU 130a performs normal roulette effect determination performed by the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), and the sub CPU 130a performs normal symbol second display. A normal roulette effect determination process is performed in which normal symbol variation display data for causing the normal symbol variation display (blinking of the LED) to be performed in 83 is set in a predetermined processing area. As a result, when the normal symbol variation display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is generated in step S1500, and the generated data is output in step S1600, whereby the normal symbol second display is performed. The change display of the device 83 is started. Note that the normal roulette effect is an effect that is performed when the short-time game state is the non-short-time game state. Specifically, the stop symbol data of the normal symbol becomes the normal symbol 1 and the auxiliary game is performed. This is a preliminary production that makes the player expect that. When this process ends, the current production control unit command analysis process ends.

  In step S1220, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a normal symbol determination command. In this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is a normal symbol determination command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1221. On the other hand, in this process, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1223 if the command stored in the reception buffer is not a normal symbol determination command.

  In step S1221, normal symbol variation stop processing is performed in which normal symbol stop display data for stopping and displaying the normal symbol second display 82 is set in a predetermined processing area. As a result, when the normal symbol stop display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is generated in step S1500, and the generated data is output in step S1600, whereby the normal symbol second display is performed. The normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the device 82.

  In step S1222, the sub CPU 130a performs a long opening effect execution process for effecting that the second start port 47 is opened longer than usual. In this long opening effect execution processing, it is determined whether or not the auxiliary symbol is played with the normal symbol stop symbol data becoming the normal symbol 1, and the normal symbol stop symbol data becomes the normal symbol 1 and the auxiliary game is executed. The long opening effect is executed when When this process ends, the current production control unit command analysis process ends.

  In step S1223, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a gaming state designation command. In this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is a gaming state designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1224. On the other hand, in this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is not a gaming state designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1225.

  In step S1224, the sub CPU 130a sets the data indicating the gaming state based on the received gaming state designation command in the gaming state storage area in the sub RAM 130c, and the gaming state based on the received gaming state designation command is the short-time gaming state. If the game state is not a special game state (a big hit game state), a game state in which right-handed erase data for erasing (LED off) the display of the right-handed second display 87 (LED on) is set in a predetermined processing area Perform the setting process. When this process ends, the current production control unit command analysis process ends. Thus, when right-handed erasure data is set in a predetermined processing area, display control data is created in step S1500, and the created data is output in step S1600. The display of 87 is erased.

  In step S1225, the sub CPU 130a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a jackpot opening designation command. In this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is an opening designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1226. On the other hand, in this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is not an opening designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1227.

  In step S1226, the sub CPU 120a performs a jackpot effect pattern determination process for determining a jackpot effect pattern. Specifically, in this process, the sub CPU 130a refers to the jackpot effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65, and determines a jackpot effect mode (a jackpot effect pattern) based on the opening designation command. The specific description of the jackpot effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. A specific description of the jackpot effect pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the current production control unit command analysis process ends.

  In step S1227, the sub CPU 130a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a round designation command. In this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is a round designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1228. On the other hand, in this process, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1229 if the command stored in the reception buffer is not a round designation command.

  In step S1228, the sub CPU 130a performs a round effect pattern determination process for determining a round effect pattern. In this round effect pattern determination process, a round effect pattern is determined based on the round designation command and the jackpot effect pattern determined in step S1226, the determined round effect pattern is set in the round effect pattern storage area, and the determined round effect is determined. In order to transmit the pattern information to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170, a round effect pattern designation command based on the determined round effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. When this process ends, the current production control unit command analysis process ends.

  Note that the round effect pattern designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 in the data output process of step S1600. . Then, the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 generate a round effect corresponding to the round effect pattern designation command (round effect pattern) in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), The second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), the audio output device 9, the panel lighting device 74, the frame lighting device 10, the panel driving device 75, and the like are executed.

  In step S1229, the sub CPU 130a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a jackpot ending designation command. In this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is a jackpot ending designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1230. On the other hand, in this process, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1231 if the command stored in the reception buffer is not an ending designation command.

  In step S1230, the sub CPU 130a performs a jackpot end effect pattern determination process for determining a jackpot end effect pattern. In this jackpot end effect pattern determination process, a jackpot end effect pattern is determined based on the ending designation command for jackpot, the determined hit end effect pattern is set in the effect pattern storage area, and information on the determined hit end effect pattern is obtained. In order to transmit to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170, a jackpot end effect pattern designation command based on the determined jackpot end effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. When this process ends, the current production control unit command analysis process ends.

  Note that the jackpot end effect pattern designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 in the data output process of step S1600. The Then, the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 display the jackpot end effect corresponding to the jackpot end effect pattern designation command (the jackpot end effect pattern) in the first image display device 70 (main Liquid crystal), second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), audio output device 9, panel lighting device 74, frame lighting device 10, panel driving device 75, and the like.

  In step S1231, the sub CPU 130a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an error designation command. In this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is an error designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1232. On the other hand, in this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is not an error designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1233.

  In step S1232, the sub CPU 130a performs an error notification process for notifying that an error (event) related to the security of the gaming machine 1 has occurred. In this error notification process, the type of error designation command, that is, the type of error that has occurred is determined, an error notification effect corresponding to the type of error that has occurred is determined, and the determined error notification effect is stored in the error notification effect storage area. In order to transmit the determined error notification effect information to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170, an error notification designation command based on the determined error notification effect is transmitted to the sub-RAM 130c. Set to send buffer. When this process ends, the current production control unit command analysis process ends.

  Note that the error notification designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 in the data output process of step S1600. Then, the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 generate an error notification effect corresponding to the error notification designation command in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device. 71 (sub liquid crystal), sound output device 9, board lighting device 74, frame lighting device 10, board driving device 75, etc.

  In step S1233, the sub CPU 130a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an error cancellation designation command. In this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is an error cancellation designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1234. On the other hand, in this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is not an error cancellation designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1235.

  In step S1234, the sub CPU 130a performs an error notification canceling process for canceling an error notification that is already being executed. In this error notification cancellation processing, the type of error cancellation designation command, that is, the type of error that has been resolved, is determined, and the error notification rendering corresponding to the resolved error type is cleared from the error notification rendering storage area, and the error notification that has been resolved. In order to transmit the release information of the effect to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170, an error notification cancellation designation command based on the canceled error notification effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. . When this process ends, the current production control unit command analysis process ends.

  Note that the error notification cancellation designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 in the data output process of step S1600. . Then, the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 end the error notification effect corresponding to the error notification cancellation designation command.

  In step S1235, the sub CPU 130a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a RAM clear designation command. In this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is a RAM clear designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1236. On the other hand, in this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is not a RAM clear designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1237.

  In step S1236, the sub CPU 130a performs a RAM clear process for notifying that the RAM clear switch 55 is turned on (pressed) and the power is turned on. In this RAM clear process, until the RAM clear is turned on (pressed) again, a RAM clear notification effect for notifying that the RAM clear preparations that are waiting for initialization (clear) of the information stored in the main RAM 110c are in progress. Is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170, a RAM clear notification designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. When this process ends, the current production control unit command analysis process ends.

  Note that the RAM clear notification designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 in the data output process of step S1600. . Then, the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 display the RAM clear effect corresponding to the RAM clear notification designation command on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display. Production devices such as the device 71 (sub liquid crystal), the audio output device 9, the panel lighting device 74, the frame lighting device 10, the panel driving device 75, and the like are executed.

  In step S1237, the sub CPU 130a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a power-on designation command. In this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is a power-on designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1238. On the other hand, in this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is not a power-on designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1239.

  In step S1238, the sub CPU 130a performs a power-on process for notifying that the RAM clear switch 55 is turned on again and the information stored in the main RAM 110c is initialized (RAM cleared). In this power-on process, the RAM is cleared and information on the power-on effect for notifying that the power is turned on is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170. The input notification designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. When this process ends, the current production control unit command analysis process ends.

  Note that the power-on notification designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 in the data output process of step S1600. . Then, the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 display a power-on effect corresponding to the power-on notification designation command in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display. Production devices such as the device 71 (sub liquid crystal), the audio output device 9, the panel lighting device 74, the frame lighting device 10, the panel driving device 75, and the like are executed.

  In step S1239, the sub CPU 130a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a power supply restoration designation command. In this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is a power recovery designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1240. On the other hand, in this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is not a power supply restoration designation command, the sub CPU 130a ends the current effect control unit command analysis process.

  In step S1240, the sub CPU 130a performs a power recovery process for notifying that the RAM clear switch 55 is not turned on (pressed) and that the power is turned on (power recovery). This power restoration process transmits power restoration effect information for notifying that power is being restored to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170. Is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. When this process ends, the current production control unit command analysis process ends.

  Note that the power recovery designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 in the data output process of step S1600. Then, the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 display the power restoration effect corresponding to the power restoration designation command in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device. 71 (sub liquid crystal), sound output device 9, board lighting device 74, frame lighting device 10, board driving device 75, etc.

(Special drawing hold memory update process of production control unit)
With reference to FIG. 43, the special figure hold memory update process of the effect control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing special figure hold memory update processing in the effect control unit 130m.

  First, in step S1205-1, the sub CPU 130a confirms the contents of the special symbol storage designation command determined to have been received in step S1204. In step S1205-2, the special symbol storage designation command confirmed in step S1205-1. The special symbol reservation number is set in the special figure reservation storage number counter of the sub-RAM 130c based on the contents of.

  In step S1205-3, the sub CPU 130a displays the first reserved number or the second reserved number on the first special symbol hold second display 83 or the second special symbol hold second display 84 (LED lighting or blinking). The first special symbol hold display data or the second special symbol hold display data to be set is set in a predetermined processing area of the sub RAM 130c. Accordingly, when the first special symbol hold display data or the second special symbol hold display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S1500, and the created data is output in step S1600. As a result, the first reserved number or the second reserved number is displayed on the first special symbol hold second display 83 or the second special symbol hold second display 84.

  In step S1205-4, the sub CPU 130a displays the first hold number display area SH1 or the second hold number in order to display the first hold number or the second hold number in the first hold number display area SH1 or the second hold number display area SH2. 2 A special symbol hold number display designation command for displaying the first hold number or the second hold number in the hold number display area SH2 is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and the current special figure hold memory update process is terminated. .

  The special symbol reservation number display designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140 in the data output process of step S1600. Then, the image control unit 140 displays the first special symbol hold number or the second special symbol hold number in the first hold number display area SH1 or the second hold number display area SH2. In addition, the first special symbol hold number or the second special symbol hold number is displayed in the first hold number display area SH1 or the second hold number display area SH2 so that it can be visually recognized after the elapse of a predetermined time during the power restoration effect. Display recovery.

(Change control pattern determination process of effect control unit)
The variation effect pattern determination process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the changing effect pattern determination process in the effect control unit 130m.

  First, in step S1211-1, the sub CPU 130a stores the variation pattern designation command determined to have been received in step S1210 in the variation pattern designation command area of the storage area of the presentation information in the sub RAM 130c. That is, the variation pattern designation command that has been stored in the storage area for the production information is overwritten by a new variation pattern designation command.

  In step S1211-2, the sub CPU 130a confirms the content of the variation pattern designation command stored in step S1211-1, and acquires a random effect pattern determination random value in step S1211-2.

  In step S <b> 1211-4, the sub CPU 130 a determines whether or not the variation pattern designation command is due to a game ball entering the first start port 45. If it is due to the game ball entering the first start opening 45 (S1211-4: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1211-5. On the other hand, if it is not due to the game ball entering the first start opening 45 (S1211-4: No), the process proceeds to step S1211-9.

  In step S1211-5, the sub CPU 130a acquires the current effect mode information set in the effect mode setting process in step S1215.

  In step S1211-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the effect mode information acquired in step S1211-5 is effect mode 1 (normal mode). If the effect mode information is effect mode 1 (normal mode) (S1211-6: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1211-7. On the other hand, if the effect mode information is not effect mode 1 (normal mode) (MV mode described later) (S1211-6: No), the process proceeds to step S1211-8.

  In step S1211-7, the sub CPU 130a selects the variation effect pattern determination table for effect mode 1 shown in FIG. 45, and in step S1211-8, the sub CPU 130a changes the effect effect pattern pattern for effect mode 2 shown in FIG. The determination table is selected, and in step S1211-9, the sub CPU 130a selects the variation effect pattern determination table for the second start opening shown in FIG. The variation effect pattern determination table for the effect mode 1, the variation effect pattern determination table for the effect mode 2, and the variation effect pattern determination table for the second start port are stored in the sub-RAM 130c. 45 to 47 to be described later

  In step S1211-10, the sub CPU 130a determines a variation effect pattern. Specifically, the stop symbol data stored in the stop symbol storage area in step S1209 is compared with the random effect pattern determination random value acquired in step S1211-3 and the selected variable effect pattern determination table. The variation effect pattern is determined according to the selection rate set in the variation effect pattern determination table, and the determined variation effect pattern is stored in the variation effect pattern information storage area.

  The variation production pattern includes a variation production time, a variation display mode of the production symbol 70a, presence / absence of reach production, contents of reach production, presence / absence of production button production, contents of production button production, production development configuration, etc. Components are associated. In addition, the variation effect pattern of the variation effect in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is configured with a display mode of effect symbol variation display, a character, and the like. Display modes relating to the object image and the background image are also associated as components of the variation effect.

  In step S1211-11, the sub CPU 130a identifies a variation effect pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variation effect pattern, and sets the identified variation effect pattern designation command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c.

  The variation effect pattern designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 in the data output process in step S1600. . Then, the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 display a variation effect corresponding to the variation effect pattern designation command (variation effect pattern) in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), The second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), the audio output device 9, the panel lighting device 74, the frame lighting device 10, the panel driving device 75, and the like are executed.

  In step S1211-12, the sub CPU 130a sets the variable effect time, which is the effect time corresponding to the variable effect pattern determined in step S1211-1-10, in the variable effect timer counter of the sub RAM 130c. The CPU 130a sets the variation effect data corresponding to the variation effect pattern in the variation effect data storage area of the sub RAM 130c.

  The variable effect timer counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in step S1200. The sub CPU 130a can specify the remaining time of the variation effect, in other words, the time elapsed since the variation effect was started, by the variation effect timer counter.

  In step S1211-114, the sub CPU 130a performs a hold icon display update process. Specifically, based on the icon change scenario determined in the icon change notice determination process in step S1207, the display mode of the hold icon displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is changed. The display mode after the heel change is determined, the hold icon change designation command corresponding to this decision is specified, and the specified hold icon change designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c.

  The pending icon change designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140 in the data output process in step S1600. Then, the display mode of the hold icon is changed by the image control unit 140.

  In Step S1211-15, the sub CPU 130a performs the change icon display mode determination process. Specifically, based on the variation effect pattern determined in step S1211-1, whether or not to change the display mode of the variation icon displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and after the change. The display mode is determined, the variable icon designation command corresponding to the determination is identified, and the identified variable icon designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. When this process ends, the current variation effect pattern determination process ends.

  The variable icon designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140 in the data output process in step S1600. Then, the variation icon is displayed by the image control unit 140 in a display mode corresponding to the variation icon designation command.

  In step S1211-16, the sub CPU 130a displays special symbol variation display data for causing the first special symbol second display 80 or the second special symbol second display 81 to perform special symbol variation display (LED blinking). Is set in a predetermined processing area. As a result, when the special symbol variation display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S1500, and the created data is output in step S1600. The variable display on the second display 80 or the second special symbol second display 81 is started.

  In step S1211-1, the sub CPU 130a issues a special symbol variation display designation command for variably displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol in order to variably display the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Set to the send buffer.

  Note that the special symbol variation display designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140 in the data output process of step S1600. Then, the image control unit 140 performs the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the first special symbol variation display area DZ1 or the second special symbol variation display area DZ2.

(Variation production pattern determination table)
45 to 47 are diagrams showing a variation effect pattern determination table that is referred to when a variation effect pattern is determined. FIG. 45 shows the determination of the variation effect pattern for effect mode 1 that is referred to when the special symbol and the effect symbol 70a are displayed in a variable manner by entering a game ball into the first start opening 45 in the effect mode 1 (normal mode). FIG. 46 is a table for the effect mode 2 that is referred to when the special symbol and the effect symbol 70a are displayed in a variable manner by entering a game ball into the first start opening 45 in the effect mode 2 (MV mode). 47 is a variation effect pattern determination table, and FIG. 47 shows a determination of a variation effect pattern for the second start port that is referred to when the special symbol and the effect symbol 70a are displayed in a variable manner by entering a game ball into the second start port. It is a table.

  The variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 45 to 47 includes stop symbol data specified by the effect symbol designation command, a special symbol variation pattern identified by the variation pattern designation command, and a variation pattern designation command. The selection ratio based on the random effect pattern determination random number to be acquired is associated with a variation effect pattern that is a variation effect (including a variation display of the effect symbol) performed in response to the variation display of the special symbol.

  What is described as pseudo 0, pseudo 2, pseudo 3, pseudo 4 in () in the column of the fluctuation production content (variation production pattern) means “the number of times of execution of pseudo continuous notice”. “Continuous notice” means that during the change display of the special symbol corresponding to one big win lottery, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped and then changed again, and the change of the effect symbol 70a and the temporary stop are performed a plurality of times. This means a notice according to the variation mode to be performed. It should be noted that the number of pseudo consecutive times is 0 when the change of the effect symbol 70a and the temporary stop are performed only once, and the number of pseudo consecutive times is two when the change of the effect symbol 70a and the temporary stop are performed twice. Thus, the number of pseudo consecutive times is 3 when the variation of the effect symbol 70a and the temporary stop are performed three times, and the number of pseudo consecutive times is 4 when the variation of the effect symbol 70a and the temporary stop are performed four times. . Then, pseudo 0 has 0 pseudo-continuations, pseudo 2 has 2 pseudo-continuations, pseudo 3 has 3 pseudo-continuations, and pseudo 4 has 4 pseudo-continuations.

  Note that the number of pseudo consecutive times is executed only when the stop symbol data is the special symbol 10, the special symbol 11 or the special symbol 12, and if the pseudo consecutive number is executed four times, the probability variation is a big hit. It is fixed. In the present embodiment, the execution control board 130 (sub CPU 130a) side determines whether or not the pseudo continuous notice is executed and the pseudo continuous number of times, but the main control board 110 (main CPU 110a) side determines the execution control. You may make it notify to the board | substrate 130 (sub CPU130a). In addition, the pseudo-continuous notice is not executed when the time of the variation effect pattern is 20 seconds or less, but the pseudo-continuous notice is executed within a range of 2 to 3 times that is not determined to be a probable big hit. You may make it do.

  In the variation effect pattern determination table for the effect mode 1 (normal mode) shown in FIG. 45, the shortened variation effect (3 seconds) associated with the variation pattern 2 (short variation) and the variation pattern 3 (normal variation) are associated. Normal fluctuation short effect attached (10 seconds), Normal fluctuation long effect linked to fluctuation pattern 1 (normal fluctuation) (12 seconds), Special long fluctuation effect linked to fluctuation pattern 4 (normal reach) (20 Seconds) and normal reach production (20 seconds), character short SP reach production (35 seconds) linked to fluctuation patterns 5, 6, 11 and 12 (SP reach 1 and 2), music short SP reach production (35 seconds) And chance short SP reach production (35 seconds), character long SP reach production linked to fluctuation patterns 7 and 13 (SP reach 3) (40 seconds) Character short SPSP reach production (50 seconds) linked to music long SP reach production (40 seconds) and chance long SP reach production (40 seconds), variation patterns 8, 9, 14 and 15 (SPSP reach 1 and 2) And music short SPSP reach production (50 seconds), character long SPSP reach production (60 seconds), music long SPSP reach production (60 seconds), fluctuation pattern 17 ( There are 16 types of variation effect patterns such as a character short full rotation reach effect (90 seconds) linked to (full rotation reach).

  In the variation effect pattern determination table for the effect mode 2 (MV mode) shown in FIG. 46, the shortened variation effect (3 seconds) associated with the variation pattern 2 (shortening variation) and the variation pattern 3 (normal variation) are associated. Normal fluctuation short effect attached (10 seconds), Normal fluctuation long effect linked to fluctuation pattern 1 (normal fluctuation) (12 seconds), Special long fluctuation effect linked to fluctuation pattern 4 (normal reach) (20 Seconds) and normal reach production (20 seconds), music short SP reach production (35 seconds) and chance short SP reach production (35 seconds) linked to fluctuation patterns 5, 6, 11 and 12 (SP reach 1 and 2) , Music Long SP Reach Production (40 seconds) and Chance Long SP Reach Production (40 seconds) linked to Variation Patterns 7 and 13 (SP Reach 3) Music short SPSP reach effect (50 seconds) linked to the variation patterns 8, 9, 14 and 15 (SPSP reach 1 and 2), song long SPSP reach linked to the variation patterns 10 and 16 (SPSP reach 3) Twelve types of variation effect patterns are set, such as production (60 seconds) and variation pattern 17 (full rotation reach), a music short full rotation reach effect (90 seconds).

  The variation effect pattern determination table for the second start port shown in FIG. 47 has a shortened variation effect (3 seconds) associated with variation pattern 2 (shortened variation) and a normal associated with variation pattern 3 (normal variation). Fluctuating short production (10 seconds), Normal fluctuation long production (12 seconds) linked to fluctuation pattern 1 (normal fluctuation), Special long fluctuation production (20 seconds) linked to fluctuation pattern 4 (normal reach) and normal reach Production (20 seconds), Special Short Reach Production 1 (40 seconds), Special Short Reach Production 2 (40 seconds) and Special Short Reach Production 3 (40 seconds) linked to Fluctuation Patterns 7 and 13 (SP Reach 3) , Special long reach production 1 (60 seconds), special long reach production 2 (60 seconds) and special batters linked to fluctuation patterns 10 and 16 (SPSP reach 3) Gurichi effect 3 (60 seconds), the fluctuation pattern 17 (full rotation reach) 12 kinds such special full rotation reach demonstration that tied (90 seconds) of the variation performance pattern is set.

  In the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45, the expectation value (expected degree) in which the above-described music-based reach effect is larger than the above-described character-based reach effect is set to be higher. The character short SP reach production, the character long SP reach production, the character short SPSP reach production, the character long SPSP reach production, and the character short full rotation reach production are set in the variation production pattern determination table shown in FIGS. Because it is not done, it is a reach production dedicated to production mode 1.

  The music short full rotation reach effect set in the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 46 is not set in the change effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. It can be said.

  The special reach effects set in the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47 are not set in the change effect pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. It is an effect variation pattern dedicated to the variation display based on the entry of game balls. In addition, a pseudo-continuous notice is always executed for special reach production. In this way, in the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 47, the variation effect pattern is set so that it can be distinguished from the variation effect pattern of the variation display based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 45.

  For the chance short SP reach effect and the chance long short SP reach effect set in the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the stop symbol data is the special symbol 18 (losing) and the special symbol 14 (suddenly probable big hit). ) Is selected only in the case of. That is, the chance-based SP reach production can be said to be a dedicated variation production pattern for producing (speaking) whether or not a sudden probability variation jackpot is generated. It should be noted that the chance display reach determination is not set in the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47 because the probability display is not suddenly generated in the variation display based on the game ball entering the second start port 47.

  Also, in the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45, when the expected value (expected degree) that is a big hit is high, the music-type reach effect is more easily selected than the character-type reach effect, and the expected value (expected) The higher the degree), the easier the pseudo-continuous notice is executed. In the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 46, the pseudo-continuous notice is more easily executed as the expected value (expected degree) that is a big hit is higher, and the pseudo continuous notice is executed as the expected value (expected degree) that is a bigger hit is higher. Reach production with a large number of times is easily selected. Further, in the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47, the higher the expected value (expected degree) that is a big hit when the special short reach effects 1 to 3 are determined, the higher the special short reach effect 1 <the special short reach effect 2 <. The selection rate increases in the order of special short reach production, and the higher the expected value (expectation) that is a big hit when the special long reach production is determined, the higher the special long reach production 1 <special long reach production 2 <special long reach The selection rate is set to increase in the order of production 3.

(Preliminary effect determination process of effect control unit)
The notice effect determination process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a notice effect determination process in the effect control unit 130m.

  First, in step S1212-1, the sub CPU 130a selects the notice type determination table shown in FIG. 49, and in step S1212-2, the sub CPU 130a selects the variation stored in the variation pattern information storage area in step S1211-1. Obtain production pattern information. Note that the notice type determination table is stored in the sub-RAM 130c, and details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1212-3, the sub CPU 130a performs a notice effect type determination process. Specifically, a random number value for determining the notice type is acquired, the random number value for determining the notice type, the notice type determining table selected in Step S1212-1 and the variation effect pattern information acquired in Step S1212-2. Are determined, the notification type is determined according to the selection rate set in the notification type determination table, and the determined notification type is stored in the notification type information storage area.

  In step S1212-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the notice type is determined to be the symbol notice effect. If it is determined that the symbol notice effect has been determined (S1212-4: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1212-5. On the other hand, if it is determined that the symbol notice effect has not been determined (S1212-4: No), the process proceeds to step S1212-8.

  In step S1212-5, the sub CPU 130a selects the symbol notice mode determination table shown in FIG. 50, and in step S1212-6, the sub CPU 130a performs a symbol notice pattern determination process. Specifically, a random number value for determining the notice mode is acquired, the random number value for determining the notice mode, the symbol notice mode determining table selected in step S1212-5, and the variation effect pattern acquired in step S1212-2. Are determined, a symbol warning pattern (symbol warning mode) is determined according to the selection rate set in the symbol warning mode determination table, and the determined symbol warning pattern is stored in the warning pattern information storage area.

  In step S1212-7, the sub CPU 130a specifies a symbol notice pattern designation command corresponding to the determined symbol notice pattern, and sets the identified symbol notice pattern designation command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. When this process ends, the current notice effect determination process ends.

  Note that the symbol notice pattern designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 in the data output process in step S1600. . Then, the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 display the symbol preview effect corresponding to the symbol preview pattern designation command (variation effect pattern) in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). The second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), the sound output device 9, the panel lighting device 74, the frame lighting device 10, the panel driving device 75, and the like are executed.

  In step S1212-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the notice type is determined to be the music notice effect. If it is determined that the music preview effect has been determined (S1212-8: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1212-9. On the other hand, if it is determined that the music preview effect has not been determined (S1212-8: No), the process proceeds to step S1212-14.

  In step S1212-9, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the result of the variable display of the special symbol (the effect symbol 70a) is a big hit. If it is determined that the game is a big hit (S1212-9: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1212-21. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot will not be reached (S1212-9: No), the process proceeds to step S1212-10.

  In step S1212-10, the sub CPU 130a selects the music preview mode determination table for loss shown in FIG. 53, and in step S1212-21, the sub CPU 130a selects the music preview mode determination table for jackpot shown in FIG. To do. Details of the music notice mode determination table in FIGS. 53 and 54 will be described later.

  In step S1212-2, the sub CPU 130a performs music notice pattern determination processing. More specifically, a random number value for determining the notice mode is acquired, the random number value for determining the notice mode is compared with the music notice mode determining table selected in the above step S1212-10 or step S1212-11, and the music notice is determined. A music preview pattern (music preview mode) is determined according to the selection rate set in the mode determination table, and the determined music preview pattern is stored in the preview pattern information storage area.

  In step S1212-21, the sub CPU 130a specifies a music notice pattern designating command corresponding to the determined music notice pattern, and sets the specified music notice pattern designating command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. When this process ends, the current notice effect determination process ends.

  Note that the music preview pattern designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 in the data output process of step S1600. . Then, the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 display the music preview effect corresponding to the music preview pattern designation command (variation effect pattern) in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). The second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), the sound output device 9, the panel lighting device 74, the frame lighting device 10, the panel driving device 75, and the like are executed.

  In step S1212-2, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the notice type is determined to be the step-up notice effect. If it is determined that the step-up notice effect has been determined (S1212-14: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1212-15. On the other hand, if it is determined that the step-up notice effect has not been determined (S1212-14: No), the current notice effect determination process ends.

  In step S1212-15, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the result of the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) is a big hit. If it is determined that the game will be a big hit (S1212-15: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1212-17. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot will not be reached (S1212-15: No), the process proceeds to step S1212-16.

  In step S1212-16, the sub CPU 130a selects the lost step-up notice mode determination table shown in FIG. 60 (a), and in step S1212-17, the sub CPU 130a selects the jackpot step shown in FIG. 60 (b). Select the advance notice mode determination table. Details of the step-up notice mode determination table in FIG. 60 will be described later.

  In step S1212-21, the sub CPU 130a performs step-up notice pattern determination processing. Specifically, the random number value for determining the notice mode is acquired, the random number value for determining the notice mode is collated with the step-up notice mode determining table selected in Step S1212-16 or Step S1212-17, A step-up notice pattern (step-up notice mode) is determined according to the selection rate set in the up-notice form determination table, and the determined step-up notice pattern is stored in the notice pattern information storage area.

  In step S1212-21, the sub CPU 130a identifies a step up notice pattern designation command corresponding to the determined step up notice pattern, and sets the identified step up notice pattern designation command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. When this process ends, the current notice effect determination process ends.

  Note that the step-up notice pattern designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 in the data output process of step S1600. The Then, the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 generate a step-up notice effect corresponding to the step-up notice pattern designation command (variation effect pattern) in the first image display device 70 (main Liquid crystal), second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), audio output device 9, panel lighting device 74, frame lighting device 10, panel driving device 75, and the like.

(Notice type determination table)
FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a notice type determination table that is referred to when the notice type is determined in the notice effect type determination process in step S1212-3. The notice type determination table corresponds to the change effect pattern, the selection rate based on the random number for determining the notice type acquired when the notice type is determined, and the notice type of the notice effect executed during the change effect using the change effect pattern. It is attached.

When the shortened variation effect is determined as the variation effect pattern, one of no notice, music notice effect, and step-up notice effect is selected according to the set selection rate, and the symbol notice effect is selected. There is no.
When the normal variation short effect is determined as the variation effect pattern, any one of no notice, symbol notice effect, music notice effect, and step-up notice effect is selected according to the set selection rate.
When the normal variation long effect is determined as the variation effect pattern, any one of no notice, symbol notice effect, music notice effect, and step-up notice effect is selected according to the set selection rate.

When the normal reach effect is determined as the variation effect pattern, any of no notice, symbol notice effect, and music notice effect is selected according to the set selection rate, and the step-up notice effect is not selected.
When the special long variation effect is determined as the variation effect pattern, the music notice effect or the step-up notice effect is selected according to the set selection rate, and no notice and symbol notice effect are not selected. . In other words, it can be said that the notice effect is always executed.

If the character-based reach production (character short SP reach production, character long SP reach production, character short SPSP reach production, character long SPSP reach production, character short full rotation reach production) is determined as the variation production pattern, The symbol notice effect is always selected, and no notice, music notice effect, and step-up notice effect are not selected.
In the case where the music system reach production (music short SP reach production, music long SP reach production, music short SPSP reach production, music long SPSP reach production, music short full rotation reach production) is determined as the variation production pattern, The music notice effect is always selected, and no notice, symbol notice effect, and step-up notice effect are not selected.

If the chance-type reach production (chance short SP reach production, chance long SP reach production) is determined as the variation production pattern, the step-up notice production is always selected, and there is no notice, design notice production, and music notice production. Is never selected.
When the special reach effect is determined as the variation effect pattern, the symbol notice effect is always selected, and the no notice, music notice effect, and step-up notice effect are not selected.

  Thus, it can be said that the notice effect is determined based on the stop symbol data and the variation pattern as a result of the jackpot lottery of the special symbol as a result of the special effect jackpot lottery. In addition, although the availability or the selection rate of the notice effect is biased for each variation effect pattern, it may be executed equally without being biased, or another bias method may be used.

(Design notice mode decision table)
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a symbol advance notice mode determination table that is referred to when the symbol advance notice pattern is determined in the symbol advance notice pattern determination process in step S1212-6. In the symbol announcement mode determination table, the variation effect pattern, the selection rate based on the random number value for announcement mode determination acquired when the symbol announcement pattern is determined, and the type of the symbol announcement pattern are associated with each other.

  The types of symbol notice pattern are set from symbol notice pattern 1 to symbol notice pattern 12, and the effect symbol that is stopped (temporarily stopped or permanently stopped) is displayed on the display unit of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). It is a notice effect that suggests type, color, etc.

The “symbol notice pattern 1” is a notice effect that displays suggestion information that suggests the type of the left symbol that is stopped and displayed in the left area of the display unit of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal).
The “symbol notice pattern 2” is a notice effect that displays suggestion information that suggests the type of the right symbol that is stopped and displayed in the right region of the display unit of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal).
The “symbol notice pattern 3” is a notice effect that displays suggestion information that suggests the type of medium symbol that is stopped and displayed in the central area of the display unit of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal).

The “symbol notice pattern 4” indicates the color of the left symbol that is stopped and displayed in the left area of the display unit of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the color of the right symbol that is stopped and displayed in the right area. This is a notice effect that displays suggestion information.
The “symbol notice pattern 5” indicates the type of the left symbol that is stopped and displayed in the left area of the display unit of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the color of the right symbol that is stopped and displayed in the right area. This is a notice effect that displays suggestion information.
The “symbol notice pattern 6” suggests the type of the left symbol that is stopped and displayed in the left area of the display unit of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and obscure the middle symbol that is stopped and displayed in the central area. This is a notice effect that displays suggestion information.

The “symbol notice pattern 7” indicates the type of the left symbol that is stopped and displayed in the left area of the display unit of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the color of the middle symbol that is stopped and displayed in the central area. This is a notice effect that displays suggestion information.
The “symbol notice pattern 8” is a type of the left symbol that is stopped and displayed in the left area of the display unit of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the middle symbol that is stopped and displayed in the center area generates a pseudo continuous notice. It is a notice effect which displays suggestion information which suggests that it is a pseudo-continuous pattern to be made.
The “symbol notice pattern 9” indicates the middle symbol that is stopped and displayed in the central area of the display unit of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) in an ambiguous manner, and the type of the right symbol that is stopped and displayed in the right area. This is a notice effect that displays suggestion information.

The “symbol notice pattern 10” indicates the color of the middle symbol that is stopped and displayed in the central area of the display unit of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the type of right symbol that is stopped and displayed in the right area. This is a notice effect that displays suggestion information.
The “symbol notice pattern 11” indicates that the middle symbol that is stopped and displayed in the central area of the display unit of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is a pseudo-continuous symbol that generates a pseudo continuous notice, and is This is a notice effect that displays suggestion information that suggests the type of right symbol that is stopped and displayed in the area.
The “symbol preview pattern 12” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol displayed in the left area of the display unit of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the middle symbol stopped and displayed in the central area, and stopped in the right area. This is a notice effect that displays suggestion information that suggests the right design.

  In addition, as a feature of the symbol notice mode determination table, the higher the expectation that the variation display (variation production pattern) of the special symbol (production design 70a) will be a big hit (special result mode), the more symbols are suggested. A symbol advance notice pattern in which a symbol to be stopped and displayed is more clearly suggested as the expectation level that the change display (variation effect pattern) of the special symbol (the effect symbol 70a) becomes a big hit (special result mode) is high. Is easier to select. In addition, since the symbol notice pattern 12 is selected only when the full rotation reach effect is executed, it can be said that it is a notice effect that confirms the jackpot.

  According to the feature of the symbol notice mode determination table, the player is relieved by the number of stop symbols suggested by the suggestion information of the symbol notice effect and the content of the suggestion information. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation for the symbol notice effect can be effectively obtained, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Example of design notice effect)
51 and 52 are diagrams showing a notice pattern and an example of an effect of a symbol notice effect. Specifically, FIG. 51 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect of the symbol notice effect when the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is executed by the variation effect pattern in which the reach does not occur, and FIG. 52 is a variation in which the reach occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the symbol notice effect in case the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 70a is performed by an effect pattern.

First, FIG. 51 will be described.
FIG. 51A is a timing chart of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a when no reach occurs.
In the variation display of the effect symbol 70a, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the left region, the central region, and the right region of the display unit of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) start the variable display at the timing T0. .

  Then, the left symbol temporarily stops in the left region of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) at a timing T2 after a timing T1 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. The right design temporarily stops in the right region of the display unit of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) at the timing of T4. At this time, the left symbol and the right symbol are different types of symbols, and no reach has occurred.

  Thereafter, the middle symbol temporarily stops in the central area of the display section of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) at the timing T6, and the left area of the display section of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) at the timing T7. In the center area and the right area, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped at this time, and the symbols are displayed until T8 is reached.

Hereinafter, the symbol notice effect will be described.
FIG. 51B is a timing chart of the symbol notice pattern 1 executed during the variable display in which the reach of FIG.
In the symbol announcement effect by the symbol announcement pattern 1, the left symbol suggestion information suggesting the left symbol stopped and displayed in the left region of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) at the timing of T1 is displayed in the left region. Then, the display of the left symbol suggestion information ends at the timing of T2.

FIG. 51 (c) is a timing chart of the symbol notice pattern 2 executed during the variable display in which the reach of (a) does not occur.
In the symbol announcement effect by the symbol announcement pattern 2, the right symbol suggestion information indicating the right symbol stopped and displayed in the right region of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) at the timing of T1 is displayed in the right region. Then, the display of the right symbol suggestion information ends at the timing of T4.

FIG. 51D is a timing chart of the symbol notice pattern 3 executed during the variable display in which the reach in FIG.
In the symbol notice effect by the symbol notice pattern 3, middle symbol suggestion information that suggests a middle symbol that is stopped and displayed in the central region of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) at the timing of T1 is displayed in the central region. And the display of middle symbol suggestion information is complete | finished at the timing of T6.

FIG. 51E is a timing chart of the symbol notice patterns 4 and 5 executed during the variable display in which the reach of FIG.
The symbol notice effect by the symbol notice patterns 4 and 5 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol suggestion information indicating the left symbol displayed in the left area of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) at the timing of T1 and in the right area. The right symbol suggestion information indicating the right symbol is displayed in the left region and the right region, respectively. Then, the display of the left symbol suggestion information ends at the timing of T2, and the display of the right symbol suggestion information ends at the timing of T4.

FIG. 51 (f) is a timing chart of the symbol notice patterns 6, 7, and 8 executed during the variable display in which the reach of (a) does not occur.
The symbol notice effect by the symbol notice patterns 6, 7 and 8 is stopped in the center area and the left symbol suggestion information suggesting the left symbol displayed in the left area of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) at the timing of T1. The middle symbol suggestion information suggesting the displayed middle symbol is displayed in the left region and the central region, respectively. Then, the display of the left symbol suggestion information ends at the timing of T2, and the display of the middle symbol suggestion information ends at the timing of T6.

FIG. 51 (g) is a timing chart of the symbol notice patterns 9, 10 and 11 executed during the variable display in which the reach of (a) does not occur.
The symbol notice effect by the symbol notice patterns 9, 10 and 11 is stopped in the right side area and the middle symbol suggestion information suggesting the middle symbol that is stopped and displayed in the central area of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) at the timing of T1. Right symbol suggestion information indicating the right symbol to be displayed is displayed in the center region and the right region, respectively. Thereafter, the display of the right symbol suggestion information ends at the timing of T4, and the display of the middle symbol suggestion information ends at the timing of T6.

FIG. 51 (h) is a diagram showing an example of effect by the symbol notice pattern 9.
At the timing of T1, as shown in (h1), the “?” Image that vaguely suggests the middle symbol that is stopped and displayed in the central area of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the right symbol that is stopped and displayed in the right area “7” images suggesting the above are displayed in the center area and the right area, respectively. At the timing of T2, the left symbol temporarily stops as shown in (h2), but the “?” Image and the “7” image do not change. At the timing of T4, as shown in (h3), the right symbol is temporarily stopped and the display of the “7” image is ended. At the timing of T6, as shown in (h4), the middle symbol is temporarily stopped and the display of the “?” Image is ended. After that, all symbols are fixedly displayed as shown in (h5) at the timing of T7.

Next, FIG. 52 will be described.
FIG. 51A is a timing chart of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a when reach occurs.
In the variation display of the effect symbol 70a, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the left region, the central region, and the right region of the display unit of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) start the variable display at the timing T0. .

  Then, the left symbol temporarily stops in the left region of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) at a timing T2 after a timing T1 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. The right design temporarily stops in the right region of the display unit of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) at the timing of T4. At this time, the left symbol and the right symbol are the same symbol, and reach occurs.

  Then, a predetermined reach effect is executed between T5 and T6, the middle symbol is temporarily stopped in the central area of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) at the timing of T6, and the first image is displayed at the timing of T7. The left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped in the left region, the central region, and the right region of the display unit of the device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the symbol is displayed until T8.

  Hereinafter, the symbol notice effect will be described, but (b), (c), and (e) are the same as (b), (c), and (e) in FIG.

FIG. 52D is a timing chart of the symbol notice pattern 3 executed during the variable display in which the reach of FIG.
In the symbol notice effect by the symbol notice pattern 3, middle symbol suggestion information that suggests a middle symbol that is stopped and displayed in the central region of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) at the timing of T1 is displayed in the central region. Then, the display of the middle symbol suggestion information is ended although the middle symbol is not stopped at the timing of T5 when the reach effect is started. Note that the display of the middle symbol suggestion information may be terminated at the timing of T4 when the reach occurs.

FIG. 52 (f) is a timing chart of the symbol notice patterns 6, 7, and 8 executed during the variable display in which the reach of (a) occurs.
The symbol notice effect by the symbol notice patterns 6, 7 and 8 is stopped in the center area and the left symbol suggestion information suggesting the left symbol displayed in the left area of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) at the timing of T1. The middle symbol suggestion information suggesting the displayed middle symbol is displayed in the left region and the central region, respectively. Then, the display of the left symbol suggestion information ends at the timing of T2, and the display of the middle symbol suggestion information ends at the timing of T5 when the reach effect is started even though the middle symbol is not stopped. Note that the display of the middle symbol suggestion information may be terminated at the timing of T4 when the reach occurs.

FIG. 52 (g) is a timing chart of the symbol notice patterns 9, 10, and 11 executed during the variable display in which the reach of (a) occurs.
The symbol notice effect by the symbol notice patterns 9, 10 and 11 is stopped in the right side area and the middle symbol suggestion information suggesting the middle symbol that is stopped and displayed in the central area of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) at the timing of T1. Right symbol suggestion information indicating the right symbol to be displayed is displayed in the center region and the right region, respectively. Thereafter, the display of the right symbol suggestion information ends at the timing of T4, and the display of the middle symbol suggestion information ends at the timing of T5 when the reach effect is started even though the middle symbol is not stopped. Note that the display of the middle symbol suggestion information may be terminated at the timing of T4 when the reach occurs.

FIG. 52 (h) is a timing chart of the symbol notice pattern 12 executed during the variable display in which (a) reach occurs.
The symbol notice effect by the symbol notice pattern 12 is stopped and displayed in the center area and the left symbol suggestion information that suggests the left symbol that is stopped and displayed in the left area of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) at the timing of T1. The middle symbol suggestion information that suggests the middle symbol and the right symbol suggestion information that suggests the right symbol that is stopped and displayed in the right area are the left symbol stop position, the middle symbol stop position, and the right symbol stop position, respectively. Is displayed. The display of the left symbol suggestion information ends at the timing of T2, the display of the right symbol suggestion information ends at the timing of T4, and the middle symbol does not stop at the timing of T5 when the reach effect is started. The display of medium symbol suggestion information ends. Note that the display of the middle symbol suggestion information may be terminated at the timing of T4 when the reach occurs.

  In this way, in the case of the symbol advance notice pattern that displays the middle symbol suggestion information that suggests the middle symbol that is stopped and displayed at the end, if the reach does not occur, the middle symbol suggestion information is displayed until the middle symbol is stopped and displayed. When the reach occurs, the middle symbol suggestion information is displayed only until the start of the reach production, so that the middle symbol suggestion information does not hinder the reach production, It is possible to suppress the decay of the fun of the game.

  Each symbol suggestion information can also be displayed on the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), and in this case, the reach effect executed by the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Is no longer disturbed by the symbol suggestion information, so the middle symbol suggestion information may be displayed until the middle symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, all the symbol suggestion information may be displayed until the reach effect is finished.

FIG. 52 (i) is a diagram showing an example of the effect by the symbol notice pattern 12.
At the timing of T1, as shown in (i1), the “7” image indicating the left symbol stopped and displayed in the left region of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the middle symbol stopped and displayed in the central region are displayed. The suggested “7” image and the “7” image suggesting the right design stopped and displayed in the right region are displayed in the left region, the center region, and the right region, respectively. At the timing of T2, as shown in (i2), the left symbol is temporarily stopped, and the display of the “7” image in the left region ends. At the timing of T4, as shown in (i3), the right symbol is temporarily stopped and the display of the “7” image in the right region is ended. At the timing of T5, as shown in (i4), the display of the “7” image in the central area ends with the start of the reach effect. At the timing of T6, all symbols are temporarily stopped as shown in (i5), and at the timing of T7, as shown in (i6), all symbols are confirmed and displayed as a big win.

(Music notice mode determination table)
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a losing music notice mode determining table that is referred to when determining a music notice pattern for a music notice effect in the music notice pattern determining process in step S1212-12. FIG. It is a figure which shows the music notice mode determination table for jackpots referred when determining the music notice pattern of a music notice effect in the music notice pattern determination process of step S1212-2.

  Note that the music preview effect is at least an effect display displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and / or the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) and a music output from the audio output device 9. It is a notice effect that suggests the degree of expectation that will be a big hit (special result mode). In addition, the music preview effect can be rephrased as a specific effect.

  The lost song preview mode determination table of FIG. 53 and the jackpot music preview mode determination table of FIG. 54 include a variation effect pattern and a selection rate based on a random number value for determining the preview mode acquired when determining the track preview pattern. The type of the music preview pattern is associated. Note that the types of the music preview pattern are set from the music preview pattern 1 to the music preview pattern 28, and there are three types of music A to C used.

  In the following explanations, the words “Gase” and “Book” will appear, but “Gase” means that the music preview effect will not develop after that, and “Book” means that the song preview effect will develop after that. Means.

  “Music preview pattern 1” executes a gasse indication effect that only expects a music effect to be executed, which suggests that there is a possibility that a music-related reach effect may be executed during the variation display of the effect symbol 70a. This is a notice effect. The music effect is an effect composed of a combination of the development suggestion effect display and any of the music pieces A to C.

  “Music notice pattern 2” is a gasses composed of a combination of the display of the development suggestion effect and the output of the song A after executing the present sign effect that the music effect is determined to be executed during the variation display of the effect symbol 70a. This is a notice effect for executing the first music effect. That is, the music effect is executed once and one type of music (music A) is output.

  The “song notice pattern 3” is a notice effect that executes the second music effect that is a combination of the display of the development suggestion effect and the output of the song B after the sign effect is executed during the variation display of the effect symbol 70a. . That is, the music effect is executed once and one type of music (music B) is output.

  The “song notice pattern 4” is a notice effect that executes the third sign effect of the gasse composed of a combination of the display of the development suggestion effect and the output of the song C after the real sign effect is executed during the variation display of the effect symbol 70a. is there. That is, the music effect is executed once and one type of music (music C) is output.

  The “music preview pattern 5” is a gassure reach effect (expansion effect and development effect) that only allows the development of a music-related reach effect after executing the present sign effect and the first music effect during the variation display of the effect symbol 70a. This is a notice effect that executes a reach reach effect). That is, the music effect is executed once and one type of music (music A) is output.

  The “song notice pattern 6” is a notice effect that executes the gas leaches sign effect after executing the main sign effect and the second music effect during the variation display of the effect symbol 70a. That is, the music effect is executed once and one type of music (music B) is output.

  The “song notice pattern 7” is a notice effect that executes the gassyrich predictive effect after executing the present sign effect and the third music effect during the variation display of the effect symbol 70a. That is, the music effect is executed once and one type of music (music C) is output.

  The “song notice pattern 8” is a notice effect in which the reach sign effect is executed after the main sign effect and the first music effect are executed during the variation display of the effect symbol 70a. That is, the music effect is executed once and one type of music (music A) is output.

  The “music notice pattern 9” is a notice effect in which the reach indication effect is executed after the main sign effect and the second music effect are executed during the variation display of the effect symbol 70a. That is, the music effect is executed once and one type of music (music B) is output.

  The “music notice pattern 10” is a notice effect in which the reach indication effect is executed after the main indication effect and the third music effect are executed during the variation display of the effect symbol 70a. That is, the music effect is executed once and one type of music (music C) is output.

  The “song notice pattern 11” executes the main sign effect and the Gasse first music effect during the variation display of the effect design 70a, and executes the pseudo-continuous effect that produces the fact that the pseudo continuous notice has been successfully generated. It is a notice effect for executing the first music effect and the present reach sign effect. That is, although the music effect is executed twice, only one type of (music A) is output.

  The “music notice pattern 12” is a notice to execute the second sign effect and the second reach sign effect after executing the pseudo sign effect and the pseudo second effect effect during the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 70a. Production. That is, although the music effect is executed twice, only one type of (music B) is output.

  The “music notice pattern 13” is a notice that the main sign effect and the Gasse third music effect are executed during the variation display of the effect symbol 70a, and the third music effect and the reach predictive effect are executed after the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. Production. In other words, the music effect is executed twice, but only one type (music C) is output.

  The “music notice pattern 14” is a notice that executes the main sign effect and the first gasset music effect during the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 70a, and executes the second music effect and the reach reach effect after executing the pseudo-continuous effect. Production. That is, the music effect is executed twice and two types of music (music A and B) are output.

  The “music notice pattern 15” is a notice that the main sign effect and the second music effect are performed during the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 70a, and the third music effect and the reach reach effect are executed after the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. Production. That is, the music effect is executed twice, and two types of music (music B and C) are output.

  The “music notice pattern 16” is a notice that the main sign effect and the Gasse third music effect are executed during the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 70a, and the first music effect and the reach sign effect are executed after the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. Production. That is, the music effect is executed twice and two types of music (music C and A) are output.

  The “music notice pattern 17” executes the main sign effect, the first music composition effect and the pseudo-continuous effect during the variation display of the effect design 70a, and then executes the first music effect effect and the pseudo-continuous effect. This is a notice effect that executes the first music effect and the reach sign effect. That is, although the music effect is executed three times, only one type of music (music A) is output.

  The “song notice pattern 18” performs the main sign effect, the gasse second music effect, and the pseudo-continuous effect during the variation display of the effect symbol 70a, and then executes the gase second music effect and the pseudo-continuous effect. This is a notice effect for executing the second music effect and the reach sign effect. That is, although the music effect is executed three times, only one type of music (music B) is output.

  The “music notice pattern 19” executes the main sign effect, the Gase third music effect, and the pseudo-continuous effect during the variation display of the effect symbol 70a, and then executes the Gase third music effect and the pseudo-continuous effect. This is a notice effect for executing the third music effect and the reach sign effect. That is, although the music effect is executed three times, only one type of music (music C) is output.

  The “song preview pattern 20” executes the main sign effect, the first gaze music effect, and the pseudo-continuous effect during the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 70a, and then executes the first gaze music effect and the pseudo-continuous effect. This is a notice effect for executing the second music effect and the reach sign effect. That is, the music effect is executed three times and two types of music (music A and B) are output, but the output of the second type of music (music B) is delayed.

  The “music notice pattern 21” executes the main sign effect, the Gase second music effect, and the pseudo-continuous effect during the variation display of the effect symbol 70a, and then executes the Gase second music effect and the pseudo-continuous effect. This is a notice effect for executing the third music effect and the reach sign effect. In other words, the music effect is executed three times and two types of music (music B and C) are output, but the output of the second type of music (music C) is delayed.

  The “song preview pattern 22” executes the main sign effect, the gasse third music effect, and the pseudo-continuous effect during the variation display of the effect symbol 70a, and then executes the gase third music effect and the pseudo-continuous effect. This is a notice effect that executes the first music effect and the reach sign effect. That is, the music effect is executed three times and two types of music (music C, A) are output, but the output of the second type of music (music A) is delayed.

  The “song notice pattern 23” executes the main sign effect, the gasse first music effect, and the pseudo-continuous effect during the variation display of the effect symbol 70a, and then executes the gasse second music effect and the pseudo-continuous effect. This is a notice effect for executing the second music effect and the reach sign effect. That is, the music effect is executed three times and two types of music (music A and B) are output, but the output of the second type of music (music B) is at an early timing.

  The “song notice pattern 24” executes the main sign effect, the gasse second music effect, and the pseudo-continuous effect during the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 70a, and then executes the gase third music effect and the pseudo-continuous effect. This is a notice effect for executing the third music effect and the reach sign effect. That is, the music effect is executed three times and two types of music (music B, C) are output, but the output of the second type of music (music B) is at an early timing.

  The “music notice pattern 25” executes the main sign effect, the Gase third music effect, and the pseudo-continuous effect during the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 70a, and then executes the Gase first music effect and the pseudo-continuous effect. This is a notice effect that executes the first music effect and the reach sign effect. That is, the music effect is executed three times and two types of music (music C and A) are output, but the output of the second type of music (A) is at an early timing.

  The “music notice pattern 26” executes the main sign effect, the first gaze music effect, and the pseudo-continuous effect during the variation display of the effect symbol 70a, and then executes the second sound effect and the pseudo-continuous effect. It is a notice effect that executes the third music effect and the reach sign effect of development confirmation. That is, the music effect is executed three times and three types of music (music A, B, and C) are output.

  The “song notice pattern 27” executes the main sign effect, the gasse second music effect, and the pseudo-continuous effect during the variation display of the effect symbol 70a, and then executes the gasse third music effect and the pseudo-continuous effect. This is a notice effect that executes the first music effect and the reach sign effect. That is, the music effect is executed three times and three types of music (music B, C, A) are output.

  The “music notice pattern 28” executes the main sign effect, the Gase third music effect, and the pseudo-continuous effect during the variation display of the effect symbol 70a, and then executes the Gase first music effect and the pseudo-continuous effect. This is a notice effect that executes the first music effect and the reach sign effect. That is, the music effect is executed three times and three types of music (music C, A, B) are output.

  As a first feature of the music notice mode determination table shown in FIG. 53 and FIG. 54, one kind of music is performed by executing one music effect among the music notice effects (specific effects) that may be a big hit. When the output music preview patterns 8 to 10 are executed, the expectation (reliability) that is a big hit in the order of the music preview pattern 8 <music preview pattern 9 <music preview pattern 10 is set to be higher. ing. That is, the output music has a high expectation (reliability) that is a big hit in the order of music A <music B <music C. Thereby, a player comes to be interested in the kind of the music to be output, and the interest regarding the music preview effect is improved.

  As a second feature of the music notice mode determination table shown in FIG. 53 and FIG. 54, two kinds of music effects are executed and one kind of music is executed among the music notice effects (specific effects) that may be a big hit. When the music preview patterns 11 to 13 to be output are executed, the expectation (reliability) that is a big hit in the order of the music preview pattern 11 <music preview pattern 12 <music preview pattern <13 is set to be higher. Has been. That is, the output music has a high expectation (reliability) that is a big hit in the order of music A <music B <music C. Thereby, a player comes to be interested in the kind of the music to be output, and the interest regarding the music preview effect is improved.

  As a third feature of the music notice mode determination table shown in FIG. 53 and FIG. 54, two kinds of music are performed by executing two music effects among the music notice effects (specific effects) that may be a big hit. When the music preview patterns 14 to 16 to be output are executed, the expectation level (reliability) that is a big hit in the order of the music preview pattern 14 <music preview pattern 15 <music preview pattern 16 is set to be higher. ing. That is, the expectation level (reliability) that becomes a big hit in the order of music A <music B <music C is increased for the music output in the first music production. Thereby, a player comes to be interested in the kind of the music to be output, and the interest regarding the music preview effect is improved.

  As a fourth feature of the music notice mode determination table shown in FIG. 53 and FIG. 54, the music notice patterns 11 to 11 in which two music effects are executed among the music notice effects (specific effects) that may be a big hit. When 16 is executed, the degree of expectation (reliability) that the music preview patterns 14 to 16 in which two types of music are output is larger than the music preview patterns 11 to 13 in which only one type of music is output. Is set to be high. That is, the degree of expectation (reliability) that is a big hit is higher when two types of music are output than when only one type of music is output. Thereby, the player is expected to output many kinds of music and has a strong interest in the music preview effect, and the interest of the game is improved.

  As a fifth feature of the music notice mode determination table shown in FIG. 53 and FIG. 54, among the music notice effects (specific effects) that can be a big hit, the music notice patterns 17 to 17 in which three music effects are executed. When 28 is executed, the expectation that the music preview patterns 20 to 25 in which two types of music are output is higher than the music preview patterns 17 to 19 in which only one type of music is output, Expectation (reliability) that the jackpot pattern 26-28 in which three types of music are output is higher than the music preview pattern 20-25 in which only two types of music are output. Thereby, the player is expected to output many kinds of music and has a strong interest in the music preview effect, and the interest of the game is improved.

  As a sixth feature of the music notice mode determination table shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, three kinds of music effects are executed among the music notice effects (specific effects) that may be a big hit, but two kinds of music When the music preview patterns 20 to 25 that are only output are executed, the second kind of music production is performed in the second music production than the music notice patterns 20 to 22 in which the second kind of music is outputted in the third music production. The expectation level (reliability) that the jackpot pattern 23-25 from which the music is output becomes a big hit becomes higher. Thereby, the player is expected to output different types of music at an early stage and has a strong interest in the music preview effect, and the interest of the game is improved.

  As a seventh feature of the music notice mode determination table shown in FIG. 53 and FIG. 54, among the music notice effects (specific effects) that may be a big hit, the music notice patterns 8 to 8 in which the music effect is executed only once Expectation (reliability) that the music preview patterns 11 to 16 in which the music effect is executed twice than 10 is a big hit, the music is higher than the music preview patterns 11 to 16 in which the music effect is executed only twice. The degree of expectation (reliability) that the jackpot pattern 17 to 28 in which the performance is executed three times is a big hit becomes higher. Accordingly, the player is expected to perform a large number of music effects, and has a strong interest in the music notice effect, so that the interest of the game is improved.

(Example of music preview effect)
55 to 59 are diagrams showing a notice pattern and an example of a music notice effect. Specifically, FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a music preview effect in which a music effect described later is executed only once, and FIGS. 56 and 57 show a music preview effect in which a music effect described later is executed twice. 58 and 59 are diagrams showing a music notice effect in which a music effect to be described later is executed three times.

First, FIG. 55 will be described.
FIG. 55A is a timing chart of the music preview pattern 1.
At the timing of T0, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the gasse sign effect are started. Note that the gasse sign effect is a notice effect that only expects (implies) the possibility that a music effect, which will be described later, is executed. Thereafter, the gasse sign effect is terminated at the timing of T1, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T2, and the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped until the timing of T3. As described above, in the music preview pattern 1, the music effect is not executed even once.

FIG. 55 (b) is a timing chart of the music preview patterns 2-4.
The change display of the effect symbol 70a and the present sign effect are started at the timing T0. The sign effect is a notice effect that confirms that the music effect is executed. Thereafter, the display of the development suggestion effect and the gasse music effect composed of any combination of the music pieces A to C are executed at the timing of T1. Note that the gasse music production is a non-developed notice production that is expected to develop into a reach sign production. Then, the gasse music effect is finished at the timing of T4, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T5, and the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped until the timing of T6. Thus, in the music notice patterns 2 to 4, the music effect is executed only once.

FIG. 55 (c) is a timing chart of the music preview patterns 5-7.
The change display of the effect symbol 70a and the present sign effect are started at the timing T0. Thereafter, the present music effect including a combination of the display of the development suggestion effect and the music A to C is executed at the timing of T1. In addition, this music production | presentation is a notice production which the development to a reach sign production is decided. Then, at the timing of T4, a gassure reach sign effect composed of a development effect and a reach effect is executed. In addition, the gasreach sign production is a notice development that does not develop enough to expect the development of a music-based reach production. Thereafter, the gasuleach sign effect is terminated at the timing of T7, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T8, and the effect symbol 70a is permanently stopped until the timing of T9. As described above, in the music preview patterns 5 to 7, the music effect is executed only once.

FIG. 55 (d) is a timing chart of the music preview patterns 8-10.
The change display of the effect symbol 70a and the main sign effect are started at the timing of T0, and the main musical effect effect including a combination of the display of the development suggestion effect and the music A to C is executed at the timing of T1. Then, at the timing of T4, the present reach sign effect comprising the development effect and the reach effect is executed. The reach indication effect is a notice effect in which the development of a music-type reach effect is finalized. Thereafter, the reach effect is started at the timing of T7, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T10, and the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped until the timing of T11. As described above, in the music preview patterns 8 to 10, the music effect is executed only once.

FIG. 55 (e) is a diagram showing an example effect produced by the music preview pattern 8.
FIG. 55 (e1) is an example of an effect during the sign effect. Here, the effect image G1 is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the character information (“chansu?”) G2 is displayed on the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). Then, the development effect image (window) G3 shown in FIG. 55 (e2) is formed by the displayed effect image G1. Note that, in the case of the gaze indication effect, the development suggestion image (window) G3 is not formed, and the effect image G1 and the character information G2 disappear.

  FIG. 55 (e2) is an example of the production of the first music effect. Here, the intro (introduction) portion of the music A is output from the audio output device 9, and the development suggestion image G3 displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is enlarged in accordance with the rhythm of the music A. To produce a full screen. In addition, the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) displays history information (“Song A”) G4 indicating (notifying) the player of the music output during the music preview effect. In the case of the first music production effect, the development suggestion image G3 disappears without becoming a full screen.

  FIG. 55 (e3) and FIG. 55 (e4) are examples of effects of the present reach sign effect. Here, a development effect is performed in which character information (“Yosha! Yaruzo!”) Indicating development is displayed on the development suggestion image G3 displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and then the production is performed. A reach squeak effect is performed that expects to be reached using the symbol 70a. Further, the history information G4 remains displayed on the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). Note that the music notice effect by the music notice pattern 8 corresponds to the effects shown in FIGS. 55 (e1) to (e4), but may also be shown in FIGS. 55 (e1) to (e3), or FIGS. 55 (e1) to (e5). ).

  FIG. 55 (e5) is an example of a reach effect. Here, the music A output by the music production from the audio output device 9 is outputted, and the character tears the production design 70a one after another on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) in accordance with the rhythm of the music A. A display effect is performed. Note that the music output during the reach effect is not limited to the music A output as the music effect, and other music (for example, DF) may be selected at random and output. A plurality of music pieces are associated with each of C (for example, music piece G to I for music piece A, music pieces J to L for music piece B, and music pieces M to O for music piece C). May be output.

  FIG. 55 (e6) and FIG. 55 (e7) are examples of effects when the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed (temporary stop and main stop). In FIG. 55 (e6), as a result of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the loss result mode (“767”) is stopped and displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). Character information ("sorry") indicating that it is lost is displayed. In FIG. 55 (e7), the big hit result mode (“777”) is stopped and displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) as a result of the variable display of the effect design 70a, and the second image display device 71 (sub Character information ("Sorry") indicating that the game is a big hit is displayed.

Next, FIG. 56 will be described.
FIG. 56 (a) is a timing chart of the music preview patterns 11-13.
The change display of the effect symbol 70a and the present sign effect are started at the timing of T0, and the display of the development suggestion effect and any one of the combinations of the music pieces A to C are executed at the timing of T1. Then, when the gasse music production is finished at the timing of T2, the production design 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T3. After that, a pseudo-continuous effect that produces the fact that the pseudo continuous notice has been successfully generated is executed at the timing of T4, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is resumed at the timing of T5. Then, the present music effect is executed at the timing of T6, and the actual reach sign effect is executed at the timing of T7. Then, this reach sign production is started at the timing of T7. Thereafter, the reach effect is started at the timing of T8, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T9, and the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped until the timing of T10. As described above, in the music notice patterns 11 to 13, the music effect is executed twice.

FIG. 56 (b) is a diagram illustrating an effect example by the music notice pattern 11.
FIG. 56 (b1) is an example of the production of the sign effect. Here, the effect image G1 is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the character information (“chansu?”) G2 is displayed on the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). And the development suggestion image (window) G3 shown to (e2) is formed by the displayed effect image G1.

  FIG. 56 (b2) is an example of the production of the first music production effect. In the Gase 1st music production, the intro (introduction) portion of the music A is output from the audio output device 9, and the development suggestion image displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) in accordance with the rhythm of the music A An effect in which G3 expands is performed, and eventually disappears without becoming full screen. In addition, the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) displays history information (“Song A”) G4 indicating (notifying) the player of the music output during the music preview effect.

  FIG. 56 (b3) is an example of a pseudo-continuous effect. Here, a pseudo-continuous effect in which a window G5 including character information indicating that the pseudo continuous notice has been successfully generated is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is performed, and the second image display device 71 (sub-display) is displayed. In the liquid crystal), the history information G4 remains displayed.

  FIG. 56 (b4) is an example of the production of the first music effect. Here, the intro (introduction) portion of the music A is output from the audio output device 9, and the development suggestion image G3 displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is enlarged in accordance with the rhythm of the music A. To produce a full screen. In the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), the display of the history information G4 indicating the music output during the music preview effect is updated (changed from “Music A” to “A → A”).

  56 (b5) and FIG. 56 (b6) are examples of effects of the present reach sign effect. Here, a development effect is performed in which character information (“Yosha! Yaruzo!”) Indicating development is displayed on the development suggestion image G3 displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and then the production is performed. A reach squeak effect is performed that expects to be reached using the symbol 70a. Further, the history information G4 remains displayed on the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). Note that the music notice effect by the music notice pattern 11 corresponds to the effects shown in FIGS. 56 (b1) to (b6), but may be shown in FIGS. 56 (b1) to (b5) or FIGS. 56 (b1) to (b7). ).

  FIG. 56 (b7) shows an example of the reach effect. Here, the music A that was output last in the music production is output from the audio output device 9, and the character cuts the production design 70a one after another on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) in accordance with the rhythm of the music A. Such display effects are performed. Note that the music output during the reach effect is not limited to the music A output as the music effect, and other music (for example, DF) may be selected at random and output. A plurality of music pieces are associated with each of C (for example, music piece G to I for music piece A, music pieces J to L for music piece B, and music pieces M to O for music piece C). May be output. It should be noted that the display effects of the reach effects may be different or the same for each piece of music output during the reach effects.

  FIG. 56 (b8) is an effect example when the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed in a lost result mode (temporary stop and main stop). Here, as a result of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the loss result mode (“767”) is stopped and displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is lost. Character information ("sorry") is displayed.

Next, FIG. 57 will be described.
FIG. 57 (a) is a timing chart when the music preview patterns 14 to 16 are executed. Note that the execution timings of the various effects executed in the music notice patterns 14 to 16 are the same as the timings of the various effects executed in the music notice patterns 11 to 13 shown in FIG. To do.

  FIG. 57 (b) is a diagram illustrating an effect example by the music notice pattern 14. Note that the production example by the music preview pattern 14 is also similar to the production example by the music preview pattern 8 shown in FIG. 55 except that the degree of expectation (reliability) that is a big hit is different, so only the different parts will be described. .

  FIG. 57 (b4) is an example of the production of the second music effect. Here, the intro (introduction) portion of the music B is output from the audio output device 9, and the development suggestion image G3 displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is enlarged in accordance with the rhythm of the music B. To produce a full screen. In the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), the display of the history information G4 indicating the music output during the music preview effect is updated (changed from “Music A” to “A → B”).

  FIG. 57 (b5) is an example of the present reach sign effect. Here, a development effect is displayed in which the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) displays thick character information (“Yoshi! Do you!”) That suggests development in the development suggestion image G3. Specifically, in order to increase the expectation for jackpots, the text information ("Yo Sha! I'll do!") Is made bold, but the display mode can be changed by changing the text color or the text background. Just do it.

  FIG. 57 (b8) is an effect example when the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed in a jackpot result mode (temporary stop and main stop). Here, as a result of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the big hit result mode (“777”) is stopped on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is big hit. Character information ("big hit") is displayed.

Next, FIG. 58 will be described.
FIG. 58 (a) is a timing chart when the music preview patterns 17 to 25 are executed.
The change display of the effect symbol 70a and the present sign effect are started at the timing of T0, and the display of the development suggestion effect and any one of the combinations of the music pieces A to C are executed at the timing of T1. Then, when the gasse music production is finished at the timing of T2, the production design 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T3. After that, a pseudo-continuous effect that produces the fact that the pseudo continuous notice has been successfully generated is executed at the timing of T4, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is resumed at the timing of T5. Then, the gaze music effect is executed at the timing of T6. Then, when the gasse music production is finished at the timing of T7, the production design 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T8. Thereafter, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed at the timing of T9, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is resumed at the timing of T10. Then, the music production effect is executed at the timing of T11. Then, this reach sign production is started at the timing of T12. Thereafter, the reach effect is started at the timing of T13, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T14, and the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped until the timing of T15. As described above, in the music preview patterns 17 to 22, the music effect is executed three times.

FIG. 58 (b) is a diagram showing an example effect produced by the music notice pattern 20.
FIG. 58 (b1) is an example of the production of the sign effect. Here, the effect image G1 is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the character information (“chansu?”) G2 is displayed on the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). And the development suggestion image (window) G3 shown in (b2) is formed by the displayed effect image G1.

  FIG. 58 (b2) is an example of the production of the first music production effect. Here, the intro (introduction) portion of the music A is output from the audio output device 9, and the development suggestion image G3 displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is enlarged in accordance with the rhythm of the music A. Production is performed, and eventually disappears without becoming full screen. In addition, the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) displays history information (“Song A”) G4 indicating (notifying) the player of the music output during the music preview effect.

  FIG. 58 (b3) is an example of a pseudo-continuous effect. Here, a pseudo-continuous effect in which a window G5 including character information indicating that the pseudo continuous notice has been successfully generated is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is performed, and the second image display device 71 (sub-display) is displayed. In the liquid crystal), the history information G4 remains displayed.

  FIG. 58 (b4) is an example of the production of the first music production effect. Here, the intro (introduction) portion of the music A is output from the audio output device 9, and the development suggestion image G3 displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is enlarged in accordance with the rhythm of the music A. Production is performed, and eventually disappears without becoming full screen. In the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), the display of the history information G4 indicating the music output during the music preview effect is updated (changed from “Music A” to “A → A”).

  FIG. 58 (b5) is an example of a pseudo-continuous effect. Here, a pseudo-continuous effect in which a window G5 including character information indicating that the pseudo continuous notice has been successfully generated is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is performed, and the second image display device 71 (sub-display) is displayed. In the liquid crystal), the history information G4 remains displayed.

  FIG. 58 (b6) is an example of the production of the second music effect. Here, the intro (introduction) portion of the music B is output from the audio output device 9, and the development suggestion image G3 displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is enlarged in accordance with the rhythm of the music B. To produce a full screen. In addition, the display of history information G4 indicating the music output during the music preview effect is updated (changed from "Music A" to "A → A → B") on the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). The

  FIG. 58 (b7) and FIG. 58 (b8) are examples of effects of the present reach sign effect. Here, a development effect is performed in which character information (“Yosha! Yaruzo!”) Indicating development is displayed on the development suggestion image G3 displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and then the production is performed. A reach squeak effect is performed that expects to be reached using the symbol 70a. Further, the history information G4 remains displayed on the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). In addition, although the music notice effect by the music notice pattern 20 corresponds to the effects (b1) to (b8), it may be (b1) to (b7), or (b1) to (b9).

  FIG. 58 (b9) shows an example of reach effect. Here, the music B output by the music production from the audio output device 9 is output, and the character cuts the production design 70a one after another on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) in accordance with the rhythm of the music B. A display effect is performed. Note that the music that is output during the reach effect is not limited to the music B that is output during the music effect, and other music (for example, DF) may be selected and output at random. A plurality of music pieces are associated with each of C (for example, music piece G to I for music piece A, music pieces J to L for music piece B, and music pieces M to O for music piece C). May be output.

  FIG. 58 (b10) is an example of the effect when the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed (temporary stop and main stop) in a lost result mode. Here, as a result of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the loss result mode (“767”) is stopped and displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is lost. Character information ("sorry") is displayed.

Next, FIG. 59 will be described.
FIG. 59A is a timing chart when the music preview patterns 26 to 28 are executed. Note that the execution timings of the various effects executed in the music preview patterns 26 to 28 are the same as the timings of the various effects executed in the music preview patterns 17 to 25 shown in FIG. Omitted.

  FIG. 59 (b) is a diagram showing an example effect produced by the music notice pattern 26. Note that the production example by the music notice pattern 28 is similar to the production example by the music notice pattern 20 shown in FIG. 58 except that the expectation level (reliability) is a big hit, so only the different parts will be described. .

  FIG. 59 (b4) is an example of the production of the second music production. Here, the intro (introduction) portion of the music B is output from the audio output device 9, and the development suggestion image G3 displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is enlarged in accordance with the rhythm of the music B. To produce a full screen. In the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), the display of the history information G4 indicating the music output during the music preview effect is updated (changed from “Music A” to “A → B”).

  FIG. 59 (b6) is an example of the production of the third music effect. Here, the intro (introduction) portion of the song C is output from the audio output device 9, and the development suggestion image G3 displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is enlarged in accordance with the rhythm of the song C. To produce a full screen. Further, the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) updates the display of history information G4 indicating the music output during the music preview effect (changed from “A → B” to “A → B → C”). Is done.

  FIG. 59 (b7) is an example of the effect of this reach sign effect. Here, a development effect is displayed in which the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) displays thick character information (“Yoshi! Do you!”) That suggests development in the development suggestion image G3. Specifically, in order to increase the expectation of jackpots, the text information ("Yoshisha! Yaruzo") is made bold, but the display mode can be changed by changing the text color or the text background. That's fine.

  FIG. 59 (b10) is an effect example when the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed in a jackpot result manner (temporary stop and main stop). Here, as a result of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the big hit result mode (“777”) is stopped on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is big hit. Character information ("big hit") is displayed.

  As described above, in the music preview effect (specific effect) of the present embodiment, the number of songs output during execution of the music preview effect (the type of music, the higher the expectation that a big hit game (special game state) will occur). The number of songs that are output during execution of the music preview effect (specific effect) is higher when the expectation that a big hit game (special game state) will occur is higher. (Music type, number of outputs) may be reduced. Further, although the type of music and the number of outputs are listed as the number of music, only one of them may be used.

  In the case of a variation effect pattern in which the reach state does not occur, the music preview effect (specific effect) of the present embodiment is from the start of the variation display of the effect symbol 70a until the effect symbol 70a temporarily stops temporarily. The music effect is performed in the meantime, but the music effect may be performed after the first temporary stop of the effect design 70a. In addition, a musical performance may be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 1 to 2 times) before the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, and the musical effect effect may be performed a predetermined number of times (1 to 2 times) after the temporary stop. .

  In addition, in the case of the reach variation effect pattern in which the reach state occurs, the music notice effect (specific effect) of the present embodiment is the music between the start of the change display of the effect symbol 70a and the occurrence of the reach state. Although the production is performed, the music production may be performed after the reach state occurs. Further, a music effect may be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 1 to 2 times) before the reach state occurs, and a music effect may be performed a predetermined number of times (1 to 2 times) after the reach state occurs.

  In addition, in the music preview effect (specific effect) of the present embodiment, the intro (introduction) part of the music A to C is output during the music effect, but the music is composed of a plurality of elements such as a melody part and a chorus part. If configured, the melody part may be used for the musical performance, or the chorus part may be used. Further, the types of music output during the music production are not limited to the three types A to C, and may be more or less. In addition, although the music production is performed intermittently, it may be performed continuously.

  Moreover, although the music notice effect (specific effect) of this embodiment is comprised by the combination of the output and display effect of a music, it is good also as only the output of a music. Further, in order to make it easier for the player to grasp the degree of expectation of entering the special gaming state, the history information of the music output during the music preview effect is displayed on the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). The image may be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) or not displayed on either the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) or the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). May be.

  In addition, during the execution and / or non-execution of the music notice effect (specific effect), an explanation effect that explains what the music notice effect is like may be executed. Specifically, “the expectation that the jackpot will change depends on the number of songs to be output (type of song) will change”, and “the song preview will have a jackpot as the number of songs to be output (type of song) increases. Character information such as “It is highly possible” may be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and / or the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal).

(Step-up notice mode determination table)
FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a step-up notice mode determination table that is referred to when a step-up notice pattern is determined in the step-up notice pattern determination process in step S1212-18. Specifically, FIG. 60A is a diagram showing a step-up notice mode determination table for loss, and FIG. 60B is a diagram showing a step-up notice mode determination table for jackpot.

  The step-up notice effect changes (changes) the step effect image displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and / or the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) over a plurality of stages. ) To provide a notice effect for notifying that a predetermined specific effect will be executed. Further, the specific effect is an effect that expects to be a big hit (suddenly probable change), and can be paraphrased as an acquisition challenge effect for acquiring a big hit (suddenly probable change).

  In the step-up notice mode determination table for lost in FIG. 60 (a) and the step-up notice mode determination table for jackpot in FIG. 60 (b), the notice to be acquired when the variable effect pattern and the step-up notice pattern are determined. The selection rate based on the random number for mode determination is associated with the type of step-up notice pattern. The types of step-up notice effects are broadly classified into three types, step-up notice effects 1 to step-up notice effects 3, and step-up notice patterns in which branch numbers are assigned to the step-up notice effects 1 to 3. Is set more than once.

  The step-up notice effect 1 is the expectation level that the character effect to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and / or the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is executed (acquired challenge effect). This is a notice effect that changes stepwise (continuously or intermittently) according to the degree of expectation (reliability) or a sudden probability change big hit, and the maximum (final) number of steps (number of steps) is “3”. Is set to The execution of the specific effect (acquired challenge effect) is determined when the third step effect (stage effect) corresponding to the maximum number of steps “3” is started.

  Step-up notice effect 2 is a degree of expectation that a specific effect (acquired challenge effect) is executed for a character image to be displayed on first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and / or second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). (Reliability) or a sudden announcement change that changes step by step (continuous or intermittent) depending on the expectation (reliability) that will be a big chance of success, and the maximum number of steps (number of steps) is set to "4" ing. Even if the fourth step effect (stage effect) corresponding to the maximum number of steps “4” is started, the execution of the specific effect (acquired challenge effect) is not confirmed unless the fourth step effect is executed to the end. Is set to

  The step-up notice effect 3 is a degree of expectation that a specific effect (acquired challenge effect) is executed on a telop image to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and / or the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). (Reliability) or an unexpected effect that changes step by step (continuous or intermittent) according to the expectation (reliability) that suddenly becomes a big hit, and the maximum number of steps (number of steps) is set to “3” ing. Even if the third step effect (stage effect) corresponding to the maximum number of steps “3” is started, the execution of the specific effect (acquired challenge effect) is not confirmed unless the third step effect is executed to the end. Is set to

  In the following description, the word “step up” may be expressed as “SU”. That is, the step-up notice effect may be expressed as an SU notice effect, the step-up notice mode determination table may be expressed as an SU notice mode determination table, and the step-up notice pattern may be expressed as an SU notice pattern.

  The “SU notice pattern 1-1” is a first method in which character information G1 corresponding to step 1 of the SU notice effect 1 is gradually drawn on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. This is a notice effect for executing a step effect.

  The “SU notice pattern 1-2” displays the character information G2 corresponding to step 2 of the SU notice effect 1 in the first image display after executing the first step effect of the SU notice effect 1 during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. This is a notice effect for executing a second step effect that is gradually drawn on the device 70 (main liquid crystal).

  The “SU notice pattern 1-3” is character information G3 corresponding to step 3 of the SU notice effect 1 after executing the first step effect and the second step effect of the SU notice effect 1 during the variation display of the effect symbol 70a. Is gradually drawn on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and after drawing the character information G3 in step 3, character information G4 (character information G1) indicating that the third step effect has been executed to the end. This is a notice effect for executing the third step effect for displaying images of -3.

  The “SU notice pattern 2-1” is a first step in which the character image A corresponding to step 1 of the SU notice effect 2 gradually appears on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. It is a notice effect that performs the effect.

  “SU notice pattern 2-2” is a first image display of character image B corresponding to step 2 of SU notice effect 2 after executing the first step effect of SU notice effect 2 during the dynamic display of effect symbol 70a. This is a notice effect for executing the first step effect that gradually appears on the device 70 (main liquid crystal).

  The “SU notice pattern 2-3” is a character image C corresponding to step 3 of the SU notice effect 2 after executing the first step effect and the second step effect of the SU notice effect 2 during the variation display of the effect symbol 70a. Is a notice effect for executing a third step effect that gradually appears on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal).

  The “SU notice effect 2-4” is executed after the first step effect, the second step effect, and the third step effect of the SU notice effect 2 are executed during the variation display of the effect symbol 70a. The corresponding character information D gradually appears on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and is a notice effect that executes a fourth step effect A that ends without the character image D appearing completely.

  The “SU notice effect 2-5” is executed in step 4 of the SU notice effect 2 after executing the first step effect, the second step effect, and the third step effect of the SU notice effect 2 during the variation display of the effect symbol 70a. The corresponding character information D gradually appears on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and is a notice effect that executes the fourth step effect B in which the character image D appears completely.

  The “SU notice pattern 3-1” is a first step in which the telop image A corresponding to step 1 of the SU notice effect 3 gradually appears on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. It is a notice effect that performs the effect.

  The “SU notice pattern 3-2” displays the first image of the telop image B corresponding to step 2 of the SU notice effect 3 after executing the first step effect of the SU notice effect 3 during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. This is a notice effect for executing a second step effect that gradually appears on the device 70 (main liquid crystal).

  The “SU notice pattern 3-3” is a telop image C corresponding to step 3 of the SU notice effect 3 after executing the first step effect and the second step effect of the SU notice effect 3 during the variation display of the effect symbol 70a. Is displayed in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) gradually, and the third step effect A is executed in which the telop image C ends without completely appearing.

  The “SU notice effect 3-4” is executed after the first step effect, the second step effect, and the third step effect of the SU notice effect 3 are executed during the variation display of the effect symbol 70a. This is a notice effect that causes the corresponding telop image D to gradually appear on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and executes the third step effect A in which the telop image D appears completely.

  As the first feature of the step-up notice mode determination table shown in FIG. 60, when the number of executed step effects is larger (3 or 4), the number of executed step effects is smaller (1 or 2). The expectation that the specific performance (acquired challenge performance) is executed is higher than that. Thereby, the player becomes interested in the number of step effects to be executed, and the interest related to the step-up notice effect and the interest of the game are improved.

  As a second feature of the step-up notice mode determination table shown in FIG. 60, the expectation (reliability) that suddenly becomes a big hit in the order of step-up notice effect 1 <step-up notice effect 2 <step-up notice effect 3 is high. The point becomes. Thereby, the player becomes interested in the type of the step-up notice effect to be executed, and the interest related to the step-up notice effect and the interest of the game are improved.

  The third feature of the step-up notice mode determining table shown in FIG. 60 is that the start timing is delayed (the start timing is different) in the order of step-up notice effect 1 <step-up notice effect 2 <step-up notice effect 3. It is done. As a result, it is possible to lengthen the period during which the player is expected to start the step-up notice effect. In addition, since the type of step-up notice effect executed depending on the start time of the step-up notice effect can be estimated, the interest of the game is improved. The start timing of the step-up notice effects 1 to 3 may be the same.

  As the fourth feature of the step-up notice mode determination table shown in FIG. 60, step-up notice effects (SU notice effect 1 and SU notice effect 3) in which the final step (final stage) is set to “3”, and the final step The step-up notice effect (SU notice effect 2) in which (final stage) is set to “4” is set. Thereby, the number of steps in which the player has the most expectation for the development to the specific effect changes depending on the type of the step-up notification effect, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the step-up notification effect.

(Example of step-up notice effect)
61 to 63 are diagrams showing a timing chart of a step-up notice effect and an example effect. Specifically, FIG. 61 is a diagram showing step-up notice effect 1, FIG. 62 is a diagram showing step-up notice effect 2, and FIG. 63 is a diagram showing step-up notice effect 3.

First, FIG. 61 will be described.
FIG. 61A is a timing chart of the SU notice pattern 1-1.
When the display of variation of the effect symbol 70a is started at the timing of T0, the first step effect of the SU notice effect 1 is started at the timing of T1 (20th frame), and the first step effect is ended at the timing of T2, the T3 The effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing, and the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped by the timing of T4.

FIG. 61B is a timing chart of the SU notice pattern 1-2.
Variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started at the timing T0, and the first step effect is started at the timing T1. Then, the second step effect of the SU notice effect 1 is started at the timing T2, and when the second step effect is ended at the timing T5, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing T6, and the effect symbol is reached by the timing T7. 70a is stopped.

FIG. 61 (c) is a timing chart of the SU notice pattern 1-3.
The variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started at the timing T0, the first step effect is started at the timing T1, and the second step effect is started at the timing T2. Then, the third step effect (final step effect) of the SU notice effect 1 is started at the timing of T5, the specific effect (acquired challenge effect) is started at the timing of T8 overlapping with the final stage part of the third step effect, When the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing, the specific effect is ended at the timing T10, and the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped by the timing T11.

FIG. 61 (d) is a diagram illustrating an effect example by the SU notice pattern 1-3.
FIG. 61 (d1) is an effect example immediately before the end of the first step effect. Here, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is displayed in a state where all the character information G1 corresponding to step 1 is drawn and indicates that the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is step 1. Character information M1 is displayed. In the case of the SU notice pattern 1-1, the first step effect ends without drawing all the character information G1.

  FIG. 61 (d2) is an effect example immediately before the end of the second step effect. Here, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is displayed in a state in which all the character information G2 corresponding to step 2 is drawn, and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) indicates step 2. Character information M2 is displayed. In the case of the SU notice pattern 1-2, the second step effect ends without drawing all the character information G2.

  FIG. 61 (d3) is an effect example in the middle of the third step effect. Here, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is displayed in a state where all the character information G3 corresponding to step 3 is drawn, and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) indicates step 3. Character information M3 is displayed.

  FIG. 61 (d4) is an example of the effect immediately before the end of the third step effect (the end part). Here, the character information G4 indicating that the third step effect has been executed to the end is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the player is congratulated on the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). Character information M4 (“I did it”) is displayed. Although illustration is omitted in order to avoid difficulty in understanding the appearance, the first image is displayed from the timing of T8 when the end part of the third step effect overlaps with the early part of the specific effect (acquired challenge effect). A display in which the introduction image G5 of the specific effect (acquired challenge effect) gradually appears on the front side of the character information G4 is performed on the device 70 (main liquid crystal).

  FIG. 61 (d5) is an example of an effect immediately after the start of the specific effect (acquired challenge effect). Here, the introductory image G5 of the specific effect is completely displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the character information M5 indicating that the specific effect is being displayed on the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) (“ "Acquiring Challenge") is displayed.

  FIG. 61 (d6) shows an example of an effect in the middle of a specific effect (acquired challenge effect). Here, an image in which an enemy and a friend character start a battle is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and character information indicating that a specific effect is being performed on the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). M5 (“Acquiring Challenge”) is displayed.

  FIG. 61 (d7) is an example of an effect immediately before the end of the specific effect (acquired challenge effect). Here, as a result of the battle between the two characters performed in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), an image in which the ally character has won is displayed and displayed on the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). Character information M5 ("acquiring challenge") indicating that the specific effect is being performed is displayed.

  FIG. 61 (d8) shows an example of the effect after the specific effect (acquired challenge effect) is completed. Here, an image indicating that a sudden probability change (big hit) has been acquired is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and character information (““ "You did it!") Is displayed. In addition, in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the combination of the effect symbols 70a that become the jackpot result mode is stopped and displayed (mainly stopped) in accordance with the timing of stopping the variation of the special symbols. Here, the combination of the production symbols 70a that will be the jackpot result mode is stopped (present stop), but if the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, the combination of the production symbols 70a that will be the loss result mode is stopped. It will be displayed (this stop).

  ◆ Note that the step-up notice effect 1 shown in FIG. 61 is characterized by the fact that the transition to the specific effect (acquired challenge effect) is confirmed when the third step effect (final step) is started. The point which made 1 step production time <3rd step production time <2nd step production time is mentioned. By doing so, it becomes possible to increase the expectation whether or not the player will develop to the third step effect at the time of the second step effect (in the middle of the step-up notice effect) when the player has little expectation. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the step-up notice effect 1 of the present embodiment, the first step effect time is set to the third step effect time. On the contrary, the first step effect time is set to the third step effect time. Also good. If it does in this way, it will become easy to raise a player's expectation at the time of the 1st step production.

Next, FIG. 62 will be described.
FIG. 62A is a timing chart of the SU notice pattern 2-1.
When the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started at the timing of T0, the first step effect of the SU notice effect 2 is started at the timing of T1 (30th frame), and the first step effect is ended at the timing of T2, the T3 The effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing, and the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped by the timing of T4.

FIG. 62B is a timing chart of the SU notice pattern 2-2.
Variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started at the timing T0, and the first step effect is started at the timing T1. And the 2nd step production of SU notice production 2 is started at the timing of T2. Thereafter, when the second step effect is finished at the timing of T4, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T6, and the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped by the timing of T7.

FIG. 62C is a timing chart of the SU notice pattern 2-3.
The variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started at the timing T0, the first step effect is started at the timing T1, the second step effect is started at the timing T2, and the third step of the SU notice effect 2 is started at the timing T4. Start production. Thereafter, when the third step effect is finished at the timing of T5, when the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T6, the effect symbol 70a is permanently stopped by the timing of T7.

FIG. 62D is a timing chart of the SU notice pattern 2-4.
The variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started at the timing T0, the first step effect is started at the timing T1, the second step effect is started at the timing T2, and the third step effect is started at the timing T4. Then, the fourth step effect A (final step effect: incomplete) of the SU notice effect 3 is started at the timing of T5. Thereafter, the fourth step effect A is ended halfway at the timing T7, and when the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing T9, the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped by the timing T10.

FIG. 62E is a timing chart of the SU notice pattern 2-5.
The change display of the effect symbol 70a is started at the timing T0, the first step effect is started at the timing T1, the second step effect is started at the timing T2, and the third step effect is started at the timing T4. The fourth step effect B (final step effect: completion) is started at the timing of T5. After that, when the specific effect (acquired challenge effect) is started at the timing of T8 and the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T11, the specific effect is ended at the timing of T12, and the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped by the timing of T13. To do.

FIG. 62 (f) is a diagram showing an example effect produced by the SU notice pattern 2-5.
FIG. 62 (f1) is an effect example immediately before the end of the first step effect. Here, the character image G1 corresponding to step 1 is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) in a state where all characters appear, and the character indicating step 1 is displayed on the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). Information M1 is displayed. Note that, in the case of the SU notice pattern 2-1, the first step effect ends without all the character images G1 appearing.

  FIG. 62 (f2) is an effect example immediately before the end of the second step effect. Here, the character image G2 corresponding to step 2 appears on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) in a state where all characters appear, and the character indicating step 2 is displayed on the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). Information M2 is displayed. In the case of the SU notice pattern 2-2, the character image G2 does not appear all and the second step effect ends.

  FIG. 62 (f3) is an effect example immediately before the end of the third step effect. Here, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is displayed in a state where all the character images G3 corresponding to step 3 have appeared, and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) indicates step 3 is displayed. Information M3 is displayed. In the case of the SU notice pattern 2-3, the character image G3 does not all appear and the third step effect ends.

  FIG. 62 (f4) is an effect example immediately before the end of the fourth step effect. Here, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is displayed in a state where all the character images G4 corresponding to step 4 have appeared, and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) indicates that the character is step 4 Information M4 is displayed. In the case of the SU notice pattern 2-4, the character image G4 does not all appear and the third step effect ends.

  62 (f5) to (f8) have the same production flow as FIGS. 61 (d5) to (d8), and thus detailed description thereof is omitted here. However, in FIG. 62 (f8), FIG. In the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the combination of the effect symbols 70a that become the jackpot result mode (or the lost result mode) is stopped and displayed (main stop) in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Will be. In addition, the content of the specific effect (acquisition challenge effect) when passing through the step-up notice effect 1 and the specific effect (acquisition challenge effect) when passing through the step-up notice effect 2 may be different. The type of specific effect to be executed each time is executed may be determined by lottery.

  Note that the step-up notice effect 2 shown in FIG. 62 is characterized by the fact that the transition to the specific effect (acquired challenge effect) is not confirmed unless the fourth step effect (final step) is completed. The point is that time <second step effect time <third step effect time <fourth step effect time. By doing so, the player's expectation and frustration can be effectively given by the performance difference from the step-up notice effect 1 (whether or not the transition to the specific effect is confirmed by the execution of the final step effect). Can expect synergistic effects.

  In the step-up notice effect 2, the third step effect time is less than the effect time of the fourth step effect A. However, since the character image G4 is not completely displayed for the fourth step effect A, the third step effect A is not completed. It is good also as step production time> production time of the 4th step production A. In addition, the time for all step effects may be the same, or the effect time for all step effects may be longer than when the effect is not completed.

Next, FIG. 63 will be described.
FIG. 63A is a timing chart of the SU notice pattern 3-1.
When the display of variation of the effect symbol 70a is started at the timing of T0, the first step effect of the SU notice effect 3 is started at the timing of T1 (40th frame), and the first step effect is ended at the timing of T2. The effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing, and the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped by the timing of T4.

FIG. 63B is a timing chart of the SU notice pattern 3-2.
Variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started at the timing T0, and the first step effect is started at the timing T1. Then, the second step effect of the SU notice effect 3 is started at the timing T2. Thereafter, when the second step effect ends at the timing of T5, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T6, and the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped by the timing of T7.

FIG. 63C is a timing chart of the SU notice pattern 3-3.
The variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started at the timing T0, the first step effect is started at the timing T1, the second step effect is started at the timing T2, and the third step of the SU notice effect 2 is started at the timing T5. Production A (final step production: incomplete) is started. Thereafter, when the third step effect A is finished at the timing T6 and the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the effect symbol 70a is actually stopped by the timing T7.

FIG. 63D is a timing chart of the SU notice pattern 3-4.
The variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started at the timing of T0, the first step effect is started at the timing of T1, the second step effect is started at the timing of T2, and the third step effect B (final step) is started at the timing of T5. Production: Complete). After that, when the specific effect (acquired challenge effect) is started at the timing of T8 and the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T9, the specific effect is ended at the timing of T10, and the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped by the timing of T11. To do.

FIG. 63 (e) is a diagram showing an example effect produced by the SU notice pattern 3-4.
FIG. 63 (e1) is an effect example immediately before the end of the first step effect. Here, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is displayed in a state where all the telop images G1 corresponding to step 1 have appeared, and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) indicates that it is step 1 Information M1 is displayed. Note that in the case of the SU notice pattern 3-1, the first step effect ends without the appearance of all the telop images G1.

  FIG. 63 (e2) is an effect example immediately before the end of the second step effect. Here, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is displayed in a state where all the telop images G2 corresponding to step 2 have appeared, and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) indicates that it is step 2 Information M2 is displayed. Note that in the case of the SU notice pattern 3-2, the second step effect ends without the telop image G2 appearing all.

  FIG. 63 (e3) is an effect example immediately before the end of the third step effect. Here, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is displayed in a state where all the telop images G3 corresponding to step 3 have appeared, and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) indicates that it is step 3 Information M3 is displayed. In the case of the SU notice pattern 3-3, the telop image G3 does not appear all, and the third step effect ends.

  FIG. 63 (e4) is an effect example immediately before the end of the third step effect. Here, the character information G4 indicating that the third step effect has been executed to the end is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the player is congratulated on the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). Character information M4 (“I did it”) is displayed.

  63 (e5) to (e8) have the same production flow as FIGS. 61 (d5) to (d8) and FIGS. 62 (f5) to (f8), and thus detailed description is omitted here. In 63 (e8), as in FIG. 61 (d8) and FIG. 62 (e8), in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the big hit result mode (or the loss result) is synchronized with the timing of the special symbol variation stop. The combination of the production symbols 70a to be (mode) is stopped (displayed). In addition, the content of the specific effect (acquisition challenge effect) when passing through the step-up notice effect 1 and the step-up notice effect 2 is different from the content of the specific effect (acquisition challenge effect) when passing through the step-up notice effect 3 Alternatively, the type of the specific effect to be executed every time the specific effect is executed may be determined by lottery.

  Note that the step-up notice effect 3 shown in FIG. 63 is characterized by the first step effect because the transition to the specific effect (acquired challenge effect) is not confirmed unless the third step effect (final step) is completed. The point is that time <second step production time <third step production time. By doing so, the player's expectation and frustration can be effectively given by the performance difference from the step-up notice effect 1 (whether or not the transition to the specific effect is confirmed by the execution of the final step effect). Can expect synergistic effects.

  In the step-up notice effect 3 of the present embodiment, the second step effect time is less than the effect time of the third step effect A, but the character image G4 does not appear for the third step effect A and is incomplete. Therefore, it is good also as the production time of 2nd step production time> 3rd step production A. In addition, the time for all step effects may be the same, or the effect time for all step effects may be longer than when the effect is not completed.

  In addition, as a feature of the step-up notice effects 1 to 3 shown in FIGS. 61 to 63, a specific effect (acquired challenge effect) is started from the start of variation of the effect pattern 70a regardless of which step-up notice effect is executed. The time until the start is the same (the 374th frame), and all the step effects (from the first step effect to the last step effect) are executed. Specifically, since the step-up notice effect 1 is determined to be shifted (executed) to the specific effect when the execution of the third step effect is started, at least a part of the third step effect by the 374th frame. Is executed. In step-up notice effect 2, since the transition (execution) to the specific effect is finalized when the fourth step effect B is executed to the end (completed), the fourth step effect B is the last (completed) by the 374th frame. ) Is executed. Since the step-up notice effect 3 is determined to be the transition (execution) to the specific effect when the third step effect B is executed to the last (completed), the third step effect B is the last (completed) by the 374th frame. ) Is executed. That is, the player is notified (implied) that the transition to the specific effect has been confirmed before the specific effect (acquired challenge effect) is started. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to perform different step-up notice effects with the same variation effect pattern, and it is possible to widen the selection range of step-up notice effects in one variation effect pattern.

(Big hit effect pattern determination process)
The jackpot effect pattern determination process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the jackpot effect pattern determination process in the effect control unit 130m.

  First, in step S1226-1, the sub CPU 130a confirms the contents of the opening designation command determined to have been received in step S1225, and selects the jackpot effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65 in step S1226-2. The jackpot effect pattern determination table is stored in the sub RAM 130c, and details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1226-3, the sub CPU 130a collates the opening designation command confirmed in step S1226-1 with the jackpot effect pattern determination table selected in step S1226-2, and determines the jackpot according to the jackpot effect pattern determination table. An effect pattern is determined, and in step S1226-4, the determined jackpot effect pattern is stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c.

  In step S1226-5, the sub CPU 130a specifies a jackpot presentation pattern designation command corresponding to the jackpot presentation pattern determined in step S1226-3, and sets the identified jackpot presentation pattern designation command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. .

  Note that the jackpot effect pattern designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 in the data output process in step S1600. . Then, the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 generate a jackpot effect corresponding to the jackpot effect pattern designation command (hit effect pattern) in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), The second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), the audio output device 9, the panel lighting device 74, the frame lighting device 10, the panel driving device 75, and the like are executed.

  In step S1226-6, the sub CPU 130a sets right-handed display data for right-handed display (LED lighting) on the right-handed second display 87 in a predetermined processing area, and this jackpot effect pattern determination process Exit. As a result, when right-handed display data is set in a predetermined processing area, display control data is created in step S1500, and the created data is output in step S1600. In 87, a right-handed display is performed.

(Big hit production pattern determination table)
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a jackpot effect pattern determination table that is referred to when the jackpot effect pattern is determined in step S1226-3.

  As shown in FIG. 65, in the jackpot effect pattern determination table, the opening designation command and the special game effect pattern are associated with each other and the contents of the effect are described for reference.

  In the jackpot effect pattern 1, the promotion effect was executed during the period from the opening of the grand prize opening 50 in the fifth round game to the closing of the big prize opening 50 in the eighth round game, and as a result, the promotion failed. This is a jackpot effect pattern for executing a promotion failure effect to notify (notify) that.

  The jackpot performance pattern 2 is a promotion success in which the promotion performance is executed between the opening of the grand prize opening 50 and the closing of the fourth round in the fifth round game, and as a result, the promotion is successful (notification). It is a jackpot production pattern that performs the production.

  The jackpot performance pattern 6 was executed during the fifth round game after the grand prize opening 50 was opened until the big prize opening 50 was closed in the 15th round game, and as a result, the promotion failed. This is a jackpot effect pattern for executing a promotion failure effect to notify (notify) that.

  The jackpot effect pattern 7 is a promotion success in which the promotion effect is executed between the opening of the grand prize opening 50 and the closing of the eleventh round in the fifth round game, and as a result, the promotion is announced (notified). It is a jackpot production pattern that performs the production.

  The jackpot effect patterns 3, 4, 5, 8, and 9 are jackpot effect patterns in which the promotion effect that directs whether or not the type of the jackpot game is promoted is not executed.

  The jackpot effect pattern 5 is a jackpot effect pattern that executes a sudden probability change effect that notifies (notifies) that the state has shifted to the high probability gaming state.

(Data creation process)
The data creation process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing data creation processing in the effect control unit 130m.

  First, in step S1500-1, the sub CPU 130a performs the first special symbol second display on the basis of the special symbol variation display data and the special symbol stop display data set in the variation effect pattern determination process or the effect symbol variation stop process. The display control data for special symbol second display corresponding to the special symbol display signal for turning on, blinking, or extinguishing the LED of 80 or the second special symbol second display 81 is created.

  In step S1500-2, the sub CPU 130a determines the LED of the normal symbol second display 82 based on the normal symbol fluctuation display data and the normal symbol stop display data set in the normal symbol roulette effect determination process or the normal symbol fluctuation stop process. The display control data for the normal symbol second display corresponding to the normal symbol display signal for turning on, blinking, or extinguishing is generated.

  In step S1500-3, the sub CPU 130a performs the first special symbol hold second display 83 and the second special symbol hold second display 84 based on the special symbol hold display data set in the special figure hold storage update process. Display control data for the special symbol hold second display corresponding to the special symbol hold display signal for turning on, blinking, or turning off the LED is generated.

  In step S1500-4, the sub CPU 130a makes a normal symbol for turning on, blinking, or extinguishing the LED of the normal symbol hold second display 85 based on the normal symbol hold display data set in the general symbol hold storage update process. The display control data for the normal symbol hold second display corresponding to the hold display signal is created.

  In step S1500-5, the sub CPU 130a turns on or off the LED of the right-handed second display 87 based on the right-handed display data or the right-handed erasure data set in the gaming state setting process or the big hit effect pattern determination process. Display control data for the right-handed second display corresponding to the right-handed display signal to be generated.

(Data output processing)
The data output process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing data output processing in the effect control unit 130m.

  First, in step S1600-1, the sub CPU 130a performs the first special symbol second display 80, the second special symbol second display 81, the normal symbol second display 82, and the first special symbol hold second display 83. In order to turn on the LEDs of the second special symbol hold second display 84, the normal symbol hold second display 85, and the right-handed second display 87, the above-described steps S1500-1 to S1500-5 are used. Output processing for the display that outputs various display control data is performed.

  In step S1600-2, the sub CPU 130a performs a command output process for transmitting various commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170. Do.

(Display examples of the first game information display device, the second game information display device, and the first image display device)
68 to 73 are diagrams showing display examples of the first game information display device 59, the second game information display device 79, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Specifically, FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a display example during the reach effect (SP reach effect) performed in the non-short game state, and FIG. 69 is the reach effect (in the short time game state) 70 is a diagram showing a display example during SP reach production), FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a display example during a blackout effect and a moving effect by a movable effect member, and FIGS. 71 to 72 are during a jackpot game FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a display example, and FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a display example at the time of power-off occurrence.

First, FIG. 68 will be described.
68 (a), (b), and (c) are scenes of (e1), (e5), and (e6) in the production example by the music notice pattern 8 of FIG. 55 (e). In FIG. 55 (e), the hold icons (first hold icons H11 to H14, second hold icons H21 to H24), the fluctuation icon TH, the hold number display (first hold number display, second hold number display). ), The special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) have been omitted, but will be described in detail here.

FIG. 68 (a) shows the present sign effect (pre-reach effect). Here, in the 1st game information display device 59, the 1st special symbol 1st indicator 60 performs change display of the 1st special symbol which blinks LED in a predetermined order, and the 1st special symbol hold 1st indicator 63 Indicates that two LEDs are lit and two first holds are stored.
The second special symbol first indicator 61 and the normal symbol first indicator 62 light a predetermined LED to indicate that the second special symbol and the normal symbol are stopped, and the second special symbol hold first The display 64 and the normal symbol hold first display 65 turn off any LED, indicating that no hold (second hold, ordinary map hold) is stored.

In the second game information display device 79, the first special symbol second indicator 80 performs a variable display in which the LED blinks at a predetermined interval in response to the variable display of the first special symbol. The 2 indicator 83 lights up two LEDs and indicates that two first hold are stored.
The second special symbol second indicator 81 and the normal symbol second indicator 82 turn off the LED, indicating that the second special symbol and the normal symbol are stopped, and the second special symbol hold second indicator. 84 and the normal symbol hold second display 85 turn off any LED, indicating that no hold (second hold, ordinary map hold) is stored.

In the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the hold icon H11 in the normal display mode is displayed on the first display unit 70B1 of the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, and the special display mode 3 is displayed on the second display unit. The (red) hold icon H12 is displayed, the change icon TH is displayed in the change icon display area 70D, and “2” indicating the first hold number is displayed in the first hold number display area SH1. . Further, in the first special symbol variation display area DZ1, the variation display of the first special symbol is performed corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol.
Since the second hold is not stored, the hold icon is not displayed in the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and “0” is displayed in the second hold number display area SH2. Further, since the second special symbol has not changed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol variation display area DZ2.

  FIG. 68B shows a reach effect (SP reach effect) after the development effect is performed. Since the first special symbol continues to be changed and no new hold (first hold, second hold, general figure hold) has occurred, the first game information display device 59 and the second game information display device In 79, the same display as in FIG. 68A is continuously displayed.

On the other hand, in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the hold icons in the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4 and the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4 and the change icon TH in the change icon display area 70D are displayed. And the effect symbol 70a is displayed small in the upper left so as not to disturb the reach effect (SP reach effect).
Note that the number of holdings (first holding number, second holding number) and special symbol variation display region (first special symbol variation display) of the holding number display region (first holding number display region SH1, second holding number display region SH2). The special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the region DZ1, the second special symbol variation display region DZ2) are continuously displayed in the same manner as in FIG.

FIG. 68 (c) shows the effect in which the reach effect (SP reach effect) is finished and the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed. Here, in the 1st game information display device 59, the 1st special symbol 1st indicator 60 displays LED by the lighting mode (for example, only LED of the right end lights up) which shows a loss, and the stop display of the 1st special symbol is carried out. Is going.
Since no new hold (first hold, second hold, general figure hold) has occurred, the first special symbol hold first indicator 63, the second special symbol first indicator 61, the second special symbol hold The first display 64, the normal symbol first indicator 62, and the normal symbol hold first indicator 65 continuously display the same display as in FIGS. 68 (a) and 68 (b).

In the second game information display device 79, the first special symbol second indicator 80 turns off the LED corresponding to the stop display of the first special symbol, indicating that the variation of the first special symbol is lost. Yes.
Since no new hold (first hold, second hold, universal figure hold) has occurred, the first special symbol hold second indicator 83, the second special symbol second indicator 81, the second special symbol hold The second display 84, the normal symbol second indicator 82, and the normal symbol hold second indicator 85 continue to display the same display as in FIGS. 68 (a) and 68 (b).

On the other hand, in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4 that are not displayed during the reach effect (SP reach effect), and the variation. The display of the icon display area 70D is displayed again, the hold icon H11 is displayed on the first display section 70B1 of the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, and the hold icon H12 is displayed on the second display section. Further, the variation icon displayed in the variation icon display area 70D has disappeared since the variation has ended. In the first hold number display area SH1, “2” indicating the first hold number is displayed. In addition, the effect symbol 70a and the first special symbol variation display area DZ1 are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss corresponding to the stop display of the first special symbol.
Since the second hold is not stored, the hold icon is not displayed in the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and “0” is displayed in the second hold number display area SH2. Further, since the second special symbol has not changed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol variation display area DZ2.

◇ As explained above, in the variable effect (other than the reach effect (SP reach effect)) performed in the non-time-saving game state, the special symbol variable display is the special symbol first display of the first game information display device 59. 60, 61, special symbol second indicators 80, 81 of the second game information display device 79, effect symbol 70a and special symbol variation display area (first special symbol variation) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Since the display area DZ1 and the second special symbol variation display area DZ2) are displayed, it is easy to grasp the variation display of the special symbol.
In addition, the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) is displayed in the special symbol hold first display 63, 64 of the first game information display device 59 and the special symbol hold number of the second game information display device 79. 2 display units 83 and 84, a holding icon display area (first holding icon display area 70B1 to 70B4, second holding icon display area 70C1 to 70C4) and a holding number display area (first liquid crystal display) 70 (main liquid crystal) Since it is displayed in the first hold number display area SH1 and the second hold number display area SH2), it is easy to grasp the hold number (first hold number, second hold number).

  On the other hand, during the reach production (SP reach production), in order to focus attention on the reach production (SP reach production), the hold icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B1-70) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). The display of the hold icon in 70B4, the second hold icon display area 70C1 to 70C4) is erased, but the display of the hold number (first hold number, second hold number) is a special symbol of the first game information display device 59. Hold first display 63, 64, special symbol hold second display 83, 84 of the second game information display device 79, hold number display area (first hold number) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) Since the display area SH1 and the second hold number display area SH2) are displayed, the hold number (first hold number, second hold number) can be grasped.

Note that even during the reach effect (SP reach effect), the number of reservations (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2) of the hold number display area (first liquid crystal display) 70 (main liquid crystal). Although the display of 1 hold number and 2nd hold number was displayed without erasing, the hold number (first hold) in the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2) Number and second hold number) may be deleted. Similarly, in the SP reach effect of FIG. 69 (b) described later, the blackout effect of FIG. 70 (a), the movement effect and the SPSP reach effect of FIG. 70 (b), the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1) In addition, the display of the hold number (the first hold number and the second hold number) in the second hold number display area SH2) may be deleted.
As described above, the hold icon display area (first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) during a specific effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, blackout effect, movement effect). , Second hold icon display area 70C1-70C4) hold icon display and hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2) hold number (first hold number, second hold) The display of the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) is displayed on the special symbol hold second display 83, 84 of the second game information display device 79 (the number of holds). Since the first hold number and the second hold number are displayed, the hold number (the first hold number and the second hold number) can be grasped.

Next, FIG. 69 will be described.
FIG. 69 is a display example of the first game information display device 59, the second game information display device 79, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) during the reach effect (SP reach effect) performed in the short-time game state. is there.

FIG. 69A shows a variation effect before a reach effect (SP reach effect) in the short-time gaming state. Here, in the 1st game information display device 59, the 2nd special symbol 1st indicator 61 performs change display of the 2nd special symbol which blinks LED in a predetermined order, and the 2nd special symbol hold 1st indicator 64 Indicates that two LEDs are stored, and two second holds are stored. Moreover, the normal symbol 1st display 62 performs the fluctuation | variation display of the normal symbol which blinks LED in a predetermined order. Since the right-handed first display 67 is in a short-time game, the LED is turned on to display the right-handed display.
The first special symbol first indicator 60 turns on a predetermined LED to indicate that the first special symbol is stopped, and the first special symbol hold first indicator 63 and the normal symbol hold first indicator 65. Indicates that any LED is turned off and no hold (first hold, ordinary hold) is stored.

In the second game information display device 79, the second special symbol second indicator 81 performs a variable display in which the LED blinks at a predetermined interval corresponding to the variable special symbol display, and the second special symbol hold second The indicator 84 lights up two LEDs, indicating that two second reservations are stored. Further, the normal symbol second display 82 performs normal symbol variation display in which the LEDs are blinked in a predetermined order corresponding to the normal symbol variation display. Further, since the right-handed second display 87 is in a short-time game, the LED is turned on to display the right-handed display.
The first special symbol second indicator 80 turns off the LED to indicate that the first special symbol is stopped, and the first special symbol hold second indicator 83 and the normal symbol hold second indicator 85 All the LEDs are turned off, indicating that no hold (second hold, general hold) is stored.

In the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the second special symbol in the effect symbol 70a and the second special symbol variation display area DZ2 is variably displayed corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol. Further, the hold icons H21 and H22 are displayed on the first display unit 70C1 and the second display unit 70C2 of the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, the change icon is displayed on the change icon display area 70D, In the 2-hold number display area SH2, “2” indicating the second hold number is displayed. Further, since the game is being played for a short time, the image G10 “right-handed →→” is displayed on the upper right of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal).
Since the first hold is not stored, no hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, and “0” is displayed in the first hold number display area SH1. Further, since the first special symbol has not changed, the first special symbol in the first special symbol variation display area DZ1 is stopped and displayed. Further, the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) displays character information G11 (“MM RUSH”) indicating the second specific gaming state (“high probability gaming state” and “time-short gaming state”). ing.

FIG. 69B shows a reach effect (SP reach effect). Here, in the 1st game information display device 59, since the change of the 2nd special symbol is performed continuously, the 2nd special symbol 1st indicator 61 is performing the variable display similarly to Drawing 69 (a). . And since one second hold occurs and the second hold number is 3, the second special symbol hold first indicator 64 blinks the left LED and lights the right LED, It shows that three second holds are stored. In addition, two new figure reservations have occurred and the number of new figure reservations has reached two, so the normal symbol hold first indicator 65 lights two LEDs, and two common figure holds are stored. It shows that.
In addition, since the 1st hold | maintenance has not newly generate | occur | produced, the 1st special symbol hold | maintenance 1st indicator 63 remains light-extinguished.

In the second game information display device 79, the second special symbol second indicator 81 performs a variable display corresponding to the second special symbol as in FIG. 69 (a). And since one second hold occurs and the second hold number becomes 3, the second special symbol hold second indicator 84 blinks the left LED and lights the right LED, It shows that three second holds are stored. In addition, two new figure reservations have occurred and the number of new figure reservations has reached two, so the normal symbol hold second indicator 85 lights two LEDs, and two common figure holds are stored. It shows that.
Since the first hold has not newly occurred, the first special symbol hold second indicator 83 remains off.

  On the other hand, in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), a reach effect (SP reach effect) using a character image is performed. In addition, the hold icons in the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4 and the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4 and the change icon TH in the change icon display area 70D are deleted, and the effect design 70a is displayed in a small size on the upper left. Thus, the reach production (SP reach production) is not disturbed. In addition, the number of holdings (first holding number, second holding number) and special symbol fluctuation display area (first special symbol fluctuation display) of the holding number display area (first holding number display area SH1, second holding number display area SH2). The special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the region DZ1, the second special symbol variation display region DZ2) are continuously displayed as in FIG. 69 (a). In the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), character information G12 (“SP reach”) indicating that the reach effect (SP reach effect) is being displayed is displayed.

FIG. 69 (c) shows the effect in which the reach effect (SP reach effect) is finished and the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed. Here, in the 1st game information display device 59, the 2nd special symbol 1st indicator 61 displays LED by the lighting mode (for example, only LED of the right end lights up) which shows a loss, and the stop display of the 2nd special symbol is carried out. Is going.
Since no new hold (first hold, second hold, general figure hold) has occurred, the first special symbol first display 60, the first special symbol hold first display 63, the second special symbol hold. The first display 64 and the normal symbol hold first display 65 display the same display as in FIG. Also, the right-handed first display 67 remains lit.

In the second game information display device 79, the second special symbol second indicator 81 turns off the LED corresponding to the stop display of the second special symbol, and indicates that the variation of the second special symbol is lost. Yes.
Since no new hold (first hold, second hold, universal figure hold) has occurred, the first special symbol second indicator 80, the first special symbol hold second indicator 83, the second special symbol hold The second display 84 and the normal symbol hold second display 85 display the same display as in FIG. The right-handed second display 87 is also lit.

On the other hand, in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the second special symbol in the effect symbol 70a and the second special symbol variation display area DZ2 is stopped and displayed in correspondence with the stop display of the second special symbol. Has been. In addition, the display of the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4 and the variation icon display area 70D that were not displayed during the reach effect (SP reach effect) is displayed again. 2 The hold icon H21 is displayed on the first display unit 70C1 of the hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, the hold icon H22 is displayed on the second display unit 70C2, and the hold icon H23 is displayed on the third display unit 70C3. ing. Further, the variation icon displayed in the variation icon display area 70D has disappeared since the variation has ended. In the second hold number display area SH2, “3” indicating the second hold number is displayed.
Since the first hold is not stored, no hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, and “0” is displayed in the first hold number display area SH1. Further, since the first special symbol has not changed, the first special symbol in the first special symbol variation display area DZ1 is stopped and displayed. Further, the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) displays character information (“sorry”) indicating that it is lost.

◇ As described above, in the variation effect (other than the reach effect (SP reach effect)) performed in the short-time game state, the special symbol first display 60 of the first game information display device 59 displays the special symbol variation display. 61, the special symbol second display devices 80 and 81 of the second game information display device 79, the effect symbol 70a of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the special symbol variation display area (first special symbol variation display). Since it is displayed in the area DZ1 and the second special symbol variation display region DZ2), it is easy to grasp the variation display of the special symbol.
In addition, the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) is displayed in the special symbol hold first display 63, 64 of the first game information display device 59 and the special symbol hold number of the second game information display device 79. 2 display units 83 and 84, a holding icon display area (first holding icon display area 70B1 to 70B4, second holding icon display area 70C1 to 70C4) and a holding number display area (first liquid crystal display) 70 (main liquid crystal) Since it is displayed in the first hold number display area SH1 and the second hold number display area SH2), it is easy to grasp the hold number (first hold number, second hold number).
The right-handed display includes a right-handed first display 67 of the first game information display device 59, a right-handed second display 87 of the second game information display device 79, and a first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Since the image G10 “right-handed →→” is displayed, the right-handed display is easy to grasp.

  On the other hand, during the reach effect (SP reach effect), the hold icon display areas (first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) are held. Although the display of the icon is erased, the number of holds (the first hold number, the second hold number) is displayed with the special symbol hold first indicators 63 and 64 of the first game information display device 59 and the second game information. In the special symbol hold second display 83, 84 of the display device 79 and the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Since it is displayed, the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) can be grasped.

  Further, the hold icons in the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4 and the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4 displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the change icon TH in the change icon display area 70D are displayed. As an effect for erasing the display, the SP reach effect has been described as an example as shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, but is not limited to the SP reach effect.

  For example, the display on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) suddenly darken during a fluctuating effect as shown in FIG. Or the development to reach production (so-called blackout production), the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4 and the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4 on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). And the display of the variable icon TH in the variable icon display area 70D are deleted, and the number of holds (the first hold number and the second hold number) is displayed in the special symbol hold number of the first game information display device 59. 1 display 63, 64, special symbol hold second display 83, 84 of the second game information display device 79, hold number display area (first hold number display) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) Frequency SH1, to be displayed out with the second number of holding display region SH2).

  By doing in this way, it can make a player grasp | ascertain the number of holding | maintenances (the 1st holding | maintenance number and the 2nd holding | maintenance number), preventing preventing a blackout effect.

  Further, when a moving effect using the movable effect member 73 is performed during the changing effect, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), the first hold on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) when the movable effect member 73 moves. The display of the hold icons in the icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4 and the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4 and the change icon TH in the change icon display area 70D is erased, and the hold number (first hold number, second hold number). ) Is displayed on the first game information display device 59 special symbol hold first display 63, 64, the second game information display device 79 special symbol hold second display 83, 84, and the first image display device 70. The display is made in the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2) of (main liquid crystal).

  By doing so, it is possible to make the player know the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) while preventing the movement effect from being hindered.

  Further, although not shown, in SPSP reach production as well, as in FIGS. 68 (b), 69 (c), 70 (a) and 70 (b), the first display on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). The display of the hold icon in the 1 hold icon display area 70B1 to 70B4, the 2nd hold icon display area 70C1 to 70C4 and the change icon TH in the change icon display area 70D is deleted, and the hold number (first hold number, second The display of the number of holds) is a special symbol hold first display 63, 64 of the first game information display device 59, a special symbol hold second display 83, 84 of the second game information display device 79, and a first image display. The display is made in the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2) of the device 70 (main liquid crystal).

  By doing so, it is possible to make the player know the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) while preventing the SPSP reach effect from being hindered.

Next, FIGS. 71 to 72 will be described.
71 to 72 are display examples of the first game information display device 59, the second game information display device 79, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) during the jackpot game.

FIG. 71 (a) shows the first round game effect of the jackpot game. Here, in the 1st game information display device 59, the 1st special symbol 1st indicator 60 is LED in the stop mode (for example, only the 2nd LED from the left lights up) which shows probability variation big hit 2 (special symbol "B"). Is turned on, the first special symbol is stopped and the number of rounds indicator 66 turns on the LED in a mode indicating the number of rounds (8 rounds) per probability variation (for example, only the fourth LED from the left is lit). This shows that the number of rounds of the jackpot game this time is 8, and the first special symbol hold first display 63 blinks two LEDs, indicating that four first holds are stored. . Further, since the right-handed first display 67 is in a big hit game, the LED is turned on to display the right-handed display.
The second special symbol first indicator 61 and the normal symbol first indicator 62 light a predetermined LED to indicate that the second special symbol and the normal symbol are stopped. In addition, the second special symbol hold first display 64 and the normal symbol hold first display 65 turn off any LED, indicating that no hold (second hold, normal figure hold) is stored.

In the second game information display device 79, the first special symbol second indicator 80 lights and displays an LED to indicate that it is a big hit, and the first special symbol hold second indicator 83 displays the LED 2 Blinking, indicating that four first holds are stored. Further, the right-handed second display 87 turns on the LED and performs right-handed display.
The second special symbol second indicator 81 and the normal symbol second indicator 82 light a predetermined LED to indicate that the second special symbol and the normal symbol are stopped. In addition, the second special symbol hold second display 84 and the normal symbol hold second display 85 turn off any LED, indicating that no hold (second hold, normal figure hold) is stored.

In the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the first round game effect of the jackpot game is performed, and the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4 displayed before the jackpot game start, the second hold The hold icons in the icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4 and the change icon display in the change icon display area 70D are deleted. In the first hold number display area SH1, “4” indicating the first hold number is displayed. The first special symbol variation display area DZ1 has a stop display indicating a big hit of the first special symbol corresponding to the stop display of the first special symbol. Further, since the big hit game is being played, the image G10 “right-handed →→” is displayed on the upper right of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal).
Since the second hold is not stored, “0” is displayed in the second hold number display area SH2 and the second special symbol is not changed, so the second special symbol change display area DZ2 is stopped and displayed. doing. In the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), character information G13 (“round 1”) indicating the number of round games currently being performed is displayed.

FIG. 71 (b) shows a promotion effect performed between the first opening of the big prize opening 50 of the fifth round game and the fourth closing. Here, in the 1st game information display device 59, since the common figure hold | maintenance generate | occur | produced newly, the normal symbol hold | maintenance 1st indicator 65 blinks four LED, and it is memorized that four common figure hold | maintains are memorize | stored. The normal symbol first display 62 performs the normal symbol variation display in which the LEDs blink in a predetermined order. The displays other than the normal symbol first display 62 and the normal symbol hold first indicator 65 are continuously displayed as in FIG. 71 (a).
Further, in the second game information display device 79, the normal symbol hold second indicator 85 blinks four LEDs to indicate that four general symbol holds are stored, and the normal symbol second indicator 82 is predetermined. In this order, the normal symbols are displayed in a blinking manner. The displays other than the normal symbol second display 82 and the normal symbol hold second display 85 continue to display the same display as in FIG. 71 (a).

On the other hand, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) displays an effect using a character image corresponding to the promotion effect. Here, the display of the image G10 “right-handed →→” displayed before the promotion effect is performed is deleted.
Note that the number of holdings (first holding number, second holding number) and special symbol variation display region (first special symbol variation display) of the holding number display region (first holding number display region SH1, second holding number display region SH2). The special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the region DZ1, the second special symbol variation display region DZ2) are continuously displayed. In the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), the character information indicating the number of round games is erased (not displayed).

  FIG. 71 (c) shows a moving effect of the movable effect member 73 during the promotion effect. Here, in the 1st game information display device 59 and the 2nd game information display device 79, the same display as Drawing 71 (b) is displayed continuously.

  In the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the effect image G15 is displayed in accordance with the movable effect member 73 moving to the front of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). In addition, as in FIG. 71 (b), the display of the image G10 “Right-handed →→” remains erased, and the special symbol variation display area (first special symbol variation display area DZ1, second special symbol variation display area DZ2). The special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are continuously displayed as in FIG. 71 (b). On the other hand, the display position of the hold number (first hold number, second hold number) in the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2) is changed, and the display position is changed as shown in FIG. ), It is displayed below the special symbol variation display area (first special symbol variation display area DZ1, second special symbol variation display area DZ2).

  As described above, the number of holds in the hold number display area (the first hold number display area SH1 and the second hold number display area SH2) is generated by the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). By changing the display position of the second hold number), the display of the effect performed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the display of the hold number (first hold number, second hold number) ( Is prevented.

  FIG. 72 (a) is an effect performed from the fifth opening of the big winning opening 50 of the fifth round game after the promotion effect. Here, in the 1st game information display device 59 and the 2nd game information display device 79, the same display as Drawing 71 (c) is performed.

In the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), an effect of notifying (notifying) that a jackpot game is continuously performed after the fifth round game is displayed using the character image. In addition, the image G10 “right-handed →→” that was not displayed during the promotion effect is displayed again.
Note that the number of holdings (first holding number, second holding number) and special symbol variation display region (first special symbol variation display) of the holding number display region (first holding number display region SH1, second holding number display region SH2). The special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the region DZ1, the second special symbol variation display region DZ2) are continuously displayed. The second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) displays character information G13 (round 5) indicating the number of round games that have been erased (not displayed).

  FIG. 72 (b) shows the ending effect of the jackpot game. Here, in the 1st game information display device 59 and the 2nd game information display device 79, the same display as Drawing 72 (a) is performed.

  The first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) displays an effect using a character image corresponding to the ending effect. Also, the number of holdings (first holding number, second holding number) in the holding number display area (first holding number display area SH1, second holding number display area SH2), special symbol fluctuation display area (first special symbol fluctuation display) The special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the region DZ1, the second special symbol variation display region DZ2) and the image G10 “right-handed →→” display continue to display the same as in FIG. 72 (a). It is displayed. Further, the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) displays character information G13 (“BONUS end”) indicating that the jackpot game has ended.

  FIG. 72 (c) is an effect showing that the jackpot game has ended and the game has shifted to a short-time game. Here, the round number display 66 of the first game information display device 59 ends (turns off) the display of the number of rounds when the jackpot ends. The first game information display device 59 displays the same display as in FIG. 72B except for the round number display 66. Also, the second game information display device 79 displays the same display as in FIG. 72 (b).

On the other hand, in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4 and the change icon display area 70D that are not displayed during the big hit game are displayed. The display is displayed again, and the hold icons H11 to H14 are displayed on the first display portion 70B1, the second display portion 70B2, the third display portion 70B3, and the fourth display portion 70B4 of the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4. Yes. In the first hold number display area SH1, “4” indicating the first hold number is displayed.
Since the second hold is not stored, the hold icon is not displayed in the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and “0” is displayed in the second hold number display area SH2. The special symbol variation display area (first special symbol variation display region DZ1, second special symbol variation display region DZ2) is stopped because the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not varied. Further, the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) displays character information G11 (“MM RUSH”) indicating the second specific gaming state (“high probability gaming state” and “time-short gaming state”). The

As described above, during the jackpot game, the hold icons in the hold icon display areas (the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4), and the fluctuations thereof, in order to draw attention to the jackpot game effect. Although the display of the variation icon TH in the icon display area 70D is erased, the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) is displayed on the special symbol hold first display 63 of the first game information display device 59. 64, a special symbol hold second display 83, 84 of the second game information display device 79, and a hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1, second of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal)). Since it is displayed in the hold number display area SH2), the hold number (first hold number, second hold number) can be grasped.
The right-handed display includes a right-handed first display 67 of the first game information display device 59, a right-handed second display 87 of the second game information display device 79, and a first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Since the image G10 “right-handed →→” is displayed, the right-handed display is easy to grasp.

  Further, even during the jackpot game, during the promotion effect, the display of the image G10 “right-handed →→” of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is deleted, but the right-handed display is the first game information display. Since the right-handed first display 67 of the device 59 and the right-handed second display 87 of the second game information display device 79 are displayed, the right-handed display (right-handed) can be grasped.

  The right-handed display includes the lighting of the LED of the right-handed first display 67 that is not marked, the lighting of the LED of the right-handed second display 87 that is marked “right-handed”, The image G10 “right-handed →→” is displayed on the one-image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). That is, the display mode of the right-handed display is displayed in a display mode that is more easily recognized by the player than the right-handed first display 67, and further from the right-handed second display 87. Also, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is displayed in a display mode that is easier for the player to recognize. Further, the right-handed second display 87 is provided closer to the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) than the right-handed first display 67, and is also right-handed in that it is easy to see for the player. The right-handed second display 87 is easier for the player to recognize than the first display 67.

Next, FIG. 73 will be described.
FIG. 73 is a display example of the first game information display device 59, the second game information display device 79, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) at the time of the power interruption.

FIG. 73A shows a variation effect before reaching a reach effect in the normal gaming state. Here, in the 1st game information display device 59, the 1st special symbol 1st indicator 60 performs change display of the 1st special symbol which blinks LED in a predetermined order, and the 1st special symbol hold 1st indicator 63 Blinks four LEDs, indicating that four first holds are stored.
The second special symbol first indicator 61 and the normal symbol first indicator 62 light a predetermined LED to indicate that the second special symbol and the normal symbol are stopped. In addition, the second special symbol hold first display 64 and the normal symbol hold first display 65 turn off any LED, indicating that no hold (second hold, normal figure hold) is stored.

In the second game information display device 79, the first special symbol second indicator 80 performs a variable display in which the LED blinks at a predetermined interval in response to the variable display of the first special symbol. The 2 indicator 83 blinks four LEDs, indicating that four first holds are stored.
The second special symbol second indicator 81 and the normal symbol second indicator 82 turn off the LEDs, indicating that the second special symbol and the normal symbol are stopped. In addition, the second special symbol hold second display 84 and the normal symbol hold second display 85 turn off any LED, indicating that no hold (second hold, normal figure hold) is stored.

In the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the first special symbol in the effect symbol 70a and the first special symbol variation display area DZ1 is variably displayed in correspondence with the variation display of the first special symbol. In addition, the hold icons H11 to H14 are displayed on the first display unit 70B1, the second display unit 70B2, the third display unit 70B3, and the fourth display unit 70B4 of the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, and the change icon display is performed. The change icon TH is displayed in the area 70D. In the first hold number display area SH1, “4” indicating the first hold number is displayed.
Since the second hold is not stored, the hold icon is not displayed in the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and “0” is displayed in the second hold number display area SH2. Further, since the second special symbol has not changed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol variation display area DZ2.

  Then, since the power is cut off and the supply of the power supply voltage is cut off, there is nothing in any of the first game information display device 59, the second game information display device 79, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). It is not displayed (FIG. 73 (b)).

  Thereafter, when the power is restored from the power-off, as shown in FIG. 73 (c), the first game information display device 59 and the second game information display device 79 are restored at substantially the same timing. Specifically, the first game information display device 59 controlled by the main CPU 110a displays all displays (special symbol first display 60, 61, normal symbol first indicator 62, special symbol hold based on the backup data. First display 63, 64, normal symbol hold first display 65, round number display 66, right-handed first display 67, high-probability gaming state display 68, and short-time gaming state display 69) are restored. However, the second game information display device 79 controlled by the sub CPU 130a is specially based on the special symbol hold memory designation command (step S13) and the normal symbol memory designation command (step S14) transmitted from the main CPU 110a at the time of recovery. The display of the symbol hold second display 83, 84 and the normal symbol hold second display 85 is restored. On the other hand, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) notifies that the power is being restored based on the fact that the image control unit 140 has received the power restoration specification command (step S7) transmitted from the main CPU 110a at the time of restoration. Perform power restoration effect.

  Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the image control unit 140 displays the number of holds on the display unit of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) based on the special symbol hold storage designation command (step S13) transmitted from the main CPU 110a at the time of recovery. The holding number display (first holding number display, second holding number display) in the areas (first holding number display area SH1, second holding number display area SH2) is resumed (recovered) (FIG. 73 (d)).

  As described above, when the power failure occurs and recovery is performed, the number of holdings (first holding number, second holding number) is displayed on the special symbol first display 60, 61 of the first game information display device 59. And the special symbol second indicators 80 and 81 of the second game information display device 79 are restored and displayed at substantially the same timing, and then the reserved number display area (first holding) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). In the number display area SH1, the second hold number display area SH2) the hold number display (first hold number display, second hold number display) is restored and displayed. That is, when the power supply is restored, the number of holds on the second game information display device 79 rather than the display of the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). The display of (first hold number, second hold number) is displayed (recovered) first.

  Thus, by restoring the display of the hold number (first hold number, second hold number) on the second game information display device 79 before the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the first Even during the power restoration effect on the image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the second game information display device 79 displays the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number). The player can grasp the first hold number and the second hold number).

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of special symbols held is normally displayed as the special symbol hold first indicators 63 and 64 of the first game information display device 59 and the special symbol hold number of the second game information display device 79. 2 display units 83 and 84, a holding icon display area (first holding icon display area 70B1 to 70B4, second holding icon display area 70C1 to 70C4) and a holding number display area (first liquid crystal display) 70 (main liquid crystal) Although displayed in four places, the first hold number display area SH1 and the second hold number display area SH2), during a specific effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, blackout effect, movement effect) and jackpot effect If so, the special symbol hold first display 63, 64 of the first game information display device 59, the special symbol hold second display 83, 84 of the second game information display device 79, and the first image table. Device 70 the number of holding the display area (main LCD) (first number of holding display region SH1, second number of holding display region SH2) is displayed in three places with. In addition, if it is after restoration after power-off, the special symbol hold first display 63, 64 of the first game information display device 59 and the special symbol hold second display 83, 84 of the second game information display device 79. Are displayed in two places.
In other words, the number of special symbols held may be displayed in two places, three places, or four places depending on the progress of the game.

(Installation example different from the installation example of the 2nd game information display apparatus 79 of this embodiment)
77 (a) and 77 (b) are views showing an installation example different from the installation example of the second game information display device 79 of the present embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, the second game information display device 79 is provided on the game board 5 in the lower left side (the left side of the game region 5a) inside the game area 5a, and the upper part of the second game information display device 79 is the game area 5a. However, as shown in FIG. 77 (a), the game ball A may be installed on the front surface of the second game information display device 79 so that the game ball A can pass therethrough. For example, the game board 5 may be provided with an opening and installed by fitting the second game information display device 79 into the opening so that the game ball A can pass through the front surface of the second game information display device 79. Then, the gaming board 5 is formed of a permeable member (for example, transparent resin), and the second gaming information display device 79 is installed on the back side of the gaming board 5 when viewed from the player, thereby providing the second gaming information. The game ball A may pass through the front surface of the display device 79. Thus, by providing the front surface of the second game information display device 79 at a position where the game ball can pass, the space is effectively used and the player can easily recognize it.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), the second game information display device 79 is constituted by a permeable member (for example, a transparent resin), and the second passage route 21 through which the game ball A can pass is second. It may also be formed inside the game information display device 79. As described above, the second game information display device 79 forms a passing path for the game ball, so that the space is effectively used and the position is easily recognized by the player.

  In the present embodiment, the right-handed second display 87 has a display mode that is easier for the player to recognize than the right-handed first display 67 by marking “right-handed” in the vicinity of the LED. The display mode of the second hitting display 87 is not limited to this, and any display mode may be used as long as it is easier for the player to recognize than the right hitting first display 67. For example, it may be a blinking display instead of an LED lighting display, or may be lit in various colors at predetermined intervals using a full color LED, or larger than the LED of the right-handed first display 67. A size LED may be used. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to recognize than the right-handed first display 67.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the hold icon of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) has a higher expectation level than the normal display mode (white) hold icon, and the special display mode 3 (red) has a higher expectation. Even if the hold icon is displayed, the special symbol hold second display 83, 84 is displayed in the same display mode (LED lighting or flashing) as the normal display mode hold icon is displayed. However, the display of the special symbol hold second display devices 83 and 84 may be displayed in a special display mode corresponding to the display mode of the hold icon of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). For example, the special symbol hold second display 83, 84 uses an LED capable of full color display, and the special symbol hold second display corresponds to the hold icon of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). The display colors 83 and 84 may be changed.

  In the present embodiment, the first hold icon display area 70B1 on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is used for the SP reach effect, the blackout effect, the movement effect and the jackpot game effect performed using the movable effect member 73. ˜70B4, the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4 and the display of the change icon display area 70D have been deleted, but the display to be deleted is not limited to this. For example, the display of the special symbol hold number in the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2) may be deleted, or the special symbol fluctuation display area (first special symbol fluctuation display) The display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the region DZ1, the second special symbol variation display region DZ2) may be deleted, or all of them may be deleted.

  As described above, even if the information related to the progress of the game is deleted, it is displayed on the second game information display device 79, so that the SP reach effect, the blackout effect, the movement effect and the jackpot performed using the movable effect member 73 are displayed. The player can grasp information related to the progress of the game while preventing the game effect from being hindered.

  In the present embodiment, the display of the special symbol hold number at the time of power restoration after the occurrence of power interruption is substantially the same as the display restoration of the first game information display device 59 and the second game information display device 79. The display of the second game information display device 79 is restored after the display of the first game information display device 59 is restored, so that the first game information display device 59 → the second game information display device 79 → the first image. The display of the special symbol reservation number may be restored in the order of the display device main liquid crystal) 70.

  In addition, when the power is restored after the power is cut off, only the special symbol hold number and the general figure hold number are transmitted from the main CPU 110a to the sub CPU 130a, but other information is transmitted. Anyway.

  For example, information on whether the special symbol is changing or information on whether the normal symbol is changing may be transmitted. When these pieces of information are transmitted, even when the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is in a power recovery effect, the second game information display device 79 uses the special symbol second indicators 80 and 81 and the normal symbol second symbol. The display on the display 82 can be restored, and the player can grasp the fluctuation display of the special figure and the fluctuation display of the normal figure.

Further, game state information (at least information about whether or not the time-short game state) may be transmitted. By doing so, the right-handed second display 87 can be restored in the second game information display device 79 even during the power restoration effect in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). The player can grasp the right-handed display.
For example, if the game is a big hit when the power is restored, if you do not make a right turn during the power restoration production, you will miss the opportunity to win a game ball in the big prize opening. By restoring the display of the device 87 so that the player can grasp the right-handed display, the player can be prevented from suffering a disadvantage.

  In the present embodiment, the player can adjust the brightness of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), the frame lighting device 10, the panel lighting device 74, and the like. Although not configured, the gaming machine 1 can be configured so that the player can adjust the brightness.

  For example, the cross key 19 is displayed during a customer waiting effect in which a customer waiting demonstration image or a power saving image is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) or the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display). Is operated, and a signal indicating that the cross key 19 is operated is input to the effect control unit 130m, the sub CPU 130a transmits a command corresponding to the operation to the image control unit 140.

  Then, the image control unit 140 displays the brightness adjustment image on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) based on the reception of the command from the effect control unit 130m. Take control.

If the left button or the right button of the cross key 19 is operated while the brightness adjustment image is displayed, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the left button or the right button of the cross key 19 has been operated. In accordance with the operation of the cross key 19 from among several levels of brightness prepared in advance (for the left button, the brightness can be lowered from the currently set brightness and the right button can be used. For example, the luminance is set higher than the currently set luminance), and a luminance command corresponding to the selected luminance is transmitted to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 160.
The sub CPU 130a corresponds to the brightness adjusting means of the present invention.

  The image control unit 140 changes the luminance of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) based on the luminance command from the effect control unit 130m and displays the luminance adjustment. Control is performed to update and display an image indicating that the luminance has been changed. Further, the lamp control unit 160 performs control to change the luminance of the panel lighting device 74 and the frame lighting device 10 based on the luminance command from the effect control unit 130m.

  In such a gaming machine 1, the cross key 19 is operated by the player, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), the panel lighting device 74, and the frame lighting. Even if the luminance of the device 10 is changed, each display of the second game information display device 79 (first special symbol second display 80, second special symbol second display 81, normal symbol second display 82, The brightness of the LEDs of the first special symbol hold second indicator 83, the second special symbol hold second indicator 84, the normal symbol hold second indicator 85, and the right-handed second indicator 87) is not changed.

In this way, even if the player operates the cross key 19 to play a game with reduced brightness, each display of the second game information display device 79 (the first special symbol second display 80, the second display). Special symbol second indicator 81, normal symbol second indicator 82, first special symbol hold second indicator 83, second special symbol hold second indicator 84, normal symbol hold second indicator 85, and right The brightness of the LED of the second hitting display 87) is not changed and is displayed at a constant brightness, so that the player can grasp information regarding the progress of the game.
Each display of the first game information display device 59 (first special symbol first display 60, second special symbol first indicator 61, normal symbol first indicator 62, first special symbol hold first display LED 63, second special symbol hold first display 64, normal symbol hold first display 65, right-handed first display 67, high probability gaming state display 68, and short-time gaming state display 69) The brightness is not changed.

  Also, each display of the second game information display device 79 (first special symbol second display 80, second special symbol second indicator 81, normal symbol second indicator 82, first special symbol hold second display) The brightness of the LEDs of the device 83, the second special symbol hold second display 84, the normal symbol hold second display 85, and the right-handed second display 87) may be changed. In this case, display control data corresponding to the luminance determined by the sub CPU 130a may be created and output to each display of the second game information display device 79.

  Further, the control method for adjusting the brightness is not limited to the above method. For example, only the command indicating that the cross key 19 has been operated is transmitted from the effect control unit 130m, and the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 160 store the currently set brightness, thereby providing the effect control. The brightness may be changed by referring to the currently set brightness stored based on the command from the unit 130m and determining the brightness to be changed.

(Modification of this embodiment)
74 to 76 are diagrams showing modifications of the present embodiment. Specifically, the performance control board 130 includes an RTC (real time clock) (not shown), and the execution mode of the music preview effect and the step-up notification effect is changed based on the date information acquired from the RTC. This is different from the embodiment.

  First, a modified example of the notice effect determination process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the latter half of the notice effect determination process in effect control unit 130m shown in FIG. In addition, since the process before step S1212-7 is the same as FIG. 48, illustration is abbreviate | omitted here. Also, the same processing as in FIG. 48 has the same reference numeral.

  First, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the notice type is determined to be a music notice effect. If it is determined that the music preview effect has been determined (S1212-8: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1212-20. On the other hand, if it is determined that the music preview effect has not been determined (S1212-8: No), the process proceeds to step S1212-14.

  In step S1212-20, the sub CPU 130a acquires the current date information from the RTC. Although the date information is directly acquired from the RTC here, the date information acquired from the RTC when the gaming machine 1 is turned on is stored in the sub RAM 130c, and the date information is acquired from the sub RAM 130c. You may do it.

  In step S1212-21, the sub CPU 130a preferentially executes the music preview effect based on the time-specific music selection table and current date information shown in FIG. Determine the type. Details of the time-dependent music selection table shown in FIG. 75A will be described later.

  In step S1212-9, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the result of the variable display of the special symbol (the effect symbol 70a) is a big hit. If it is determined that the game is a big hit (S1212-9: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1212-21. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot will not be reached (S1212-9: No), the process proceeds to step S1212-12.

  In step S1212-10, the sub CPU 130a selects the lost music notice mode determination table shown in FIG. 75 (b). In step S1212-21, the sub CPU 130a selects the jackpot music shown in FIG. 75 (c). Select the notice mode determination table. Details of the music notice mode determination table in FIGS. 75B and 75C will be described later.

  In step S1212-2, the sub CPU 130a performs music notice pattern determination processing. Specifically, the fluctuation effect pattern and the random number value for determining the notice mode are obtained, the random effect pattern and the random number value for determining the notice mode are determined, and the music notice mode determination selected in step S1212-10 or step S1212-11 is performed. The music is compared with the table, the music notice pattern (music notice form) is determined according to the selection rate set in the music notice mode determination table, and the determined music notice pattern is stored in the notice pattern information storage area.

  In step S1212-22, the sub CPU 130a specifies a music preview pattern designation command corresponding to the priority music and music preview pattern information determined in step S1212-21, and the specified music preview pattern designation command is stored in the sub RAM 130c. Set to send buffer. When this process ends, the current notice effect determination process ends.

  Note that the music preview pattern designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 in the data output process of step S1600. . Then, the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 display the music preview effect corresponding to the music preview pattern designation command (variation effect pattern) in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). The second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), the sound output device 9, the panel lighting device 74, the frame lighting device 10, the panel driving device 75, and the like are executed.

  In step S1212-2, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the notice type is determined to be the step-up notice effect. If it is determined that the step-up notice effect has been determined (S1212-14: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1212-23. On the other hand, if it is determined that the step-up notice effect has not been determined (S1212-14: No), the current notice effect determination process ends.

  In step S1212-23, the sub CPU 130a acquires current date information from the RTC. Although the date information is directly acquired from the RTC here, the date information acquired from the RTC when the gaming machine 1 is turned on is stored in the sub RAM 130c, and the date information is acquired from the sub RAM 130c. You may do it.

  In step S1212-15, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the result of the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) is a big hit. If it is determined that the game will be a big hit (S1212-15: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1212-17. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot will not be reached (S1212-9: No), the process proceeds to step S1212-16.

  In step S1212-21, the sub CPU 130a selects the step-up notice mode determination table for lose shown in FIG. 76A, and in step S1212-21, the sub CPU 130a selects the jackpot for jackpot shown in FIG. 76B. Select the step-up notice mode determination table. Details of the step-up notice mode determination table shown in FIGS. 76A and 76B will be described later.

  In step S1212-21, the sub CPU 130a performs step-up notice pattern determination processing. Specifically, the variable effect pattern and the date information are acquired, and the variable effect pattern, the date information, and the step-up notice mode determination table selected in Step S1212-16 or Step S1212-17 are collated. A step-up notice pattern (step-up notice mode) is determined, and the determined step-up notice pattern is stored in the notice pattern information storage area.

  In step S1212-21, the sub CPU 130a identifies a step up notice pattern designation command corresponding to the determined step up notice pattern, and sets the identified step up notice pattern designation command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. When this process ends, the current notice effect determination process ends.

  Note that the step-up notice pattern designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 in the data output process of step S1600. The Then, the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 generate a step-up notice effect corresponding to the step-up notice pattern designation command (variation effect pattern) in the first image display device 70 (main Liquid crystal), second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), audio output device 9, panel lighting device 74, frame lighting device 10, panel driving device 75, and the like.

(Music selection table by time)
FIG. 75 (a) is a diagram showing a time-specific music selection table that is referred to when priority music is determined in step S1212-21. In the music selection table, a monthly period is associated with a priority music (notice music).

  When the date information is included in the period from January to April, the music A is selected as the priority music, and when the date information is included in the period from May to August, the music B is selected as the priority music. If the date information is included in the period from September to December, the song C is selected as the priority song.

(Music notice mode determination table)
75 (b) and 75 (c) are diagrams showing a music notice mode determination table in the first modification. Specifically, FIG. 75 (b) is a diagram showing a lost music notice mode determination table, and FIG. 75 (c) is a diagram showing a jackpot music notice mode determination table.

  75 (b) and 75 (c), the variation effect pattern, the selection rate based on the random number value for determining the notice mode acquired at the time of determining the music notice effect, and the type of the music notice pattern are associated with each other. Yes.

  Note that the contents of each effect defined by the notice content (notice scenario) of the music notice mode determination table shown in FIGS. 75 (b) and 75 (c) are the same as the music notice effect of the present embodiment. “Song L”, “Song M”, and “Song N” are shown in the part indicating the type of the music. These are variables, “Song L” indicates a priority song corresponding to the current date, “Song M” indicates a priority song corresponding to the next period of time corresponding to the current date, and “Song N” "" Indicates a priority song corresponding to the next time after the time corresponding to the current date.

  Therefore, as a feature of the music notice mode determination table shown in FIGS. 75 (b) and 75 (c), the type of music selected preferentially (first music effect) changes according to date information based on RTC. The point set to is mentioned. As a result, the effect mode of the music notice effect changes depending on the date information at that time, and the player is less likely to get tired of the music notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operation of the gaming machine 1.

(SU notice mode determination table)
FIGS. 76A and 76B are diagrams showing a step-up notice mode determination table in the first modification. Specifically, FIG. 76 (a) is a diagram showing a step-up notice mode determination table for lose, and FIG. 76 (b) is a diagram showing a step-up notice mode determination table for jackpot.

  76 (a) and 76 (b), the variation effect pattern, the monthly period, and the type of step-up notice pattern are associated with each other.

  Note that the contents of the effects defined by the notice contents (notice scenario) of the step-up notice mode determination table shown in FIGS. 76A and 76B are the same as the step-up notice effects of the present embodiment. The difference is that the date information is used instead of the selection rate based on the random number for determining the production mode.

  Therefore, the feature of the step-up notice mode determination table shown in FIGS. 76A and 76B is set so that the type of the step-up notice pattern selected by the date information based on the RTC changes. A point is mentioned. As a result, the presentation mode (selection mode) of the step-up notice effect changes depending on the date information (month, day) at that time, and the player becomes less tired of the step-up notice effect. It becomes possible to suppress. In addition, you may change according to a week or a day instead of changing the production | presentation aspect of a step-up notice effect according to the month.

  Note that the specific effect (acquired challenge effect) and the step-up notice effect may be selected in association with the date information of the RTC. Specifically, a plurality of specific effects (acquisition challenge effects) having different effect modes, such as specific effects 1 to 3, are set, and for example, for 1 to April, the specific effect 1 and the step-up notice effect 1 are selected. If the setting is made so that the specific effect 2 and the step-up notice effect 2 are selected from May to August, and the specific effect 3 and the step-up notice effect 3 are set to be selected from September to December. Good. Further, the type of specific effect and the type of step-up notice effect may be selected separately according to date information. For example, as the setting of the specific effect, it is set so that the specific effect 1 is selected in January to April, the specific effect 2 is set in May to August, and the specific effect 3 is set in September to December. Set to be selected. As the setting for the step-up notice effect, the step-up notice effect 1 is selected for 1, 4, 7, and October, and the step-up notice effect 2 is selected for 2, 5, 8, and November. It may be set so that step-up notice effect 3 is set in March, June, September, and December.

In the above-described embodiment, the three kinds of notice effects are a symbol notice effect, a music notice effect, and a step-up notice effect. However, the number may be less than or more than three.
Moreover, although the maximum number of times of the music production performed in the music preview production is set to 3 times, it may be less or more than 3 times.
Furthermore, although the maximum number of step effects executed in the step-up notice effect is four, it may be less or more than four.

  Moreover, although the difference in the maximum number of steps of the step-up notice effects 1 to 3 was set to one time, it may be more than once, and even in that case, a specific effect (acquired challenge effect) is executed. It may be configured to execute until the final step effect.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although it set so that the execution time of each step notice in step-up notice effects 1-3 may be changed, such a time value setting is not restricted only to step-up notice effects. Instead, for example, the time value of the notice effect for each variable display of the continuous notice executed as a result of the pre-judgment process for preliminarily judging the judgment result of the jackpot lottery may be used.

(Main processing of the image controller)
The main process of the image control unit 140 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing main processing in the image control unit 140.

  First, in step T1, the display control CPU 140a sets an interrupt prohibition that prohibits timer interruption. In step T2, the display control CPU 140a reads a main processing program from the display control ROM 140b and initializes a flag stored in the display control RAM 140c. Perform initialization processing such as.

  In step T3, the display control CPU 140a sets an interrupt permission for permitting the timer interrupt. In step T4, for example, the voice output device 9 refers to the state (switch position) of the changeover switch that can be operated by the game shop clerk. For switching the adjustment mode related to the adjustment of the volume (value) of the effect sound output from the display and the luminance (value) of the image display devices 70 and 71 and various illumination devices (frame illumination device 10 and panel illumination device 74). Perform mode switching processing.

  In step T5, the display control CPU 140a refers to the reception buffer of the display control RAM 140c to determine whether or not an effect instruction command is received from the effect control unit 130m, and if not received (step T5: No). In step T8, if the process has been received and received (step T5: Yes), in step T6, an animation pattern is determined from the type of animation group corresponding to the received direction instruction command, and a predetermined value is stored in the overall RAM 144. Set the animation pattern to be set (set) in the area.

  The production instruction command is a customer waiting production command, an icon display command, a variation production pattern command, a pattern pattern command, a confirmed production pattern command, a certain variation confirmed production pattern command, a notice production command, an operation promotion command, an operation production Command, roulette effect command, opening effect command, round effect command, ending effect command, power-on effect command, power recovery effect command, error effect command, and the like.

  The animation group is the type of objects that make up the effect image, the scene (timing) and weight frame (display time) in which the effect image is displayed, the target data (sprite image identification number, transfer source address, etc.), One or more animation patterns, which are information that specifies (designates) parameters (sprite image display position, transfer destination address, etc.), drawing method, information specifying an image display device that displays an effect image, and the like are bundled. Is a group formed by.

  The types of animation groups include, for example, a production symbol group for displaying the animation of the production symbol 70a, a group of icons for displaying the hold icon and the animation of the fluctuation icon, and a fluctuation production animation such as a background and a character. Examples include a group of variable effects for display, a group of notice effects for displaying an animation such as a notice, and a group of jackpot effects for displaying an animation of a jackpot effect.

  In step T7, the display control CPU 140a performs sound setting processing for determining and setting a sound pattern from the type of sound group corresponding to the received effect instruction command. The types of sound groups include, for example, a BGM group for producing a fluctuating effect, an SE (sound effect) group accompanying a predetermined effect, a BGM group for producing a jackpot game, and an error sound group for performing error notification Etc.

  In step T8, the display control CPU 140a updates the effect image and the notification image to be displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71 (the drawing of a new effect image and the notification image is performed). It is determined whether or not there is a switching flag. If there is no frame switching flag (step T8: No), the process proceeds to step T4, and if there is a frame switching flag (step T8: Yes), In step T9, the frame switching flag is cleared.

  In step T10, the display control CPU 140a generates a display list including a drawing control command group, and performs processing for outputting the generated display list to the drawing control unit 141 (VDP). Here, the display list is image forming information for forming an effect image or a notification image displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71, and is generated for each frame of one unit or a plurality of units (frame update timing). In this embodiment, a display list is generated for each frame.

  Specifically, by setting a drawing control command according to the contents of the animation scene information (address) for each animation pattern updated in the animation control process described later, one frame corresponding to the current number of frames is set. Display lists are generated. The drawing control commands are sequentially set from the animation pattern of the lowest priority animation group to the animation pattern of the highest priority animation group according to the priority order (drawing order) set for the anime group to which each anime pattern belongs. However, the reverse order is also possible.

  In step T11, the display control CPU 140a performs a drawing command process for instructing the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) to draw an effect image based on the display list output in step T10. By performing the drawing command process, the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) generates image data on which a presentation image or a notification image based on the display list is superimposed, draws the image data in the drawing frame buffer, and displays the display frame. Processing for displaying the effect image drawn in the buffer on the image display devices 70 and 71 is performed.

  In step T <b> 12, the display control CPU 140 a generates a sound list composed of sound control commands and outputs the generated sound list to the sound control unit 150. Here, the sound list is sound output information for designating sound (BGM, sound effect, error notification sound, etc.) such as sound data and music data to be output from the sound output device 9, and output of a new sound. Is generated on the basis of the drawing frame.

  In step T13, the display control CPU 140a performs sound output command processing for instructing the sound control unit 150 to output sound based on the sound list output in step T12. By performing the sound output command processing, the sound control unit 150 causes the sound output device 9 to output sound based on the sound list.

  Therefore, various sounds are output from the audio output device 9 so as to be synchronized (tuned) with the frame update timing by the drawing control unit 141 (VDP), and are synchronized (tuned) with the frame update timing. Thus, the output from the audio output device 9 ends. Note that the output of various sounds from the audio output device 9 may be stopped so as not to synchronize (tune) with the frame update timing.

  In step T14, the display control CPU 140a performs an animation control process for updating the animation scene information (address) for each set animation pattern as a preparation for creating a display list for the next frame, and then performs the process in step T4. After that, the processing from step T4 to step T14 is repeated so as to loop.

(Image control command reception interrupt processing)
A command reception interrupt process of the image control unit 140 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79A is a flowchart showing the command reception interrupt process of the image control unit 140. The command reception interrupt process is executed by receiving an effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m.

  In step T20, the display control CPU 140a performs a command reception process for receiving an effect instruction command or the like transmitted from the effect control unit 130m. Specifically, a process of storing the effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m in the reception buffer of the display control RAM 140c is performed. When this process ends, the current command reception interrupt process ends.

(V blank interrupt processing of the image controller)
The V blank interrupt process of the image control unit 140 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79B is a flowchart showing the V blank interrupt process of the image control unit 140. In the V blank interrupt process, the display of the effect image for one frame from the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) ends ( This is executed every time a V blank signal transmitted every 1/30 seconds = about 33 ms) is received.

  In step T30, the display control CPU 140a performs counter update processing for updating various counters (scene switching counter, weight frame counter, frame counter, etc.) by a predetermined number (for example, adding “1”), and in step T31, rendering control is performed. A frame buffer switching command process is performed to instruct the unit 141 (VDP) to switch between the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area of the VRAM 143.

  As a result, every time the V blank interrupt process is executed every 1/30 seconds (about 33 ms), the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are changed to “drawing frame buffer” and “display frame buffer”. Will be switched alternately.

  In step T32, the display control CPU 140a sets a frame switching flag indicating that the drawing (display) frame has been switched, and ends the current V blank interrupt processing. Since the frame switching flag is referred to in step T8, the processes in steps T9 to T14 are executed every time the V blank interrupt process is executed (frame update timing).

(Image pattern setting process in the image controller)
The animation pattern setting process of the image control unit 140 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the animation pattern setting process of the image control unit 140.

  First, in step T6-1, the display control CPU 140a determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is a customer waiting effect command, and if it is not a customer waiting effect command (step T6-1: No), step S6-1 is performed. If the process is shifted to T6-3 and is a customer waiting effect command (step T6-1: Yes), in step T6-2, a customer waiting group for displaying a customer waiting animation is displayed. A process for setting an animation pattern waiting for a customer is determined and set (set) in a predetermined area of the display control RAM 140c.

  In step T6-3, the display control CPU 140a determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is an icon display command. If the command is not an icon display command (step T6-3: No), the display control CPU 140a determines whether the display instruction command is an icon display command or not. If the command is an icon display command (step T6-3: Yes), an icon from a group of icons for displaying the animation of the hold icon and the animation of the variable icon is displayed in step T6-4. The animation pattern of the icon to be set and set (set) in a predetermined area of the display control RAM 140c is determined.

  In step T6-5, the display control CPU 140a determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is a variation effect pattern command. If it is not a variation effect pattern command (step T6-5: No), step T6- If the command is a variation effect pattern command (step T6-5: Yes), in step T6-6, the variation effect group for displaying the background animation and the character animation is displayed. An animation pattern is set for a changing effect that is determined and set (set) in a predetermined area of the display control RAM 140c.

  In step T6-7, the display control CPU 140a determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is a symbol pattern command. If it is not a symbol pattern command (step T6-7: No), the display control CPU 140a proceeds to step T6-9. If the process is shifted to a symbol pattern command (step T6-7: Yes), a group of effect symbols for displaying an effect symbol animation and a special symbol animation (4th symbol) in step T6-8. The design animation pattern is determined by determining the design animation pattern and setting (setting) the design animation pattern in a predetermined area of the display control RAM 140c.

  In step T6-9, the display control CPU 140a determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is a notice effect command, and if it is not a notice effect command (step T6-9: No), step T6- If the command is a command for a notice effect (step T6-9: Yes), a notice effect for displaying a notice effect for notifying that there is a possibility of a big hit in step T6-10. The animation pattern for the notice effect is determined by determining the animation pattern for the notice effect from the group and setting (setting) it in a predetermined area of the display control RAM 140c.

  In step T6-11, the display control CPU 140a determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is an operation promotion command, and if it is not an operation promotion command (step T6-11: No), step T6- If the command is an operation promotion command (step T6-11: Yes), the operation promotion group for displaying the operation promotion effect prompting the operation of the effect button 17 is displayed at step T6-12. An operation-promoting animation pattern setting process is performed in which an operation-promoting animation pattern is determined and set (set) in a predetermined area of the display control RAM 140c.

  In step T6-13, the display control CPU 140a determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is an operation effect command. If not (step T6-13: No), the display control CPU 140a determines whether or not the effect instruction command is an operation effect command. If the command is an operation effect command (step T6-13: Yes), the operation effect animation pattern is determined from the operation effect group for displaying the operation effect in step T6-14. Then, an animation pattern setting process of an operation effect to be set (set) in a predetermined area of the display control RAM 140c is performed.

  In step T6-15, the display control CPU 140a determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is a roulette effect command, and if it is not a roulette effect command (step T6-15: No), step T6- If the command is a roulette effect command (step T6-15: Yes), in step T6-16, the expected degree that the result of the variable effect is a big hit is announced, or the change display of the normal symbol is performed. A roulette effect animation in which a roulette effect animation pattern is determined from a roulette effect group for displaying a roulette effect for notifying that the result is a win and set (set) in a predetermined area of the display control RAM 140c. Perform pattern setting processing.

  In step T6-17, the display control CPU 140a determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is an opening effect command, and if it is not an opening effect command (step T6-17: No), step T6-17 If the command is an opening effect command (step T6-17: Yes), the animation pattern of the opening effect is determined from the opening effect group for displaying the opening effect in step T6-18. Then, the setting process of the animation pattern of the opening effect that is set (set) in a predetermined area of the display control RAM 140c is performed.

  In step T6-19, the display control CPU 140a determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is a round effect command. If the command is not a round effect command (step T6-19: No), the display control CPU 140a determines whether or not the effect instruction command is a round effect command. If the command is a round production command (step T6-19: Yes), the animation pattern of the round production is determined from the round production group for displaying the round production in step T6-20. Then, processing for setting an animation pattern for a round effect to be set (set) in a predetermined area of the display control RAM 140c is performed.

  In step T6-21, the display control CPU 140a determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is an ending effect command. If not (step T6-21: No), the display control CPU 140a determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is an ending effect command. If the command is an ending effect command (step T6-21: Yes), the ending effect animation pattern is determined from the ending effect group for displaying the ending effect in step T6-22. The ending effect animation pattern to be set (set) in a predetermined area of the display control RAM 140c is determined.

  In step T6-23, the display control CPU 140a determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is a power-on effect command. If the command is not a power-on effect command (step T6-23: No), the display control CPU 140a proceeds to step T6-23. When the process is shifted to T6-25 and the command is a power-on effect (step T6-23: Yes), in step T6-24, the power-on effect is displayed from the power-on effect group for displaying the power-on effect. Is set and set (set) in a predetermined area of the display control RAM 140c.

  In step T6-25, the display control CPU 140a determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is a power restoration effect command. If the command is not a power restoration effect command (step T6-25: No), the display control CPU 140a performs the step. When the process is shifted to T6-27 and the command is a power recovery effect (step T6-25: Yes), a power-on effect is displayed from the power recovery effect group for displaying the power recovery effect in step T6-26. Is set and set (set) in a predetermined area of the display control RAM 140c.

  In step T6-27, the display control CPU 140a determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is an error effect command, and if it is not an error effect command (step T6-27: No), the current animation instruction is displayed. When the pattern setting process is completed and the command is an error effect (step T6-27: Yes), in step T6-28, an error effect animation pattern is displayed from the error effect group for displaying the error effect. The animation pattern setting process of the error effect to be determined and set (set) in a predetermined area of the display control RAM 140c is performed, and the current animation pattern setting process is terminated.

(Schematic diagram of image drawing by drawing control unit)
A schematic diagram of image drawing by the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) will be described with reference to FIG.

  The drawing control unit 141 (VDP) reads various images from the CGROM 142 based on the image forming information of the display list output from the display control CPU 140a, and performs arithmetic processing such as transmittance (transparency) and display color on the read various images. Then, image data on which one or a plurality of images are superimposed is generated by writing into the drawing frame buffer (first frame buffer or second frame buffer) of the VRAM 143 in accordance with a predetermined priority.

The image with the first priority (first layer L1) includes an information image (version information image “XX version XX”), power-on information image “RAM clear in preparation XX”, power restoration information image “ "Restoring power" is set.
A specific effect image (a notice effect image, a character image, a base image, a color bar image, or the like) is set for the second priority image (second layer L2).
A progress guide image (a hold icon image, the change icon image, a hold number display image, a special symbol image, etc.) is set for the image with the third priority (third layer L3).
For the image with the fourth priority (fourth layer L4), a symbol image (effect symbol image or the like) is set.
A background image (normal background image, high-accuracy background image, sub-background image, etc.) is set for the image of the fifth priority (fifth layer L5).

  Then, in response to a frame switching instruction from the display control CPU 140a, the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are alternately switched between the drawing frame buffer and the display frame buffer, and the image data written in the display frame buffer. Are generated from the read image data, and various images are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). It is like that.

Here, various images will be described.
The “version information image” is an image for suggesting or notifying version information of data stored in various ROMs, and the display target period is from when the power is turned on until the effect control unit 130m receives a command.
The “power-on information image” is an image for suggesting or notifying that power-on with RAM clearing has been performed, and the effect control unit 130m receives the power-on designation command after receiving the RAM clear designation command. The period until display is the display target period.
The “power restoration information image” is an image for suggesting or notifying that power restoration without RAM clearing has been performed, and 30 seconds after the effect control unit 130m receives the power restoration designation command after the power is turned on. The display target period is until a predetermined command (a special symbol variation pattern designation command, an opening designation command, an interval designation command, a round designation command, etc.) is received.

The “notice effect image” and the “character image” are images that suggest or notify in the form of a notice the expected degree that the result of the variation display (variation effect) being executed or the variation display (variation effect) to be executed in the future will be a big hit. The display target period is during execution of a variation effect that produces a variation display of a special symbol, during execution of a jackpot effect, or the like.
The “base image” is an image that is the background of the power-on information image and the power-recovery information image, and the display target period is the period during which the power-on information image and the power-recovery information image are displayed.
The “color bar image” is an image for confirming the display state of the image display devices 70 and 71 as well as the background of the version information image, and the display target period is during the display of the version information image. Yes.

The “hold icon image (hold memory image)” is an image corresponding to each of the special symbol determination information (hold memory) stored in the special symbol hold memory area of the main RAM 110c, and basically the special symbol hold memory. The period during which the special figure determination information is stored in the area is the display target period.
The “variable icon image (variable storage image)” is an image corresponding to the special symbol determination information stored in the special symbol relevant storage area of the main RAM 110c, and basically the special symbol judgment in the special symbol relevant storage area. Although it is the display target period in which information is stored, a predetermined period from the start of the variation effect may be set as the display target period.
The “holding number display image” is an image for suggesting or notifying the number of special figure determination information (holding storage) stored in the special symbol holding storage area of the main RAM 110c. During the display, during the execution of the variation effect, the customer waiting state (except during the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect) and the like are display target periods.

The “special symbol image” is an image for suggesting or notifying the progress state of the variable display and the result of the variable display (variable effect) by being displayed in synchronization with the variable symbol display (variable effect). Basically, the display target period is the display of the power restoration image, the execution of the fluctuation effect, the waiting state of the customer (except during the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect), and the like.
The “effect design image” is an image for suggesting or notifying the result of the change display (change effect) in the end by being changed or temporarily stopped during the change display (change effect) of the special symbol. Basically, the display target period is the display of the power restoration image, the execution of the fluctuation effect, the waiting state of the customer (except during the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect), and the like.
“Background image” is an image that constitutes the background of the fluctuating effect according to the gaming state. Basically, the power restoration image is displayed, the fluctuating effect is being executed, the customer is waiting (the customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed) Etc.) is the display target period.

(Display example before and after power-on during fluctuation display)
A display example before and after power-on during the variable display will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 82A is a diagram illustrating a display example immediately before the power failure occurs. Here, the low probability gaming state and the non-time saving gaming state (normal gaming state) are set, the first holding number is “1” and the second holding number is “0”. Fluctuation effects are performed to produce a special symbol variation display.

  At this time, the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) displays the special symbol images (DZ1 “−”, DZ2 “×”) of the third layer L3, the change icon image (TH), the hold icon image (H11), and the hold number display. The image (SH1 “1”, SH2 “0”), the effect symbol image for the normal gaming state of the fourth layer L4 (“629” during scrolling), and the normal background image (sub background image of the fifth layer L5) Image data (including a variation effect screen) is generated and displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71. The sound control unit 150 outputs a BGM of variation effect from the audio output device 9.

  FIG. 82 (b) is a diagram showing a display example when a power interruption (power supply: OFF) occurs. Here, since the power supply to the image display devices 70 and 71 is also stopped, no image is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71, and no production sound is output from the audio output device 9. .

  FIG. 82 (c) is a diagram showing a display example immediately after the power is turned on (power is restored) in a state where the RAM clear switch 55 is turned on.

  At this time, the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) generates image data (initial confirmation screen) on which the version information image of the first layer L1 and the color bar image of the second layer L2 are superimposed, and the image display device 70, 71.

  FIG. 83A shows a display example in which a RAM clear effect (a kind of power-on effect) is started when the effect control unit 130m receives a RAM clear designation command transmitted first from the main control board 110 after the power is turned on. FIG.

  At this time, the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) generates image data (power-on screen) in which the power-on information image of the first layer L1 and the base image of the second layer L2 are superimposed to generate the image display device 70, 71. The sound control unit 150 outputs a RAM clear preparation sound (“RAM clear preparation in progress” + alarm sound) from the sound output device 9.

  Note that the power-on information image and the base image can be paraphrased as power-on images, and may be set in the first layer L1 or the second layer L2 as a single image without being separate images. The power-on image may be displayed on both the first image display device 70 and the second image display device, or may be displayed on only one of the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71. You may make it do.

  FIG. 83B is a diagram showing a display example in which the power-on effect is started when the effect control unit 130m receives the power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110 after the RAM clear command. . In this case, since the information stored in the main RAM 110c is initialized (RAM cleared), a low-probability gaming state and a non-short-time gaming state (normal gaming state) are set, and information (variation time and The number of holds etc.) is reset to the initial value.

  At this time, the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) displays the special symbol images (DZ1 “×”, DZ2 “×”) and the hold number display images (SH1 “0”, SH2 “0”) of the third layer L3, Image display devices 70 and 71 are generated by generating image data (customer waiting state screen) in which the initial effect design image for clearing the RAM of layer L4 and the normal background image (including the sub background image) of the fifth layer L5 are superimposed. To display. The sound control unit 150 outputs a RAM clear notification sound (“RAM cleared” + alarm sound) from the sound output device 9.

  FIG. 83 (c) shows that the effect control unit 130m has received a game state designation command for low-actual short time non-operation that is transmitted from the main control board 110 next to the power-on designation command. It is a figure which shows the example of a display.

  At this time, the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) generates the same image data (customer waiting state screen) as in FIG. 83B and displays it on the image display devices 70 and 71. The sound control unit 150 continues outputting the RAM clear notification sound from the sound output device 9.

  As described above, when power-on with initialization of the main RAM 110c is executed, a power-on image is displayed for a predetermined period (until reception of the power-on designation command) immediately after power-on (reception of the RAM clear designation command). Is displayed, it is possible to notify that the power has been turned on.

  In addition, the display target period of the power-on image does not overlap with the display target period of a specific image such as the special symbol image, the hold number display image, the hold icon image, the variation icon image, the effect symbol image, and the background image. Therefore, image data obtained by superimposing the power-on image and the specific image is not generated and displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71 in the display target period of the power-on image. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) during the display target period of the power-on image.

  The power-on image may be displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) after receiving the RAM clear designation command. Further, as a power-on effect, a RAM clear preparation sound or a RAM clear notification sound (so-called power-on notification sound) may be output without displaying a power-on image. In addition, the normal background image may not be displayed when the power-on designation command is received, but the normal background image may be displayed when the game state designation command for low-accuracy short time non-operation to be transmitted next is received. .

(Display example before and after power recovery in customer waiting state)
Next, display examples before and after power recovery in the customer waiting state will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 84A is a diagram showing a display example immediately before the power interruption occurs. Here, the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state) are set, and the first waiting number is “0” and the second holding number is “0”.

  At this time, the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) displays the special symbol images (DZ1 “×”, DZ2 “×”) and the hold number display images (SH1 “0”, SH2 “0”) of the third layer L3, Image data (customer standby screen) is generated by superimposing the effect symbol image for the normal gaming state of the layer L4 and the normal background image (including the sub background image) of the fifth layer L5 on the image display devices 70 and 71. indicate. The sound control unit 150 does not output a production sound from the audio output device 9, but may output a customer waiting production sound.

  FIG. 84 (b) is a diagram showing a display example when a power interruption (power supply: OFF) occurs. Here, since the power supply to the image display devices 70 and 71 is also stopped, no image is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71, and no effect sound is output from the audio output device 9. .

FIG. 84C is a diagram showing a display example immediately after the power is turned on (power is turned on) with the RAM clear switch 55 being OFF.
At this time, the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) generates image data (initial confirmation screen) on which the version information image of the first layer L1 and the color bar image of the second layer L2 are superimposed, and the image display device 70, 71.

  FIG. 85 (a) is a display example in which a power supply restoration effect is started when the production control unit 130m receives a power restoration designation command for low-accuracy short time non-operation that is first transmitted from the main control board 110 after the power is turned on. FIG. In this case, the effect control unit 130m sets data indicating the normal gaming state in the gaming state storage area.

  At this time, the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) performs the power restoration information image of the first layer L1, the base image of the second layer L2, the special symbol images (DZ1 “×”, DZ2 “×”) of the third layer L3, The hold number display image (SH1 “0”, SH2 “0”), the initial effect design image (“345”) for power restoration of the fourth layer L4, and the normal background image (sub background image of the fifth layer L5) Image data (power recovery screen) superimposed on the image display device 70 and 71 is generated. The sound control unit 150 outputs a power recovery notification sound (alarm sound) from the sound output device 9.

  Note that the power restoration information image and the base image can be paraphrased as a power restoration image, and may be set in the first layer L1 or the second layer L2 as a single image instead of separate images. The power restoration image may be displayed on both the first image display device 70 and the second image display device, or may be displayed on only one of the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71. You may make it do.

  Further, although common to various display examples described below, the power restoration image is displayed on the entire screen of the image display devices 70 and 71 (at least the first image display device 70). Specific images such as a special symbol image, a hold number display image, a hold icon image, a variation icon image, an initial effect design image, a background image, etc., which are superimposed on the image, will be shielded by the power restoration image, Visibility is restricted. That is, the specific image superimposed on the rear side of the power restoration image is processed to be displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71 even though only a part of the specific image cannot be visually recognized.

  FIG. 85B shows a display example in which the effect control unit 130m receives the first special symbol memory 0 designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 after the power restoration designation command, but continues the power restoration effect. FIG. In this case, the effect control unit 130m sets “0” as the first hold number in the special figure hold number storage counter.

  At this time, since the first holding number set in the special figure holding number storage counter is “0”, the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) displays the same image data (power recovery screen) as FIG. Generated and displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71. The sound control unit 150 continues to output the power recovery notification sound from the sound output device 9.

  FIG. 85 (c) shows that the effect control unit 130m receives the second special symbol memory 0 designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 after the first special symbol memory designation command, but continues the power recovery effect. It is a figure which shows the example of a display. In this case, the effect control unit 130m sets “0” as the second reservation number in the special figure reservation number storage counter.

  At this time, since the second reservation number set in the special figure reservation number storage counter is “0”, the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) displays the same image data (power supply restoration screen) as FIG. Generated and displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71. The sound control unit 150 continues to output the power recovery notification sound from the sound output device 9.

  FIG. 86 (a) shows that the effect control unit 130m has received the normal symbol memory 0 designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 after the second special symbol memory designation command, but continues the power recovery effect. It is a figure which shows an example. In this case, the effect control unit 130m sets “0” in the common figure reservation number counter.

  At this time, the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) generates the same image data (power restoration screen) as FIG. 85 (c) because the number of holds set in the universal figure hold number storage counter is “0”. Are displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71. The sound control unit 150 continues to output the power recovery notification sound from the sound output device 9.

  FIG. 86 (b) shows a display example in which the effect control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 after the normal symbol storage designation command, but continues the power recovery effect. FIG.

  At this time, the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) generates the same image data (power restoration screen) as that in FIG. 86A and displays it on the image display devices 70 and 71. The sound control unit 150 continues to output the power recovery notification sound from the sound output device 9. At this time, the first game information display device 59 has been restored to the display state before the occurrence of the power interruption.

  FIG. 86 (c) is a diagram illustrating a display example when the power recovery effect is completed because a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the effect control unit 130m started the power recovery effect.

  At this time, the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) displays the special symbol images (DZ1 “×”, DZ2 “×”) and the hold number display images (SH1 “0”, SH2 “0”) of the third layer L3, Image data (customer waiting state screen) is generated by superimposing the initial effect design image (“345”) for power restoration of the layer L4 and the normal background image (including the sub background image) of the fifth layer L5. Displayed on the display devices 70 and 71. The sound control unit 150 does not output a production sound from the audio output device 9, but may output a customer waiting production sound.

  As described above, when power is restored without initialization of the main RAM 110c after the power is cut off in the customer waiting state, a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) immediately after the power is turned on (reception of the power restoration designation command) is performed. Since the power recovery effect is executed over a period of time, it is possible to notify that the power recovery has been performed.

  In addition, when the display target period of the power restoration image overlaps with the display target period of a specific image such as a special symbol image, a hold number display image, an effect symbol image, or a background image, the power Image data in which the restored image (specific image behind the power restored image) is superimposed is generated and displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71. Therefore, the visual recognition of the power restoration image is not hindered by the specific image, and the player can recognize that the power restoration is performed.

  Even if the production control unit 130m misses the power recovery designation command in spite of the display period of the power recovery image, the specific image ( Image data including a special symbol image, a reserved number display image, an effect symbol image, a background image, etc.) is generated and displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71. Therefore, the initial confirmation screen is not displayed for a long time after the power supply is restored, and no image is displayed, and the player is confused about what the current situation is. It becomes possible.

  In addition, when the power is turned on, the initial effect design image for power-on is displayed, and when the power is restored, the initial effect design image for power restoration is displayed, so different initial effect design images are displayed when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. By doing so, it becomes possible to notify whether or not the RAM is cleared by the effect design. The initial effect design image for turning on the power and the initial effect design image for restoring the power may be the same.

  In this embodiment, the power recovery screen (power recovery image) is displayed when the control state (game state) at the time of power recovery is waiting for customers, but the power recovery screen is displayed. Alternatively, the customer waiting screen may be displayed. In addition, when the control state (game state) at the time of power restoration is the customer waiting state, the customer waiting demonstration screen (customer waiting demonstration) is immediately waited for the waiting time of the customer waiting demonstration production (for example, 30 seconds). Image) may be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, when the effect control unit 130m misses the special symbol memory designation command, the correct hold number display image (SH1, SH2) is displayed until the next special symbol memory designation command is received. However, if the customer wait state designation command is received before the next special symbol memory designation command is received, it is determined that the first hold number and the second hold number are “0”. The number-of-holds display image (SH1 “0”, SH2 “0”) may be displayed.

  In this embodiment, even if the effect control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command, the power restoration effect is continued until the effect period of the power restoration effect ends, but the customer waiting state designation command is received. Thus, the power recovery effect (display of the power recovery screen) may be terminated and the customer waiting state screen may be displayed.

(Example of display before and after power recovery during loss display)
Next, display examples before and after power recovery during the loss variation display will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 91.

  FIG. 87A is a diagram illustrating a display example immediately before a power failure occurs. Here, the low probability game state and the non-time-saving game state (normal game state) are set, the first hold number is “3”, and the second hold number is “0”. In a device, a sound output device, a lighting device, etc.), a variation effect that produces a variation display of the first special symbol is performed.

  At this time, the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) displays the special symbol images (DZ1 “−”, DZ2 “×”) of the third layer L3, the variation icon image (TH), and the first hold icon images (H11 to H13). And the number-of-holds display image (SH1 “3”, SH2 “0”), the effect symbol image for the normal gaming state of the fourth layer L4 (“916” during scrolling), and the normal background image of the fifth layer L5 ( Image data (variation effect screen) on which the sub background image is superimposed is generated and displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71. The sound control unit 150 outputs a BGM of variation effect from the audio output device 9.

  FIG. 87 (b) is a diagram showing a display example when a power interruption (power supply: OFF) occurs. Here, since the power supply to the image display devices 70 and 71 is also stopped, no image is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71, and no production sound is output from the audio output device 9. .

FIG. 87 (c) is a diagram showing a display example immediately after the power is turned on (power is turned on) in a state where the RAM clear switch 55 is turned off.
At this time, the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) generates image data (initial confirmation screen) on which the version information image of the first layer L1 and the color bar image of the second layer L2 are superimposed, and the image display device 70, 71.

  FIG. 88 (a) is a display example in which a power supply restoration effect is started when the production control unit 130m receives a power restoration designation command for low-accuracy short time non-operation that is transmitted first from the main control board 110 after the power is turned on. FIG. In this case, the effect control unit 130m sets the data indicating the normal game state in the game state storage area, assuming that the control state of the game before the occurrence of the power interruption is the normal game state.

  At this time, the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) performs the power restoration information image of the first layer L1, the base image of the second layer L2, the special symbol images (DZ1 “×”, DZ2 “×”) of the third layer L3, The hold number display image (SH1 “0”, SH2 “0”), the initial effect design image (“345”) for power restoration of the fourth layer L4, and the normal background image (sub background image of the fifth layer L5) Image data (power recovery screen) superimposed on the image display device 70 and 71 is generated. The sound control unit 150 outputs a power recovery notification sound (alarm sound) from the sound output device 9.

  FIG. 88B shows a display example in which the effect control unit 130m receives the first special symbol storage 3 designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 after the power restoration designation command, but continues the power restoration effect. FIG. In this case, the production control unit 130m sets “3” as the first reservation number in the special figure reservation number storage counter.

  At this time, the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) sets the hold number display image (SH1 “0”) of the image data (power recovery screen) of FIG. 88A in the special figure hold number storage counter. Image data (power restoration) in which the change icon image (TH) and the first hold icon images (H11 to H13) are added to the third layer L3. Screen) is generated and displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71. The sound control unit 150 continues to output the power recovery notification sound from the sound output device 9.

  In FIG. 88 (c), the effect control unit 130m receives the second special symbol memory 0 designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 after the first special symbol memory designation command, but continues the power recovery effect. It is a figure which shows the example of a display. In this case, the effect control unit 130m sets “0” as the second reservation number in the special figure reservation number storage counter.

  At this time, since the second reservation number set in the special figure reservation number storage counter is “0”, the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) displays the same image data (power recovery screen) as FIG. Generated and displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71. The sound control unit 150 continues to output the power recovery notification sound from the sound output device 9.

  FIG. 89 (a) shows a table in which the effect control unit 130m receives the normal symbol memory 4 designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 after the second special symbol memory designation command, but continues the power recovery effect. It is a figure which shows an example. In this case, the effect control unit 130m sets “4” in the usual figure reservation number counter.

  At this time, the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) generates the same image data (power restoration screen) as that in FIG. 88C because there is no change in the displayed image data even if the number of pending drawings changes. The image is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71. The sound control unit 150 continues to output the power recovery notification sound from the sound output device 9. At this time, the display state of the first game information display device 59 has been restored to the state before the occurrence of the power interruption.

  In FIG. 89 (b), the effect control unit 130m receives the first special symbol memory 4 designation command transmitted from the main control board or 110 when a new game ball wins the first starting port 45. It is a figure which shows the example of a display which continues the restoration | regeneration effect. In this case, the effect control unit 130m sets “4” as the first reservation number in the special figure reservation number counter.

  At this time, the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) holds the hold number display image (SH1 “3”) of the image data in FIG. 89A corresponding to the first hold number set in the special figure hold number storage counter. The image data (power restoration screen) in which the first hold icon image (H14) is added to the third layer L3 is generated and displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71 while changing to the number display image (SH1 “4”). . The sound control unit 150 continues to output the power recovery notification sound from the sound output device 9.

  FIG. 89 (c) shows that the effect control unit 130m receives the first special symbol loss confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the special symbol of the loss is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol. It is a figure which shows the example of a display which the power supply restoration effect is continuing.

  At this time, the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) generates image data (power restoration screen) in which the variation icon image (TH) is reduced from the image data in FIG. 89B and displays the image data on the image display devices 70 and 71. To do. The sound control unit 150 continues to output the power recovery notification sound from the sound output device 9.

  In FIG. 90 (a), the effect control unit 130m displays a game state designation command and an effect symbol designation command for low-actuality short time non-operation transmitted from the main control board 110 when the next special symbol variation display is started. It is a figure which shows the example of a display which received, but the power supply restoration effect is continuing. In this case, the effect control unit 130m sets data indicating the normal gaming state as the current gaming control state in the gaming state storage area.

  At this time, the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) does not change the image data to be displayed even if it receives a gaming state designation command or an effect symbol designation command for the low-accuracy short time non-operation during the period of execution of the power restoration effect. 89C, the same image data (power restoration screen) as in FIG. 89C is generated and displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71. The sound control unit 150 continues to output the power recovery notification sound from the sound output device 9.

  FIG. 90B shows a power supply restoration effect when the effect control unit 130m receives the first special symbol variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the next special symbol variation display is started. It is a figure which shows the example of a display by which the fluctuation production which produces the fluctuation display of a 1st special symbol is started after completion | finish.

  At this time, the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) displays the special symbol images (DZ1 “−”, DZ2 “×”) of the third layer L3, the first hold icon images (H11 to H14), and the hold number display image (SH1 “ 4 ”, SH2“ 0 ”), the initial effect design image (“ 345 ”) for power restoration of the fourth layer L4, and the image data on which the normal background image (including the sub background image) of the fifth layer L5 is superimposed. (Variation effect screen) is generated and displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71. The sound control unit 150 outputs a BGM of variation effect from the audio output device 9.

  FIG. 90 (c) updates the hold number display image (SH1) when the effect control unit 130m receives the first special symbol memory 3 designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 due to the decrease in the first hold number. It is a figure showing an example of a display when starting a digestion action production which notifies a decrease of the 1st number of reservations by holding icon image.

  At this time, the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) holds the image data hold number display image (SH1 “4”) in FIG. 90B corresponding to the first hold number set in the special figure hold number counter. The image is changed to the display image (SH1 “3”), and image data (variation effect screen) is generated by scrolling (moving) the effect symbol image of the fourth layer L4 downward from the effective line by a predetermined width. , 71. The sound control unit 150 continues to output the variation effect BGM from the audio output device 9.

  FIG. 91A is a diagram illustrating a display example in which a digest action effect is executed after several frames have elapsed after the hold number display image (SH1) is updated.

  At this time, the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) moves the first hold icon images H11 to H14 of the image data in FIG. 90C to the position being shifted (position close to the variable icon display area), Image data (variation effect screen) obtained by further scrolling (moving) the effect symbol image of the fourth layer L4 by a predetermined width is generated and displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71. The sound control unit 150 continues to output the BGM of the variation effect from the audio output device 9.

  FIG. 91 (b) is a diagram illustrating a display example in which the shift of the first hold icon image is completed and the digest action effect ends when a predetermined number of frames have elapsed from FIG. 91 (a).

  At this time, the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) moves the first reserved icon images H11 to H14 of the image data of FIG. 91A to the position after the shift, and also displays the effect symbol image of the fourth layer L4 as an effective line. Image data (fluctuation effect screen) that is scrolled (moved) downward by a predetermined width from the image is generated and displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71. The sound control unit 150 continues to output the BGM of the variation effect from the audio output device 9.

  Here, the case where the fluctuation display (fluctuation effect) executed after power restoration is based on the first hold number has been described, but the fluctuation display (fluctuation effect) executed after power restoration is based on the second hold number. In the case of an image, the special symbol image to be variably displayed is the second special symbol image, the hold icon image to be shifted is the second hold icon image, and the hold number display image to be subtracted and updated is the first hold image. The display example is the same as the display example described above except that it is a two-holding number display image. Further, when the gaming state is not the normal gaming state, the display example is similar to the above-described display example except that the background image corresponding to the gaming state at that time is displayed.

  Moreover, although the case where the digestion action effect which shifts a holding | maintenance icon image immediately after the start of the fluctuation display (fluctuation effect) performed after a power supply restoration effect was demonstrated was demonstrated, the fluctuation display (fluctuation effect) without generating a power interruption Is continuously executed, the change icon image is deleted immediately before the end of the previous change display (change effect), and the hold icon image is shifted immediately after the start of the next change display (change effect). Digestion action production is executed.

  As described above, when the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c after the power is cut off during the fluctuation display (fluctuation effect), the power is turned on immediately after the power is turned on (reception of the power restoration designation command). Since the power restoration effect is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds or until the next fluctuation display is started), it is possible to notify that the power restoration has been performed.

  In addition, in the period in which the display target period of the power restoration image overlaps with the display target period of the specific image such as the special symbol image, the hold number display image, the hold icon image, the variation icon image, the effect symbol image, and the background image. In this case, image data in which a power restoration image (a specific image is superimposed on the rear side of the power restoration image) is superimposed on the front side of the specific image is generated and displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71. Then, after the display period of the power restoration image (power restoration effect) ends, a specific image (special symbol image, hold count display image, hold icon image, the variation icon image, effect symbol image, background image, etc.) Visible to the person. Therefore, the visual recognition of the power restoration image is not hindered by the specific image, and the player can recognize that the power restoration is performed.

  Even if the production control unit 130m misses the power recovery designation command in spite of the display period of the power recovery image, the specific image ( Image data including a special symbol image, a holding number display image, a holding icon image, the variation icon image, a production symbol image, a background image, etc.) is generated and displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71. Therefore, the initial confirmation screen is not displayed for a long time after the power supply is restored, and no image is displayed, and the player is confused about what the current situation is. It becomes possible.

  In addition, immediately after the start of the fluctuation display (fluctuation display) that is executed after the display period of the power restoration image (power restoration effect) ends, it corresponds to the loss fluctuation display (fluctuation effect) that was executed when the power was cut off. Since the digestion action effect is executed by the change icon image and the hold icon image to be performed, it becomes possible to notify the player that one change display has been completed or the hold memory has been reduced, and the game after the power is restored Makes it easier for the person to grasp the situation. In addition, since the digestion action effect is executed even in the continuous variation display (variation effect) in which the power interruption has not occurred, the player is made aware in advance that the digestion action effect means a decrease in the reserved memory. It is also possible to leave.

  In this embodiment, upon receipt of a special symbol variation pattern designation command for starting the next variation display (variation effect), the display of the power restoration image (power restoration effect) is terminated and the screen is returned to the variation effect screen. Although the digest action effect is being executed, the display of the power recovery screen (power recovery effect) is terminated by receiving the special symbol confirmation command, receiving the game state designation command, and receiving the production symbol designation command, and the fluctuation effect screen The digestion action effect may be executed after returning to the state.

  In this embodiment, image data including the initial effect design for power restoration (“345”) is generated by receiving the special symbol loss confirmation command. However, the type of the received special symbol confirmation command Alternatively, image data including a loss effect design image corresponding to may be generated and displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71.

  In the present embodiment, when the effect control unit 130m receives the first special symbol memory designation command transmitted after the power restoration designation command, the image display device 70 generates image data including the variation icon image, However, when the effect control unit 130m receives the second special symbol memory designation command transmitted after the first special symbol memory designation command, the image data including the variable icon image is generated. You may make it display on the image display apparatuses 70 and 71. FIG.

(Display example after power recovery while displaying big hit fluctuation)
Next, a display example after power recovery during the jackpot variation display will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 93.

  FIG. 92A shows a display example in which a power supply restoration effect is started when the production control unit 130m receives a power restoration designation command for low-accuracy short-time non-operation that is first transmitted from the main control board 110 after the power is turned on. FIG. In this case, assuming that the control state of the game before the occurrence of the power interruption is the second specific game state (high probability game state and short time game state), the effect control unit 130m plays the data indicating the second specific game state. Set in the state storage area.

  At this time, the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) performs the power restoration information image of the first layer L1, the base image of the second layer L2, the special symbol images (DZ1 “×”, DZ2 “×”) of the third layer L3, Hold number display image (SH1 “0”, SH2 “0”), initial effect design image (“345”) for power recovery of the fourth layer L4, and highly accurate background image (sub background image) of the fifth layer L5 Is generated and displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71. The sound control unit 150 outputs a power recovery notification sound (alarm sound) from the sound output device 9.

  FIG. 92B shows a display example in which the effect control unit 130m receives the first special symbol memory 2 designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 after the power restoration designation command, but continues the power restoration effect. FIG. In this case, the effect control unit 130m sets “2” as the first reservation number in the special figure reservation number storage counter.

  At this time, the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) sets the hold number display image (SH1 “0”) of the image data (power restoration screen) of FIG. 92A to the first hold number storage counter set in the special figure hold number storage counter. The image data (power restoration screen) in which the change icon image (TH) and the hold icon images (H11 to H12) are added to the third layer L3 while being changed to the hold number display image (SH1 “2”) corresponding to the number Is generated and displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71. The sound control unit 150 continues to output the power recovery notification sound from the sound output device 9.

  In FIG. 92 (c), the effect control unit 130m receives the second special symbol memory 4 designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 after the first special symbol memory designation command, but continues the power recovery effect. It is a figure which shows the example of a display. In this case, the effect control unit 130m sets “4” as the second reservation number in the special figure reservation number storage counter.

  At this time, the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) stores the hold number display image (SH2 “0”) of the image data (power recovery screen) in FIG. 92B in the special figure hold number storage counter. The image display device 70 generates image data (power restoration screen) in which the hold icon images (H21 to H24) are added to the third layer L3 while changing to the hold number display image (SH2 “4”) corresponding to the number. , 71. The sound control unit 150 continues to output the power recovery notification sound from the sound output device 9.

  FIG. 93 (a) shows that the effect control unit 130m receives the normal symbol memory 4 designation command and the second special symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110 after the second special symbol memory designation command. It is a figure which shows the example of a display which continues the restoration | regeneration effect. In this case, the effect control unit 130m sets “4” in the usual figure reservation number counter.

  At this time, the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) generates image data (power restoration screen) obtained by reducing the equal variation icon image (TH) from the image data of FIG. indicate. The sound control unit 150 continues to output the power recovery notification sound from the sound output device 9. Note that when the normal symbol storage 4 designation command is received, the display state of the first game information display device 59 is restored to the state before the occurrence of the power interruption.

  In FIG. 93 (b), the effect control unit 130m receives a low-accuracy short-time non-operational game state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the jackpot game is started, but the power recovery effect continues. It is a figure which shows the example of a display. In this case, the effect control unit 130m sets data indicating the normal gaming state as the current gaming control state in the gaming state storage area.

  At this time, the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) does not change the image data to be displayed even if it receives the gaming state designation command for non-actuated short and short time after receiving the confirmation command per special symbol, so FIG. ) And the same image data (power restoration screen) are generated and displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71. The sound control unit 150 continues to output the power recovery notification sound from the sound output device 9.

  FIG. 93 (c) shows a case where the effect control unit 130m receives an opening designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 after a gaming state designation command for non-actual short time non-operation due to the start of a jackpot game. It is a figure which shows the example of a display by which a power recovery effect is complete | finished and a jackpot effect (opening effect) is started.

  At this time, the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) displays the jackpot information image of the first layer L1, the right-handed display image (G10), the character image of the second layer L2, and the jackpot background image (sub background image of the fifth layer L5). Image data (including the opening effect screen) is generated and displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71. The sound control unit 150 outputs BGM of the jackpot effect (opening effect) from the audio output device 9.

  As described above, when the power is restored without initialization of the main RAM 110c after the power is cut off during the big change display (fluctuation effect), immediately after the power is turned on (reception of the power restoration designation command). Since the power recovery effect is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds or until the jackpot game is started), it is possible to notify that the power recovery has been performed.

  In addition, in the period in which the display target period of the power restoration image overlaps with the display target period of the specific image such as the special symbol image, the hold number display image, the hold icon image, the variation icon image, the effect symbol image, and the background image. In this case, image data in which a power restoration image (a specific image is superimposed on the rear side of the power restoration image) is superimposed on the front side of the specific image is generated and displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71. Therefore, the visual recognition of the power restoration image is not hindered by the specific image, and the player can recognize that the power restoration is performed.

  Even if the production control unit 130m misses the power recovery designation command in spite of the display period of the power recovery image, the specific image ( Image data including a special symbol image, a holding number display image, a holding icon image, the variation icon image, a production symbol image, a background image, etc.) is generated and displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71. Therefore, the initial confirmation screen is not displayed for a long time after the power supply is restored, and no image is displayed, and the player is confused about what the current situation is. It becomes possible.

  In addition, during the jackpot game, image data including a specific image (a special symbol image, a hold number display image, a hold icon image, the variation icon image, a production symbol image) excluding the background image is not generated. It is possible to reduce the processing load of the drawing control unit 141 (VDP). Note that, among the specific images excluding the background image, the special symbol image, the number-of-holds display image, etc. may be displayed even during the jackpot game.

  In this embodiment, the right-handed display image (G10) is displayed as soon as the opening designation command is received, but the right-handed display image is displayed after a predetermined period (several frames) from the reception of the opening designation command. Alternatively, the right-handed display image (G10) may be displayed immediately before the special winning opening 50 is opened.

  In this embodiment, the display of the power restoration image (power restoration effect) is ended by receiving the opening designation command for starting the jackpot game, and the opening effect screen is displayed, but the special symbol confirmation command The display of the power restoration image (power restoration effect) may be ended by receiving the reception and gaming state designation command.

  In the present embodiment, image data including an initial effect symbol (“345”) for power restoration is generated by receiving a confirmation command per special symbol. Image data including a jackpot effect symbol image corresponding to the type may be generated and displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the special symbol image and the hold number information image are not displayed during the display of the opening effect screen, but during the display of the opening effect screen, the round effect screen, the interval display screen Even during display or during display of the ending display screen, image data including a special symbol image and a hold number information image may be generated and displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71.

(Display example before and after power recovery during jackpot game)
Next, display examples before and after power recovery in the jackpot game will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 96.

  FIG. 94A is a diagram showing a display example immediately before the power interruption occurs. Here, the normal game state is set, the first hold number is “2”, the second hold number is “0”, and various effect devices have a jackpot game effect (round effect) that produces a jackpot game. Has been done.

  At this time, the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) wins the right-handed display image (G10) or the number-of-rounds image (“Round 6”) of the first layer L1, the character image of the second layer L2, or the winning prize 50. A winning ball icon image (NG) indicating the number of balls, a special symbol image (DZ1 “◯”, DZ2 “×”) of the third layer L3, a holding number display image (SH1 “2”, SH2 “0”), fifth Image data (round effect screen) on which the jackpot background image (including the sub background image) of the layer L5 is superimposed is generated and displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71. The sound control unit 150 outputs a BGM of a jackpot effect (round effect) from the audio output device 9.

  FIG. 94 (b) is a diagram showing a display example when a power interruption (power supply: OFF) occurs. Here, since the power supply to the image display devices 70 and 71 is also stopped, no image is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71, and no production sound is output from the audio output device 9. .

FIG. 94C is a diagram showing a display example immediately after the power is turned on (power is turned on) in a state where the RAM clear switch 55 is turned off.
At this time, the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) generates image data (initial confirmation screen) on which the version information image of the first layer L1 and the color bar image of the second layer L2 are superimposed, and the image display device 70, 71.

  FIG. 95 (a) shows a display example in which a power supply restoration effect is started when the production control unit 130m receives a power restoration designation command for low-accuracy short time non-operation that is first transmitted from the main control board 110 after the power is turned on. FIG. In this case, the effect control unit 130m sets the data indicating the normal game state in the game state storage area, assuming that the control state of the game before the occurrence of the power interruption is the normal game state.

  At this time, the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) performs the power restoration information image of the first layer L1, the base image of the second layer L2, the special symbol images (DZ1 “×”, DZ2 “×”) of the third layer L3, The hold number display image (SH1 “0”, SH2 “0”), the initial effect design image (“345”) for power restoration of the fourth layer L4, and the normal background image (sub background image of the fifth layer L5) Image data (power recovery screen) superimposed on the image display device 70 and 71 is generated. The sound control unit 150 outputs a power recovery notification sound (alarm sound) from the sound output device 9.

  FIG. 95B shows a display example in which the effect control unit 130m receives the first special symbol memory 2 designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 after the power restoration designation command, but continues the power restoration effect. FIG. In this case, the effect control unit 130m sets “2” as the first reservation number in the special figure reservation number storage counter.

  At this time, the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) sets the hold number display image (SH1 “0”) of the image data (power recovery screen) of FIG. 95A to the first hold number storage counter. Image data (power restoration) in which the change icon image (TH) and the first hold icon images (H11 to H12) are added to the third layer L3. Screen) is generated and displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71. The sound control unit 150 continues to output the power recovery notification sound from the sound output device 9.

  In FIG. 95 (c), the effect control unit 130m receives the second special symbol memory 0 designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 after the first special symbol memory designation command, but continues the power recovery effect. It is a figure which shows the example of a display. In this case, the effect control unit 130m sets “0” as the second reservation number in the special figure reservation number storage counter.

  At this time, the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) displays the same image data (power recovery screen) as FIG. 95B because the second reservation number set in the special figure reservation number storage counter is “0”. Generated and displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71. The sound control unit 150 continues to output the power recovery notification sound from the sound output device 9.

  FIG. 96 (a) shows a table in which the effect control unit 130m has received the normal symbol memory 0 designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 after the second special symbol memory designation command, but continues the power recovery effect. It is a figure which shows an example. In this case, the effect control unit 130m sets “0” in the usual figure reservation number counter.

  At this time, the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) generates the same image data (power restoration screen) as FIG. 95C because there is no change in the image data to be displayed even if the number of pending drawings changes. The image is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71. The sound control unit 150 continues to output the power recovery notification sound from the sound output device 9. At this time, the display state of the first game information display device 59 has been restored to the state before the occurrence of the power interruption, and the opening of the special winning opening 50 is resumed.

  In FIG. 96 (b), although the effect control unit 130m receives a large winning opening prize designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when a new game ball wins in the big winning opening 50, the power recovery effect continues. It is a figure which shows the example of a display.

  At this time, the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) generates the same image data (power restoration screen) as FIG. 96A because there is no change in the image data to be displayed even if the winning prize winning designation command is received. And displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71. The sound control unit 150 continues to output the power recovery notification sound from the sound output device 9.

  FIG. 96 (c) is a diagram showing a display example in which the interval effect is started when the effect control unit 130m receives an interval designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the sixth round of the jackpot game is completed. It is.

  At this time, the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) displays the right-handed display image (G10) of the first layer L1, the character image of the second layer L2, and the special symbol images (DZ1 “◯”, DZ2 “×” of the third layer L3). )), The number-of-holds display image (SH1 “2”, SH2 “0”) and the big hit background image (including the sub background image) of the fifth layer L5 are generated and displayed as an image. Displayed on the devices 70 and 71. The sound control unit 150 outputs BGM of a jackpot effect (interval effect) from the audio output device 9.

  As described above, when power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c after the power is cut off during the big hit game round, a predetermined period (interval designation) is started immediately after the power is turned on (reception of the power restoration designation command). Since the power restoration effect is executed over the period until the command is received), it is possible to notify that the power restoration has been performed.

  In addition, in the period in which the display target period of the power restoration image overlaps with the display target period of the specific image such as the special symbol image, the hold number display image, the hold icon image, the variation icon image, the effect symbol image, and the background image. In this case, image data in which a power restoration image (a specific image is superimposed on the rear side of the power restoration image) is superimposed on the front side of the specific image is generated and displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71. Therefore, the visual recognition of the power restoration image is not hindered by the specific image, and the player can recognize that the power restoration is performed.

  Even if the production control unit 130m misses the power recovery designation command in spite of the display period of the power recovery image, the specific image ( Image data including a special symbol image, a holding number display image, a holding icon image, the variation icon image, a production symbol image, a background image, etc.) is generated and displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71. Therefore, the initial confirmation screen is not displayed for a long time after the power supply is restored, and no image is displayed, and the player is confused about what the current situation is. It becomes possible.

  In the present embodiment, the winning ball icon image is not displayed even when the winning prize winning designation command is received. However, the information on the number of balls won in the winning prize port 50 in the round in the winning prize winning designation command. So that a winning ball icon image may be displayed upon receipt of a special winning opening winning designation command. Alternatively, the power supply restoration effect may be terminated and the round effect may be resumed upon receipt of the special winning opening prize designation command.

  In the present embodiment, the display of the power restoration image (power restoration effect) is ended and the interval effect screen is displayed by receiving the interval designation command, but the interval designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110. However, the display of the power restoration image (power restoration effect) may be terminated by receiving the round designation command, and the round effect screen may be displayed.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol image and the hold number information image are displayed during the display of the interval effect screen. However, the special symbol image and the hold number information image are displayed during the display of the interval effect screen. Image data that is not included may be generated and displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71.

(Display modification example 1 after power restoration during fluctuation display)
Next, with reference to FIG. 97, a display modification example 1 after the power supply is restored during the variable display will be described. This modification is different from the above embodiment in that the digestion action effect is not executed after the end of the power recovery effect.

  As shown in FIG. 97 (a), when the effect control unit 130m receives the effect designating command, the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) generates the same image data (power restoration screen) as that in FIG. 90 (a). Are displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (b), when the effect control unit 130m receives the first special symbol variation pattern designation command, the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) displays the third image data of FIG. 97 (a). The first special symbol image (DZ1 “×”) of the layer L3 is changed to the first special symbol image (DZ1 “−”) indicating that it is changing, and the first hold icon images (H11 to H14) are subtracted. The image data (change effect screen) changed to the first hold icon image (H11 to H13) corresponding to the subsequent first hold number “3” is generated and displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (c), when the effect control unit 130m receives the first special symbol storage 3 designation command, the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) displays the third image data of FIG. 97 (b). Image data (variation effect screen) in which the first hold number display image (SH1 “4”) of the layer L3 is changed to the first hold number display image (SH1 “3”) corresponding to the first hold number “3” after subtraction. ) And displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71.

  In this way, when the display of the power recovery screen is finished, the variation effect is produced in the state in which the icon display state corresponding to the first hold number after subtraction is not reproduced without reproducing the display state of the icon before the occurrence of the power interruption. Since the digest action effect is not executed during the execution of the variable effect to be executed after that, the next change is recognized while recognizing that the variable effect that was being executed at the time of the power interruption has ended. It is possible to pay attention to the performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game by avoiding the disadvantage that the player is confused after the power is restored. In addition, since the digest action effect is executed in the continuous fluctuation display (fluctuation effect) in which the power interruption has not occurred, the effect that is executed is different depending on whether the power interruption has occurred or not. It becomes possible to make the digestive action production stand out.

(Display modification 2 after power recovery during fluctuation display)
Next, with reference to FIG. 98, a display modification example 2 after the power supply is restored during the variable display will be described. This modified example is different from the above embodiment in that the hold number display image, the variation icon image, and the hold icon image are displayed on the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal).

  As shown in FIG. 98 (a), when the effect control unit 130m receives the effect designating command, the drawing control unit 141 (VDP), the power restoration information image of the first layer L1, the base image of the second layer L2, Special symbol images (DZ1 “×”, DZ2 “×”) in the region on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) side of the third layer L3 and the first in the region on the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) side Hold icon image (H11 to H14), hold number display image (SH1 “4”, SH2 “0”), initial effect design image (“345”) for power restoration of fourth layer L4, and fifth layer L5 Image data (power restoration screen) on which the normal background image (including the sub background image) is superimposed is generated and displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71.

  As shown in FIG. 98 (b), when the effect control unit 130m receives the first special symbol variation pattern designation command, the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) reads the first layer L1 from the image data of FIG. 98 (a). The first special symbol image (DZ1 “−”) indicating that the power restoration information image and the base image of the second layer L2 are removed and the first special symbol image (DZ1 “×”) of the third layer L3 is being changed. ) Is generated and displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71.

  In this way, by displaying the hold number display image, the variation icon image, and the hold icon image on the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), the effect display area in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is expanded. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The special symbol image may be displayed on the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), or any one of the special symbol image, the hold number display image, the variation icon image, and the hold icon image. Alternatively, a plurality of images may be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the remaining images may be displayed on the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal).

(Display modification 3 after power recovery during fluctuation display)
Next, with reference to FIG. 99, a display modification example 3 after the power supply is restored during the variable display will be described. In this modification, the hold number display image is displayed on the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is more than the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). The point that the display of the power failure recovery image ends first is different from the above embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 99 (a), when the effect control unit 130m receives the power restoration designation command for low-accuracy, short-time non-operation, the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) displays the power restoration information image of the first layer L1, the first The base image of the second layer L2, the special symbol image (DZ1 “×”, DZ2 “×”) in the area of the third layer L3 on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) side, and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display) ) -Side reserved number display image (SH1 “4”, SH2 “0”), the initial effect design image (“345”) for power restoration of the fourth layer L4, and the normal background image of the fifth layer L5 Image data (power restoration screen) on which (including the sub background image) is superimposed is generated and displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71.

  As shown in FIG. 99 (b), when the effect control unit 130m receives the first special symbol storage 4 designation command, the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) displays the second layer L2 of the image data in FIG. 99 (a). The base image is changed to a base image that does not block the region on the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) side, and the reserved number display image (SH1 “0”, SH2 “0”) of the third layer L3 is updated. While changing to the hold number display image (SH1 “4”, SH2 “0”) corresponding to one hold number “4”, the variation icon image (TH) and the first hold icon images (H11 to H14) are added. The image data (power restoration screen) is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71.

  As shown in FIG. 99 (c), when the effect control unit 130m receives the first special symbol variation pattern designation command, the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) reads the first layer L1 from the image data of FIG. 99 (b). The power restoration information image, the base image of the second layer L2, and the fluctuation icon image (TH) of the third layer L3 are reduced, and the first special symbol image (DZ1 “×”) of the third layer L3 is changing. The image data changed to the first special symbol image (DZ1 “−”) indicating the presence is generated and displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71.

  In this way, the hold number display image is displayed on the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is ahead of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). The display of the power failure recovery image is finished and the hold count display image is made visible so that it is possible to recognize the current situation while executing the power recovery notification. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by avoiding the inconvenience that the player is confused after the restoration.

  Note that one or more of the special symbol image, the hold number display image, the variation icon image, and the hold icon image are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the remaining images are displayed. You may make it display on the 2 image display apparatus 71 (sub liquid crystal).

(Display variation after power recovery during jackpot game)
Next, with reference to FIG. 100, a display modification example after the power is restored during the jackpot game will be described. In this modification, the main control board 110 transmits a power recovery designation command for jackpot when recovering from a power cut that occurred during the jackpot game, and the right-handed display is performed during the power recovery effect. It is different from the embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 100 (a), when the effect control unit 130m receives the power recovery designation command for the big hit (the low probability time short operation), the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) supplies the power recovery information of the first layer L1. Image or game resumption information image (“Restart game”), right-handed display image G10, second layer L2 base image, third layer L3 special symbol image (DZ1 “×” ”, DZ2“ × ”), the hold number display image (SH1“ 0 ”, SH2“ 0 ”), the initial effect design image (“ 345 ”) for power restoration of the fourth layer L4, and the fifth layer L5 Image data (power restoration screen) on which the jackpot background image (including the sub background image) is superimposed is generated and displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71.

  As shown in FIG. 100 (b), when the effect control unit 130m receives the interval designation command, the drawing control unit 141 (VDP) generates the same image data (interval effect screen) as in FIG. 96 (c). The image is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71.

  In this way, when recovering from a power interruption that occurred during the jackpot game, the main control board 110 shall transmit a power recovery designation command for jackpot, and the right-handed display is performed during the power recovery effect. Even when the power restoration effect is being executed, it is possible to recognize that the game state requires a right-handed strike, and it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a loss. In addition, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by avoiding the inconvenience that the player is confused after the power is restored.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the display period of the power restoration image and the display of a specific image such as a special symbol image, a hold count display image, a hold icon image, the variation icon image, an effect symbol image, and a background image are displayed. The target period overlaps, but at least one of the specific images (for example, the background image) does not overlap with the display period of the power recovery image, and after the display of the power recovery image is completed. It is good also as a display object period. In this way, image data in which at least one of the specific images is not superimposed on the rear side of the power recovery image in the display target period of the power recovery image is generated and displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71. become.

  For example, when the effect control unit 130m receives a power recovery designation command after recovering from a power interruption that occurred during variable display, a specific image (special symbol image, number of holds) is displayed behind the power recovery image (power recovery screen). The image data on which the display image, the hold icon image, the variation icon image, the effect symbol image, the background image, etc.) are not superimposed is displayed, and the special symbol memory designation command (first special symbol memory designation command, second special symbol memory). When the production control unit 130m receives the designation command), image data on which the hold icon image corresponding to the hold number and / or the hold number display image is superimposed is displayed on the rear side of the power restoration image, and a special symbol loss confirmation command or When the effect control unit 130m receives a special symbol confirmation command, the hold icon image, the number-of-holds display image, and the type of special symbol confirmation command Corresponding special pattern image and performance symbol image (failure symbol, a bonus game symbol, etc.), including a background image corresponding to the playing state (no power recovery image) image data may to be displayed.

  In addition, when the power recovery designation command effect control unit 130m receives after recovery from the power interruption that occurred in the customer waiting state, a specific image (special symbol image, number of holds) is displayed behind the power recovery image (power recovery screen). The image data on which the display image, the hold icon image, the variation icon image, the effect symbol image, the background image, etc.) are not superimposed is displayed, and the special symbol memory designation command (here, the first special symbol memory 0 designation command, the second When the effect control unit 130m receives the special symbol memory 0 designation command), the image data on which the hold number display image is superimposed is displayed on the rear side of the power restoration image, and when 30 seconds have elapsed from the display of the power restoration image, the hold is made. Number display image, special symbol image (DZ1 “×”, DZ2 “×”) indicating loss, initial effect symbol image (“345”) for power restoration, background image corresponding to gaming state Image data including an image (not including a power restoration image) may be displayed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, even when the effect control unit 130m receives the special symbol confirmation command, the common symbol variation pattern designation command, and the normal symbol confirmation command, the display of the power restoration image does not end, and the display of the power restoration image does not end. The display of the power restoration image is ended when the second elapses or when the effect control unit 130m receives any of the special symbol variation pattern designation command, the opening designation command, the interval designation command, and the ending designation command. The display of the power restoration image may also be terminated when the effect control unit 130m receives a special symbol confirmation command, a common symbol variation pattern designation command, and a normal symbol confirmation command.

  In the present embodiment, when the special symbol variation display (loss variation) executed when the power interruption occurs is finished and the next special symbol variation display is started, the display of the power restoration image is terminated. However, even if the next special symbol variation display is started until the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 40 seconds) after the power restoration image is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71, the power source The display of the restored image may not end (continue).

  In this case, when the effect control unit 130m receives the power recovery designation command after recovery from the power interruption that occurred during the variable display, a specific image (special symbol image) is displayed behind the power recovery image (power recovery screen). , The number-of-holds display image, the hold icon image, the variation icon image, the effect symbol image, the background image, etc. are not superimposed on the image data, and the special symbol memory designation command (first special symbol memory designation command, second When the effect control unit 130m receives the special symbol storage designation command), the image data on which the hold icon image and / or the hold number display image corresponding to the hold number is superimposed is displayed on the rear side of the power restoration image, and the special symbol loss is displayed. When the effect control unit 130m receives the confirmation command, the special icon image corresponding to the type of the hold icon image, the hold number display image, and the special symbol confirmation command. Performance symbol image (failure symbol, a bonus game symbol, etc.), including a background image corresponding to the playing state (no power recovery image) image data is displayed.

  When the effect control unit 130m receives a special symbol variation pattern designation command (variation start command) with the start of the next special symbol variation display, a specific image (special symbol image, hold on the rear side of the power recovery image) is received. Number display image, hold icon image, variation icon image, effect symbol image, background image, etc.) are displayed, and after that the power recovery image is displayed until the end of the power recovery image display period. Effect image or specific image (special symbol image, number-of-holds display image, hold icon image, change icon image, effect symbol image, background, etc. according to the change effect pattern or notice effect, etc. determined based on the special symbol change pattern designation command Image data is displayed, and when the power recovery image display period ends, image data that does not include the power recovery image is displayed. That.

  That is, for the execution information (symbol stop data, variation effect pattern, etc.) of the variation effect executed synchronously (synchronized) during the variation display of the special symbol that was executed when the power interruption occurred, the effect control unit Since it disappears from the 130 m sub-RAM 130c and the display control RAM of the image control unit 140, even if the special symbol variation display is resumed, the variation effect (the special symbol image, the variation symbol image display) Etc.) is not executed.

  On the other hand, with respect to the execution information (design stop data, variation effect pattern, etc.) of the variation effect executed in synchronization (synchronization) with the variation display of the next special symbol, the effect symbol newly transmitted from the main control board 110. Since it is newly determined by a designation command or a fluctuation pattern designation command, a fluctuation effect (such as a special symbol image or a fluctuation symbol image display) is executed behind the power restoration image, and the power restoration image is displayed. It will continue to be executed after the completion.

  In addition, when the operation effect that suggests (notifies) the jackpot expectation level is executed based on the operation of the effect button 17 in the change effect that is executed on the rear side of the power restoration image, the effect button 17 is valid. , An operation promotion image (button image simulating the effect button 17, a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the effective period, etc.) for prompting the operation of the effect button 17 is displayed behind the power restoration image. It is made to emit light in the mode.

  Then, when a player who has grasped that it is an effective period by the light emission of the effect button 17 operates the effect button 17, a notice image that suggests (notifies) the expectation of jackpot is displayed on the rear side of the power recovery image and Because the warning sound that suggests (notifies) the expectation level of the jackpot is output, even if the power restoration image restricts the visual recognition of the image related to the operation effect, It becomes possible for the player to enjoy it.

  In the present embodiment, when the power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c, the power restoration image (the power restoration screen is displayed) regardless of the state of the game when the power interruption occurs (when the power is restored). ) Is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71 (power restoration effect is performed). However, when the power interruption occurs (when the power is restored) is waiting for the customer, the power restoration image is displayed. (Power restoration screen) is displayed on the customer display screen without displaying on the image display devices 70 and 71, and the power restoration image is displayed when the power is restored only when the power interruption occurs while the variable display or jackpot game is being executed. (Power recovery screen) may be displayed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the power display image (power recovery screen) is only displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71 in the power recovery effect, but the power recovery image display period ( (Time remaining) may be displayed, or a game resumption information image (“Restart the game”) may be displayed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the change icon image and the hold icon image can be visually recognized by switching from the power recovery screen (power recovery image) to the change effect screen, but the movable effect member is displayed when switching to the change effect screen. By the operation of 73 (as part of the initial operation), the display position of the change icon image or the hold icon image is shielded, and after switching to the change effect screen, the icon image or the hold icon image is saved from the display position. The change icon and the hold icon image may be visible.

  In the present embodiment, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) are provided, but the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is not provided. In addition to the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), a plurality of image display devices may be provided.

  By the way, in a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-096067), when a reach state occurs during execution of variation display, a part or all of a predetermined music piece is output as a sound output unit. From this, it is suggested whether or not the result of the variable display becomes a special result mode. However, in such a gaming machine, the music output during the variable display is limited to one music, so the player's sense of expectation for the occurrence of a special gaming state cannot be effectively raised, There was a problem that the entertainment of games was scarce.

  As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a special game determination as to whether or not to generate a special game (big hit game) state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the start condition. (A jackpot lottery) is executed, and in the gaming machine that generates the special game state based on the result of the special game determination, the variable display of the identification information (special symbol) for notifying the result of the special game determination is executed. Fluctuation display executing means, and specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect (music preview effect) accompanied by the output of one or a plurality of music pieces during execution of the variable display, wherein the specific effect execution means is the special effect execution means. The number of pieces of music output during execution of the specific effect is different depending on whether the degree of expectation that the game state is generated is low or high.

  By doing in this way, the player's expectation for the occurrence of a special gaming state can be effectively increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-152251), based on a determination result of whether or not a special gaming state occurs, a notice of changing the effect mode over a plurality of stages. The production mode is changed up to a stage corresponding to the degree of expectation that the special game state is generated. However, in such a gaming machine, the higher the degree of expectation that a special gaming state will occur, the easier the stage of the notice effect changes to the final stage, but this effectively increases the player's expectation for the notice effect. However, there was a problem that the interest of the game was poor.

  As a configuration for solving the above-described problem, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variation display of the identification information (special symbol) is executed based on the establishment of the start condition, and the variation display result is the special result mode. In a gaming machine capable of generating a special game (big hit game) state advantageous to the player, a determination means for determining whether or not to generate the special game state before the result of the variable display is derived. And a specific effect executing means for executing a predetermined specific effect (acquired challenge effect) based on the determination result of the determining means, and a predetermined notice for notifying that the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means. A notice effect execution means for executing a notice effect (step-up notice effect 1), and the predetermined notice effect is a notice effect that can change the effect mode over a plurality of stages. The plurality of stages includes a first stage, a second stage subsequent to the first stage, and a final stage subsequent to the second stage. The second stage effect is executed over a longer time than the first stage effect and the final stage effect.

  By doing in this way, a player's expectation with respect to a notice effect can be raised effectively, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of a game.

  Further, in a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-152251), based on a determination result of whether or not a special gaming state occurs, a notice of changing the effect mode over a plurality of stages. The production mode is changed up to a stage corresponding to the degree of expectation that the special game state is generated. However, in such a gaming machine, the final stage number is common despite the fact that there are multiple types of notice effects, so the number of stages expected by the player is constant no matter which notice effect is executed. In the end, there was a problem that there was little interest in the notice production.

  As a configuration for solving the above-described problem, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variation display of the identification information (special symbol) is executed based on the establishment of the start condition, and the variation display result is the special result mode In a gaming machine capable of generating a special game (big hit game) state advantageous to the player, a specific variation display for executing a specific variation display (acquired challenge effect) after a predetermined period from the start of the variation display Execution means, and notice effect execution means for executing any of a plurality of types of notice effects (step-up notice effects 1 to 3) for notifying that the specific effect is executed during the specific variation display, The plurality of types of notice effects are notice effects that can change the effect form over a plurality of stages, and the first notice effect (step-up notice effect 1 in which the final number of stages is set to the first number of stages). And the second notice effect (step-up notice effect 2 or 3) set to a second number of stages whose number of final stages is greater than the number of first stages, Even when the notice effect is executed up to the final number of stages, the notice effect is executed up to the final number of stages between the start of the specific variation display and the execution of the specific effect. Yes.

  By doing in this way, a player's expectation with respect to a notice effect can be raised effectively, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of a game.

  Further, in a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine described in JP2013-208143A), in the effect display unit in order to notify the player of the number stored for the special game lottery. The pending number was displayed. However, in a recent gaming machine, the effect agent device is enlarged, and when it is movable, the effect display unit is covered and it becomes difficult to visually recognize the reserved number, or a specific effect image is displayed on the effect display unit. In some cases, the display of the hold number may be erased. In these cases, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the hold number.

  As a first configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the start information acquisition means for acquiring start information when the start condition is satisfied, and the start information acquisition means After acquiring the start information, a special game determination (bonus lottery) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (bonus game) advantageous to the player based on the start information is triggered when the determination condition is satisfied. Based on the control information from the main control means (main control board 110) having the special game determination means to be performed and the main control means, the image display device (first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal)) produces a variable effect. In a gaming machine comprising sub-control means (production control board 130) to be executed, the main control means, when the start condition is satisfied but the determination condition is not satisfied, First hold storage means for storing the start information acquired by the information acquisition means as a hold storage up to a predetermined number, and the number of the hold storage stored in the first hold storage means as the hold storage number information A holding memory number information transmitting means for transmitting to the control means, and displays a holding display corresponding to the number of the holding memories stored in the first holding storage means (first special symbol holding first) Display means 63, 64), and the sub-control means includes second hold storage means for storing the number of the hold memories indicated by the hold memory number information transmitted by the hold memory number information transmission means, Further, a hold display corresponding to the number of the hold storages stored in the second hold storage means is displayed on the second hold display device (special symbol hold first display 83, 84) and the image display device. It was so as to.

  As a second configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the start information acquisition means for acquiring start information when the start condition is satisfied, and the start information acquisition means After acquiring the start information, a special game determination (bonus lottery) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (bonus game) advantageous to the player based on the start information is triggered when the determination condition is satisfied. Main control means (main control board 110) having special game determination means for performing, and sub-control means (effect control board 130) for executing a variation effect in the image display device based on control information from the main control means. , The main control means, when the start condition is satisfied, but the determination condition is not satisfied, the start acquired by the start information acquisition means The first hold storage means for storing the information as a hold storage up to a predetermined number, and the number of the hold storage stored in the first hold storage means is sent to the sub-control means as the hold storage number information. Transmitting means, and displaying a hold display corresponding to the number of the hold memories stored in the first hold storage means on the first hold display device (special symbol hold first display 63, 64). The sub-control means further comprises second hold storage means for storing the number of the hold memories indicated by the hold memory number information transmitted by the hold memory number information sending means, and the second hold storage means The second hold display device (special symbol hold second display 83, 84) and the image display device (first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal)) corresponding to the number of the hold storage stored in In the table In the hold display displayed on the image display device, the first form (first hold icon H11 to H14, second hold icon H21 to H24) displayed by a hold icon and the second form displayed by a numerical value (Holding number display area (first holding number display area SH1, second holding number display area SH2) including a holding number display (first holding number display, second holding number display), A suggestion effect that suggests a determination result of the special game determination can be executed, and a specific suggestion effect (for example, an SP reach effect, an SPSP reach effect, a blackout effect, or a movement of the movable effect member 73 that is determined in advance in the variation effect. When the specific suggestive effect is performed, the hold display of the first mode displayed on the image display device is deleted. I was trying to make it.

  By adopting the first configuration or the second configuration, it is possible to grasp the reserved number.

  In addition, in conventional gaming machines (for example, gaming machines described in JP2013-208143A), as the game progresses, a variation display of a design symbol for notifying a lottery result of a special game, a display of the number of holds, etc. (Hereinafter, referred to as “predetermined information regarding the progress of the game”) and the predetermined information regarding the progress of the game are displayed on the effect display unit in order to notify the player. However, in a recent gaming machine, the effect agent device is enlarged, and when it is movable, the effect display unit is covered and predetermined information regarding the progress of the game becomes difficult to visually recognize, or a specific effect image is displayed in the effect display unit. In some cases, the display of the predetermined information related to the progress of the game may be erased. In these cases, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the predetermined information related to the progress of the game.

As a first configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the start information acquisition means for acquiring start information when the start condition is satisfied, and the start information acquisition means After starting information is acquired, a special game determination (bonus lottery) is performed as to whether or not a special game advantageous to the player (bonus game) is executed based on the start information when the determination condition is satisfied. Main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, including special game determination means, and sub-control means (effect control board 130) that controls the presentation based on the control information from the main control means. The main control means causes the first game information display device (first game information display device 59) to display predetermined information relating to the progress of the game, and the sub-control means displays the control information in the control information. Predetermined information on the progress of the game by Zui so that is displayed in the second game information display device (second game information display unit 79) and an image display apparatus (first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal)).
In addition, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game machine 1 further includes a luminance adjusting unit (sub CPU 130a) for adjusting the luminance of the display device, and the luminance adjusting unit adjusts the luminance of the image display device. 2. The brightness of the game information display device is not adjusted.

  As a second configuration for solving the above-described problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the start condition is established in the gaming machine in which the player plays a game by firing the gaming medium into the gaming area. As a trigger, a start information acquisition means for acquiring start information and a special game determination as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player based on the start information acquired by the start information acquisition means ( A main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a sub-control means for controlling effects based on the control information from the main control means. (Effect control board 130), and the main control means causes the first game information display device (first game information display device 59) to display predetermined information relating to the progress of the game, and The control means sends predetermined information relating to the progress of the game to the second game information display device (second game information display device 79) and the image display device (first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal)) based on the control information. The second game information display device is provided in the game area and forms a part of the passage route of the game medium.

  As a third configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the start information acquisition means for acquiring start information when the start condition is satisfied, and the start information acquisition means Main control for controlling the progress of the game, comprising special game determination means for performing a special game determination (bonus lottery) as to whether or not to execute a special game (bonus game) advantageous to the player based on the acquired start information Control means (main control board 110) and sub-control means (effect control board 130) for controlling the presentation based on the control information from the main control means, the main control means is a game progress The predetermined information regarding the game is displayed on the first game information display device (first game information display device 59), and the sub-control means displays the predetermined information regarding the progress of the game based on the control information in the second game. Information display device (second game information display device 79) and image display device (first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal)), the second game information display device is compared with the first game information display device. In the vicinity of the image display device.

  By adopting these first to third configurations, it becomes possible to grasp predetermined information regarding the progress of the game.

  In addition, in conventional gaming machines (for example, gaming machines described in JP2013-208143A), as the game progresses, a variation display of a design symbol for notifying a lottery result of a special game, a display of the number of holds, etc. (Hereinafter, referred to as “predetermined information regarding the progress of the game”) and the predetermined information regarding the progress of the game are displayed on the effect display unit in order to notify the player. By the way, when a power failure occurs in a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-123507), a power failure recovery screen indicating that recovery from the power failure is in progress is displayed at the time of subsequent power failure recovery. It was displayed on the device (effect display section). However, this power failure recovery screen usually only displays “Recovering power failure”. Therefore, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the predetermined information regarding the progress of the game during the recovery from the power failure.

  As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the start condition is satisfied, the start information acquisition means for acquiring start information and the start information by the start information acquisition means After the acquisition, when the determination condition is satisfied, a special game determination is performed to perform a special game determination (big win lottery) as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (big hit game) based on the start information A main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game comprising means, a sub-control means (effect control board 130) for effect control based on control information from the main control means, Control of the progress of the game when the predetermined level value is detected based on detecting that the power supplied to the gaming machine has become a predetermined level value lower than a normal value. A game state storage unit that stores information related to the game so that the information can be held even in a state in which the supplied power is not supplied, and when the game machine is activated, the game state storage unit stores information related to the progress control of the game Is further provided with game state recovery means for performing recovery processing for recovering the game state when the predetermined level value is detected based on the stored information relating to the progress control of the game, and the main control means Causes the first game information display device (first game information display device 59) to display predetermined information related to the progress of the game, and the sub-control unit displays the predetermined information related to the progress of the game based on the control information. 2 displayed on the game information display device (second game information display device 79) and the image display device (first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal)), the game state recovery When the restoration process is performed by the means, the display of the predetermined information related to the progress of the game is displayed on the display of the second game information display device earlier than the display of the image display device. It was.

  By doing in this way, it becomes possible to grasp | ascertain the predetermined information regarding progress of a game.

  In addition, in a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-33792), after a special game, the gaming state shifts to a high frequency support mode (time-short gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, The special game or high-frequency support mode is configured to aim at the right side of the game area by so-called right-hand hit, and in the special game or high-frequency support mode, it is right-handed to prompt the player to aim at the right side of the game area on the display screen. Display was in progress. However, in the recent gaming machines, the effect agent device is enlarged, and when the effect display unit is covered when it is movable and the right-handed display becomes difficult to visually recognize, or when a specific effect image is displayed on the effect display device May erase the right-handed display. In these cases, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to grasp the right-handed display.

  As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a normal gaming state (non-short-time gaming state) or an advantageous gaming state (short-time gaming state, jackpot) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. In a gaming machine controlled to any one of the gaming states), the main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and the control of effects based on the control information from the main control means Sub-control means (production control board 130) for performing the game, a game area where the game medium flows down, and a game medium launching means for launching the game medium in the game area according to a player's operation, The game area includes a first game area (left game area) that is a region where the game medium is to be fired when controlled in the normal game state, and the game medium when controlled in the advantageous game state. A second game area (right game area) that is to be fired, and when the main control means is controlled to the advantageous game state, the game medium is directed toward the second game area. Is displayed on the first display device (right-handed first display 67), and when the sub-control means is controlled to the advantageous gaming state, the second gaming area is displayed. Display on the second display device (right-handed second display 87) and the image display device (first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal)) for informing that the game medium should be emitted toward The display on the second display device is more easily recognized by the player than the display on the first display device, and the display on the image display device is displayed to the player more than the display on the second display device. The display was made easy to recognize.

  By doing in this way, it becomes possible to grasp the right-handed display.

  In addition, in a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-212234), the image display device performs the variable display of the three effect symbols in synchronization with the variable symbol variable display, and starts. The special symbol memory display indicating the start winning memory, which is the right to execute the variable display generated by winning the game ball in the winning opening, is displayed. In addition, when at least recovering from a power failure that occurred during execution of the special symbol fluctuation display, the power failure recovery screen is displayed and the special symbol memory display is displayed in a special manner in which the actual number of start winning prizes is unknown. It was. However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, the special symbol memory display is displayed in a special mode so that the player can visually recognize the power failure recovery screen, so what is the current situation? However, there was a problem that the player might get confused.

  As a configuration for solving the above-described problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a symbol variation display is executed based on the passing of the game ball to the starting area, and when the variation display becomes a special result, the player In a game machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game), the game ball has a storage means (main RAM 110c) capable of holding information capable of specifying the control state of the game even when the power is turned off, and the start area. Based on the storage information stored in the storage means (main CPU 110a) to be stored in the storage means as reserved storage up to a predetermined number for the variable display that has passed but not executed, Control state restoration means (main CPU 110a) for restoring the control state of the game to the state before the occurrence of power interruption, and image data for displaying effect images according to the progress of the game Display control means (image control unit 140) for performing control to be generated and displayed on the image display means, and the effect image includes a power restoration image that is displayed for a predetermined period from the restoration of the control state, A period of time during which the storage is stored is a storage image to be displayed (a storage icon image, a storage number display image, etc.), and the display control means displays the power recovery image and the storage storage image. In such a case, image data in which the power restoration image is superimposed on the front side of the reserved storage image is generated.

  By doing in this way, it becomes possible to suppress the inconvenience that a player gets confused after the power is restored.

  In addition, in a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-212234), the image display device performs the variable display of the three effect symbols in synchronization with the variable symbol variable display, and starts. The special symbol memory display indicating the start winning memory, which is the right to execute the variable display generated by winning the game ball in the winning opening, is displayed. In addition, when recovering from a power failure that occurred during at least the special symbol fluctuation display, a power failure recovery screen is displayed, and when the power failure recovery screen is displayed, the power failure recovery screen is displayed when receiving the start winning prize identification information (holding number command) The special symbol memory display was displayed so as to overlap the front side of the. However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, since the special symbol memory display is displayed so that the player can visually recognize the power failure recovery screen during the display, the player can see what the current situation is There was a problem that could be confused.

  As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, game control means for controlling the progress of the game, and effect control for controlling the effect of the game based on commands from the game control means. And a game machine capable of executing a variable display of symbols based on the passage of the game ball to the starting area, and capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player when the variable display becomes a special result. The means holds the information that can specify the control state of the game even when the power is turned off, and the variable display that the game ball has passed through the start area but has not been executed is reserved and stored up to a predetermined number. A storage unit for storing the storage unit as a storage unit, a storage unit command transmission unit for transmitting a storage unit command for specifying the number of the storage units stored in the storage unit, and a recovery from a power interruption Control state recovery means for recovering the control state to the state before the occurrence of power interruption based on the storage information of the storage means, and recovery of the control state based on the recovery of the control state by the control state recovery means A power recovery command transmitting means for transmitting a power recovery command that can identify the power, and the number-of-holds command transmitting means is when there is a change in the number of the reserved memories and when the control state is recovered The suspension control unit is configured to transmit the hold number command, and the presentation control unit causes the image display unit to display a hold storage image capable of specifying the number of hold storages based on reception of the hold number command, and to restore the power supply. Based on the reception of the command, a power restoration image that can be recognized as having been restored from the power interruption is displayed on the image display means, and the reserved storage image is a table of the power restoration image. Period so that the player after the completion is displayed on the image display means so as to be visible.

  By doing in this way, it becomes possible to suppress the inconvenience that a player gets confused after the power is restored.

  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and can also be used for a spinning-type gaming machine (so-called slot machine). Furthermore, it can also be used for Jiyan ball game machines and arrange ball game machines.

  In addition, it should be considered that the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

1 gaming machine 5 game board 43 general winning opening 43a general winning opening detection switch 44 universal gate 44a gate detection switch 45 first start opening 45a first start opening detection switch 47 second start opening 47a second start opening detection switch 50 large Winning port 50a Large winning port detection switch 70 First image display device (main liquid crystal)
71 Second image display device (sub liquid crystal)
110 Main control board 110a Main CPU
110b Main ROM
110c Main RAM
120 Discharge control board 130 Production control board 130a Sub CPU
130b Sub ROM
130c Sub RAM

The gaming machine according to the present invention executes a variable display of symbols based on the passing of the game ball to the starting area, and when the variable display becomes a special result, the gaming machine can execute a special game advantageous to the player. Storage means capable of holding information capable of specifying the control state even when the power is turned off, and the change display that has not yet been executed but passed through the starting area but is not yet executed in the storage means as a reserved storage. Based on the storage information stored in the storage means at the time of recovery from power interruption, the control state restoration means for restoring the game control state to the state before the occurrence of power interruption, and the progress of the game comprising a display control means for generating image data for displaying an effect image performs control to display on the image display means, and said to effect image is the entire display area in a predetermined time period from the recovery of the control state And a power recovery images shown, and a hold memory image the pending memory is displayed in a predetermined area of the display area in the period stored, wherein the display control unit, a front Symbol hold stored image is displayed If made, regardless of whether the power is restored image is set to the hold memory image upper layers than is the predetermined period to be displayed, generates the image data including the hold memory image When the reserved stored image is to be displayed during the predetermined period, the reserved stored image set in a lower layer than the power restoration image is not visible .

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine capable of executing a variation display of a symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the starting area, and executing a special game advantageous to the player when the variation display becomes a special result,
Storage means capable of holding information capable of specifying a game control state even when the power is turned off;
A holding storage means for storing in the storage means as a holding storage up to a predetermined number of the variable display that has not yet been executed, although the game ball has passed through the starting area;
Control state recovery means for recovering the control state of the game to the state before the occurrence of the power interruption based on the storage information of the storage means at the time of recovery from the power interruption,
Display control means for performing control for generating image data for displaying an effect image according to the progress of the game and displaying the image data on the image display means,
The effect image includes a power restoration image that is displayed for a predetermined period from the restoration of the control state, and a reserved storage image that is a display object for a period in which the reserved memory is stored,
The display control means includes
When the power restoration image and the reserved stored image are to be displayed, image data in which the power restored image is superimposed on the front side of the reserved stored image is generated.